PMIAS Academy UPSC Current Affairs February 2025.pdf

1
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
1
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
S.NO. PARTICULARS

PAGE NO.
GS1

8
Art and Culture
8
1. Legal Protection of Domestic Workers
8

2.
Rules For Registering Live-in Relationships Under UCC
8
3. Gyan Bharatam Mission
10
4. Dhimsa Dance
11
5. Kalbelia Community
11
6. Preserving India’s Cultural Heritage
12
7. Dokra Artwork
13
8. Relics of Ratnagiri: Buddhist Heritage
13
Climatology
15
1. Anticyclone System
15
History
15
1. Saroijini Naidu
15
2. Swami Ramakrishna Paramhansa
16
3. Chhatrapati Shivaji Maharaj Jayanti
16
4. 900-yr-old Kalyana Chalukya-era inscriptions unearthed
17
Indian Society and Social Issues
18
1. Legal Protection of Domestic Workers
18
2. Rules For Registering Live-in Relationships Under UCC
19
3. Bhopal Prohibits Begging
20
4. Legal Standing of Adultery in Civil Cases
22
Physical Geography
23
1. Ocean Coordination Mechanism
23
2. Western Disturbance 24
3. Darien Gap 24
4. Earth’s Inner Core is Undergoing Structural Changes 25
5. Delhi’s Shallow Earthquake 25
Places in news 27
1. Sagar Island 27
2. Gulf of Eilat (Gulf of Aqaba) 27
Society 27

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
2
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
1. Sexual Equality Must be a Part of School Syllabus 27
GS 2
28
Education
28
1. NITI Aayog Releases Policy Report on State Public Universities (SPUs)
28
Government Policies & Interventions
29
1. International Mother Language Day
29
2. Integrating AI in India’s Judiciary and Law Enforcement
30
Health 32
1.
Mental Well Being and Economic Growth

32
2.
Brucellosis

34
3.
Financial Assistance For Rare Disease

34
4.
Rural Indians Suffer from a ‘Hidden Hunger’

35
5.
Development and Commercialisation of Typhoid Vaccine

36
6.
Medical Termination of Pregnancy (MTP) Act

36
7.
Russia’s MRNA Based Cancer Vaccine

37
8.
Intensified Non Communicable Disease (NCD) Screening Campaign Launched

38
9.
Harnessing AI to Generate Patterns of Antibiotic Resistance

38
Important International Institutions
39
1. US Withdrawal from UNHRC, WHO, and Other International Forums
39
India & Its Neighbourhood Relations
41
1. India-UK Defence Collaboration
41
2. India-Sri Lanka Fisheries Dispute
42
Indian Polity & Governance
43
1.
UIDAI Notifies New Rules for Aadhar Authentication

43
2.
US Reviews Sanctions Waiver for India’s Chabahar Port Project

44
3.
State Emblem of India

45
4.
Tribhuvan Sahkari University

46
5.
Role of Governor Over Assenting Bills

46
6.
Power to Grant Furloughs

47

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
3
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
7.
Supreme Court Directive on Sacred Groves

48
8.
Manipur Unrest Raises the Question of President’s Rule

49
9.
Contesting of Elections by the Convicted Persons

50
10.
Freebies Culture in India

51
11.
Issue of Pendency of Cases in Indian Judiciary

52
12.
Draft Advocates (Amendment) Bill, 2025

54
13.
Manipur Placed Under President’s Rule

55
14.
Removal of Judges In india

55
15.
Judicial Overreach: Involvement of CJI in Executive Appointments

56
16.
Status of Devolution to Panchayats in State 2024

57
17.
The Immigration and Foreigners Bill, 2025

59
18.
Obscenity in Online Content

59
19.
Appointment of Chief Election Commissioner

60
20.
‘Rarest of rare’ Doctrine

62
21.
SC stays Lokpal Order Giving Itself Jurisdiction over HC Judges

62
22.
I&B Ministry Advisory on ‘Obscene Content’

63
23.
Ragging Deaths in India

65
24.
Three-language Policy Under NEP 2020

66
25.
Deregulation Commission & State’s Role in Governance

67
26.
Internet Shutdowns in India

69
27.
Supreme Court Emphasized Segregation of Waste at Source

71
28.
Delimitation Debate: Why Are Southern States Wary?

72
29.
Concerns Raised By PwDs Over DPDP rules

73
International Organisations
74
1.
International Organization of Aids to Marine Navigation (IALA)

74
International relations
74
1.
India-EFTA Desk

74
2.
India- France Cooperation on IMEC Project

76

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
4
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
3.
Concerns Related To China’s Dam Project

77
4. Freeze on USAID by United States
78
5.
U.S.-India TRUST Initiative

79
6.
India-US 123 Agreement

79
7.
Indian Ocean: Strategic Significance & India’s Role

80
8.
India-U.S. Partnership on Underwater Domain Awareness (UDA) Technologies

81
9.
India, Qatar Elevate Ties To ‘Strategic Partnership’

82
10.
India and Argentina Strengthen Cooperation in Lithium Exploration

83
11.
India, China Worked hard to Protect G-20

84
12.
India-Japan Economy and Investment Forum

85
13.
3 Years of India and UAE-CEPA

87
14.
India’s ‘Look East’ Policy Has Transformed Into ‘Act East’

88
Social Justice
90
1.
World Day of Social Justice

90
Welfare Schemes
91
1.
Jal Jeevan Mission (JJM) Extended Till 2028

91
2.
Guru-Shishya Parampara Scheme

93
3.
NAMASTE Scheme

93

GS 3

93
Agriculture
93
1.
e-NAM to be Upgraded to Address Logistical Challenges

93
2.
9 Years of Pradhan Mantri Fasal Bima Yojana (PMFBY)

94
3.
Extension of PM-AASHA Scheme Until 2025-26

95
4.
Decade of Soil Health Cards

97
1. Climate change
97
1.
Global Sea Ice Cover Has Dipped to Record Low

97

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
5
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Denfence
98
1.
Trial of Very Short-Range Air Defence System (VSHORADS)

98
2.
India-Russia Defence Cooperations

98
3.
Army to Strengthen its Air Defence Amid Drones and Security Threats

100
4.
India’s dilemma Over Fighter Jets

101

Environment

102
1.
Retreating Himalayan Glaciers

102
2.
Climate Crisis has Intensified Marine Heatwaves Across the World

103
3.
India Achieves Historic Milestone of 100 GW Solar Power Capacity

104
4.
Heatwaves

105
5.
Urban Environmental Protests: Chipko Legacy in Cities

106
6.
Parambikulam Tiger Reserve

107
7.
Puducherry-Villupuram-Auroville-Cuddalore (PVAC) Bioregion

108
8.
India’s 1st Vertical Bifacial Solar Plant

108
9.
Peatlands: A Vital Yet Underprotected Carbon Reservoir

108
10.
Concern Over Moving African Cheetahs to India: Study

110
11.
Glacier Ice Algae Accelerate Greenland Ice Sheet Melting

111
Indian Economy and Economic Development
111
1. Economic Survey 2024-25: India’s Workforce Vulnerable to AI
111
2.
Economic Survey 2024-25: Shift from Globalization to Geo-Economic
Fragmentation
112
3. India’s Debt Market Challenges
114
4. Budget 2025-26 :Key Highlights
115
5. Aatmanirbharta in Pulses
118
6. Green Cardamom
120
7. Health Insurance Cover for 1 crore Gig Workers
120
8. 100% FDI in Insurance Sector
122
9. Rupee Breaches 87-level Against Dollar
123
10. Shift to Debt-GDP Ratio from Fiscal Deficit as Fiscal Anchor
124
11. GREAT Scheme
125

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
6
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
12. States Demand for Increase Share in Central Taxes
126
13. Private Sector Involvement in India’s Nuclear Sector
127
14. India’s Gold Investments Surge 60% to Rs 1.5 lakh Crore in 2024
128
15. Budgetary Allocation for Urban Development
129
16. India’s Pharmaceutical Exports Set for 10x Growth
130
17. India’s FDI Policy Framework for Investments
131
18. The Income-tax Bill, 2025
132
19.
Parliamentary Panel Recommends Minimum Price for Paddy Residue to Curb
Stubble Burning
132
20. Changing Employment Sector in India
134
21. Sovereign Green Bonds
136
22. Andhra Pradesh Promoting Work From Home for Women
136
23. Mutual Credit Guarantee Scheme For MSMEs
137
24. Kerala’s Plan to Grant Industry Status to Tourism
137
25. Bharat Tex 2025 For Textile Industry
138
26. NAKSHA Program
139
27. RBI to Raise Deposit Insurance Cover
140
28. Committee to Review India’s Insurance Sector
140
29. Inland Waterways Terminal (IWT)
142
30. RBI Restrictions on New India Co-operative Bank
142
31. India’s Rising LNG Imports
143
Infrastructure
145
1. Government to Lease Out 10 Airports via PPP Model
145

Science and Tech

146
1. Samudrayaan Mission
146
2. India’s Nuclear Energy Roadmap: Union Budget 2025-26
146
3. Jevons Paradox
148
4. India’s Diagnostics Sector
148
5. Chandrayaan-4 Set to Launch in 2027
149
6. Facial Recognition System (FRS)
150
7. SRY Gene for Gender Identification
151
8. Budget Allocation for Research, Development and Innovation
152

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
7
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
9. Paris AI Action Summit
153
10. Project Waterworth
154
11. RuTAGe Smart Village Center (RSVC)
155
12. China’s EAST Reactor
156
13. ‘Majorana 1’: A Quantum Chip
157
14. Using Quantum Property of the Nanocrystals
158
15. India’s First indigenous Semiconductor Chip to be Ready by 2025
159
Security
160
1.
Government’s Commitment to Eradicating Left-Wing Extremism (LWE) by
2026
160
2. Violation and Misuse of the FEMA
161
Space
163
1. India’s Space Economy to Increase Five-fold
163
GS 4 164

Ethics

164
1.
Karnataka Allows Dignified Death for the Terminally ill

164
2.
Corruption Perceptions Index (CPI) 2024

165

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
8
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
GS I
ART AND CULTURE
Legal Protection of Domestic Workers
Syllabus: GS1/ Society, GS2/ Governance
In News
 In a landmark move, the Supreme Court of
India has directed the Union government to
examine the need for a separate law for
domestic workers.
 The Court has ordered the formation of
an inter-ministerial committee to assess and
recommend a legal framework for
their benefit, protection, and regulation of
rights.
Current Situation of Domestic Workers
About:
 Despite their crucial role in millions of
households, domestic workers lack legal
protection under many labour laws,
including the Minimum Wages Act and the
Equal Remuneration Act.
 While some states have introduced
regulations, there is no national-level
law ensuring their rights.
 Vulnerability and Exploitation:
 Domestic work is a feminized occupation,
with a large proportion of workers
being women from marginalized
communities.
 Workers face low wages, job insecurity, and
increased workloads without additional pay.
 Social security measures are almost non-
existent, leaving workers vulnerable to
financial crises.
 Domestic work is socially undervalued and
perceived as an inherent skill all women
should possess, contributing to its
invisibility and lack of recognition.
Challenges and Judicial Interventions
 ILO Convention 189: India has not
ratified this global standard on domestic
workers’ rights, which mandates fair wages,
social security, and protection against
abuse.
 Judicial Orders on Placement Agencies: The
Supreme Court has previously directed
the registration of placement agencies, but
enforcement remains weak, leaving
workers unprotected.
 Complex Employment Structures: Domestic
work exists in multiple forms—part-time,
full-time, making it difficult to implement
standardized protections.
Need for Inclusive Legislation
A separate law for domestic workers is essential to
address their unique challenges:
 Proof of Employment: Enforcing legal
protections requires formal documentation
of employment, which is currently difficult
for workers to obtain.
 Employer Resistance: Many employers do
not recognize themselves as “employers” or
consider their homes as formal workplaces.
 Power Imbalance: The asymmetric
employer-employee relationship—
where the employer’s private space is the
worker’s workplace—limits oversight and
regulation.
Opportunities and Challenges in Implementation
 Ensuring Core Entitlements: A well-
structured law can establish minimum
wages, regulate working hours, and provide
social security, significantly improving
conditions for domestic workers.
 Redefining Power Hierarchies: Legal
protections will challenge the existing
power dynamics and recognize the value of
housework and care work.
 Regional Considerations: States like Kerala
and Delhi have implemented measures for
domestic workers, which can serve as
models for national legislation.
 Challenges in Enforcement: Even with a new
law, effective implementation remains a key
challenge, requiring strong monitoring
mechanisms and employer accountability.
Conclusion
 The Supreme Court’s directive presents
a crucial opportunity to advocate for
a national law protecting domestic workers.
 While legislation alone may not
immediately transform working conditions,

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
9
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
it is a necessary first
step toward recognizing their rights,
ensuring fair wages, and providing social
security.
 The real impact will depend on
the recommendations of the committee and
the Union government’s commitment to
enforcing meaningful reforms.
Rules For Registering Live-in Relationships Under
UCC
Syllabus: GS1/Society; GS2/Government Policies &
Interventions
Context
 The newly implemented Uniform Civil Code
(UCC) in Uttarakhand has introduced a set
of detailed rules for registering live-in
relationships, aiming to regulate such
relationships and ensure that they are
recognized legally.
 However, they have also sparked significant
debate and raised concerns about privacy
and state surveillance.
About Live-in Relationships in India
 The concept of live-in relationships,
where couples cohabit without formal
marriage, has gained legal and social
recognition in India over the past two
decades.
 Historical Context: Historically, Indian
society has been rooted in traditional
values, where marriage was the only
recognized form of a committed
relationship.
 Live-in relationships were often stigmatized
and faced societal disapproval.
 However, with the influence of globalization
and exposure to Western culture, the
acceptance of live-in relationships has
grown.
Legal Recognition of Live-in Relationships in India
 Indian courts have acknowledged live-in
relationships through various judgments,
primarily invoking the Right to Life and
Personal Liberty (Article 21) of the
Constitution.
Various Judgements:
 S. Khushboo v. Kanniammal (2010): It ruled
that live-in relationships fall under the right
to personal liberty.
 Indra Sarma v. V.K.V. Sarma (2013): It
categorized live-in relationships into
various types, recognizing those that
resemble marriage under Protection of
Women from Domestic Violence Act, 2005
(PWDVA).
 The Chief Justice of India has emphasized
that the freedom to choose a partner and
form intimate relationships falls under the
ambit of free speech and expression, as
enshrined in Article 19(c) of the
Constitution.
Protection Against Domestic Violence Act, 2005
(PWDVA): It includes within its ambit ‘relationships
in the nature of marriage’, thereby extending
protection to women in live-in relationships who
face domestic violence.
 In D. Velusamy v. D. Patchaiammal (2010),
the Court held that only relationships in the
nature of marriage would be eligible for
legal protection under domestic violence
laws.
Inheritance and Maintenance Rights: In cases where
the couple has children, the Supreme Court has held
that children born out of live-in relationships are
entitled to inheritance rights similar to those born
to legally married parents.
Rules For Registering Live-in Relationships Under
UCC
 The Uttarakhand UCC mandates the
registration of live-in relationships. It
applies to both residents of Uttarakhand
and individuals residing elsewhere in India.
 Registration Requirements: Under the UCC,
couples entering into a live-in relationship
must register their relationship both at the
commencement and termination stages.
Supporting documents include Aadhaar-linked
OTPs, a registration fee, and a certificate from a
religious leader affirming the couple’s eligibility for
marriage if they wish to formalize their
relationship.
Prohibited Relationships: The UCC Act specifies 74
prohibited relationships, with 37 each for men and
women.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
10
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Couples falling within these degrees of
prohibited relationships must obtain
approval from religious leaders or
community heads.
 The registrar has the authority to reject
registrations if they conclude that the
relationship is against public morality or
customs.
Key Concerns and Impacts
 Privacy Concern: It is argued that it
constitutes a gross violation of the right to
privacy enshrined in Article 21 of the
Constitution (Justice K.S. Puttaswamy v.
Union of India), as increased state
surveillance over private lives.
 New rules have raised concerns about
the potential barriers they create
for interfaith and inter-caste relationships.
 Rights of Women and Children: Currently,
women in live-in relationships can claim
maintenance under Section 125 of the
Criminal Procedure Code
(CrPC) and PWDVA, 2005, but these rights
are not absolute.
 Protection Against Misuse: Individuals may
enter into such relationships without long-
term commitment but later claim legal
rights, leading to legal disputes.
 Social and Cultural Challenges: It
challenges traditional notions of family and
marriage, and raises questions about
the moral and ethical implications of live-in
relationships, particularly in conservative
communities.
Conclusion and Way Forward
 While the UCC in Uttarakhand aims to
provide legal recognition and protection for
live-in relationships, it also raises important
concerns about privacy and state
intervention.
 The balance between regulating
relationships and respecting individual
autonomy will be crucial in ensuring that
the new rules are implemented in a manner
that promotes social harmony and protects
the rights of individuals.
 If UCC replaces personal laws, there is a
need to focus on:
 ensuring equal rights for women in live-in
relationships.
 providing inheritance and maintenance
rights similar to those in marriage.
 clarifying the legal status of children born
out of live-in relationships, especially
regarding legitimacy and inheritance rights.
Gyan Bharatam Mission
Syllabus: GS1/ Art & Culture
In News
The Gyan Bharatam Mission was announced in
the Union Budget 2025-26.
About
 It is a landmark initiative focused on
the survey, documentation, and
conservation of India’s manuscript heritage.
 The mission aims to cover more than one
crore manuscripts, ensuring
their preservation and accessibility for
future generations.
 With this initiative, the government is
taking significant steps to reviving
the National Manuscripts Mission
(NMM) launched in 2003 but largely
inactive, and promoting India’s rich literary
and intellectual traditions at a global level.
 To accommodate this initiative, the budget
for the National Manuscripts Mission
(NMM) has been significantly increased
from ₹3.5 crore to ₹60 crore.
Significance of the Mission
 Preserving India’s Intellectual and Cultural
Heritage: Manuscripts hold knowledge on
subjects such as philosophy, science,
medicine, literature, mathematics, and
astronomy. Their preservation helps
safeguard India’s historical wisdom.
 Digital Access for Future Generations:
Manuscripts often suffer from physical
decay. Digitization ensures 24/7 access to
these texts worldwide while preventing
deterioration.
 Global Academic Impact: By making
manuscripts available for study, India
strengthens its position as a hub of ancient
knowledge and scholarship.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
11
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Understanding Manuscripts
 A manuscript is a handwritten document on
materials such as paper, birch bark, or palm
leaves.
 To be classified as a manuscript, it must
be at least 75 years old and hold scientific,
historical, or aesthetic value.
 India has an estimated 10 million
manuscripts in over 80 ancient scripts,
including:
 Brahmi, Kushan, Gaudi, Lepcha, Maithili,
Grantha, and Sharada.
 75% of manuscripts are in Sanskrit,
while 25% are in regional languages.
Dhimsa Dance
Syllabus: GS1/Culture
In News
Tribal families in Neelabandha celebrated their first
electricity supply since Independence with the
‘Dhimsa’ dance.
Dhimsa Dance
 Dimsa is a popular dance performed
by tribes, including Bagata, Valmiki, Poraja,
Khond, Gadaba, Kondadora, Mukadora,
Kotia in Andhra Pradesh .
 It represents the unity and cultural heritage
of the tribal communities.
 Themes: The dance variants are based on
themes like mythology, folktales, economic
activities, kinship, and marital life.
 Music and Instruments: Music is essential to
the dance, with instruments like dappu,
tudumu, mori, kidgi, gilka, and
jodukommulu (now almost out of use)
played by men.
 Performance : It is performed during
festivals, marriages, and religious occasions,
with a strong presence during Chaitrapurab
(Eetela Panduga) in the agency area of ASR
District.
 Both men and women can dance together
without hesitation, and while songs are not
mandatory, music plays a vital role.
Source :TH
Kalbelia Community
Syllabus: GS1/Culture
Context
A year-old night school in Ajmer’s Kishangarh
tehsil is unlocking new opportunities for Kalbeliya
women, providing them with access to education
and empowerment.
About the Kalbeliya Community
 The Kalbeliya are a nomadic tribe from
Rajasthan, historically known for snake
charming, folk songs, and dances.
 They are divided into two main
groups: Daliwal and Mewara, and are also
referred to as Sapera, Jogira, Gattiwala, and
Poogiwara.
 Despite being Hindu, the Kalbeliyas do not
cremate their dead; instead, they bury
them and place an idol of Shiva’s Nandi
bull on the grave.
 The 12th and 13th centuries were
considered the golden era for the
community, as noted by Polish poet Jan
Kochanowski. However, after Prithviraj
Chauhan’s defeat by Muhammad Ghori, their
prominence began to decline.
 The Wildlife Protection Act of 1972 further
disrupted their traditional snake-handling
profession, forcing them into alternative
livelihoods.
Kalbelia Dance:
A Living Heritage
 Kalbelia dance, also known as Sapera dance,
is an integral part of Kalbelia culture and
a symbol of their identity.
Both men and women participate:
 Women wear flowing black skirts, twirl
gracefully, and imitate serpent movements.
 Men accompany them with musical
instruments such as the khanjari
(percussion instrument) and poongi
(woodwind instrument), traditionally used
for snake charming.
 Dancers adorn traditional tattoo designs,
intricate jewellery, and richly embroidered
garments with mirror work and silver
thread.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
12
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Recognized globally, Kalbelia dance
was inscribed in 2010 on UNESCO’s
Representative List of the Intangible Cultural
Heritage of Humanity.
Source: TH
Preserving India’s Cultural Heritage
Syllabus: GS1/ Art & Culture
In Context
 India is home to some of the world’s most
iconic historical and cultural sites. However,
these monuments are under serious threat
due to climate change and human activities.
Role of the Archaeological Survey of India (ASI)
 The Archaeological Survey of India (ASI)
was established in 1861 to protect and
maintain historical monuments and sites.
 ASI currently oversees 3,698 protected
monuments under the Ancient Monuments
Preservation Act (1904) and the Ancient
Monuments and Archaeological Sites and
Remains Act (1958).
 ASI’s work includes:
 Conservation and Restoration: Regular
maintenance of temples, forts, tombs,
churches, palaces, and prehistoric sites.
 Preventive Measures: Addressing threats
from climate, pollution, encroachments, and
structural instability.
 Monitoring and Research: Studying the
impact of environmental changes on
monuments.
 Legal Enforcement: Ensuring monuments
are protected from illegal activities and
misuse.
Impact of Climate Change on Cultural Heritage
 Rising Sea Levels: Coastal heritage sites like
the Konark Sun Temple (Odisha) and
Mahabalipuram (Tamil Nadu) are at risk
from saltwater intrusion and erosion.
 Extreme Heat and Droughts: Heatwaves and
changing weather patterns affect the
stability of ancient structures, especially
those made from sandstone and limestone.
 Heavy Rains and Strong Winds: Increased
rainfall and cyclones lead to water damage
and erosion in forts, palaces, and cave
temples.
 Air Pollution: Pollution has severely affected
monuments like the Taj Mahal, turning its
marble yellow due to high sulfur dioxide
levels in the air.
Government Measures to Protect Heritage Sites
To counter these challenges, the government and
ASI have adopted several measures:

 Increased Funding for Conservation: The
budget for ASI’s preservation work has
increased by 70% in recent years.
 2020-21 Allocation: ₹260.90 crores
 2023-24 Allocation: ₹443.53 crores
 Climate-Resilient Conservation Methods: ASI
has adopted scientific preservation
techniques to protect monuments.
 Automated Weather Stations
(AWS): Installed in collaboration with ISRO
to monitor temperature, wind, rainfall, and
atmospheric pressure at heritage sites.
 Air Pollution Monitoring Labs: Set up near
monuments like Taj Mahal (Agra) and Bibi
Ka Maqbara (Aurangabad) to track
pollution levels.
 Collaboration with Other Agencies: ASI
works closely with the National Disaster
Management Authority (NDMA) and
UNESCO to develop strategies for disaster
management of cultural sites.
 Strengthening Legal Protection: Under the
Ancient Monuments and Archaeological
Sites and Remains Act (1958), monuments
are protected from encroachment and
misuse.
 Section 30 of the 1958 Act imposes heavy
fines and legal action against those who
damage or deface protected sites.
Way Forward

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
13
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Community Involvement: Local
communities should be engaged in
conservation efforts to foster a sense of
ownership and responsibility.
 Public Awareness: Educational programs
and campaigns can help people understand
the importance of protecting monuments.
 Advanced Technology: Using AI, 3D
mapping, and drone surveillance can help in
the documentation and restoration of
historical sites.
 Stronger Law Enforcement: Stricter laws
and harsher penalties for encroachments
and defacement must be enforced.
Dokra Artwork
Syllabus :GS 1/Art and Culture
In News
 Prime Minister Narendra Modi gifted
French President Emmanuel Macron a
traditional Dokra artwork depicting
musicians playing Indian instruments.
Dokra art

 Dokra art from Chhattisgarh is a traditional
metal-casting craft using the ancient lost-
wax technique.
 It is also practiced in states like Jharkhand,
Odisha, West Bengal and Telangana.
 The artwork, depicting musicians in
dynamic poses, emphasizes the cultural
significance of music in Indian heritage.
 Made from brass and copper, it features fine
detailing and is enhanced with lapis lazuli
and coral.
 The labor-intensive process showcases the
artisans’ skill and dedication, making the
piece a celebration of India’s tribal
traditions and artistic excellence.
Lost-wax technique
 It involves patterning a clay core intricately
with wax ribbons and then coating it carefully
with a mix of clay and hay.
 The wax is subsequently melted off, and the
cavity formed is filled with molten metal.
Source :IE
Relics of Ratnagiri: Buddhist Heritage
Syllabus: GS1/Art & Culture
Context
 Archaeologists have unearthed a 1.4-meter-
tall Buddha head along with 1,500-year-old
tablets and stupas at Ratnagiri, Odisha, in
December 2023.
 This significant discovery further
establishes Ratnagiri as a major center of
Vajrayana (Tantric Buddhism), which
flourished between the 6th and 12th
centuries CE.
 The recent excavation sheds light on
the artistic, spiritual, and educational
importance of Ratnagiri in the ancient
Buddhist world.
Historical Significance of Ratnagiri
 Ratnagiri, meaning ‘Hill of
Jewels’, flourished between the 6th and 12th
centuries CE under the patronage of
the Gupta and post-Gupta rulers.
 It was part of a broader network
of Buddhist sites in Odisha, along
with Lalitgiri and Udayagiri, forming
the ‘Diamond Triangle’ of Buddhist heritage.
 The presence of inscriptions, images of
Bodhisattvas, and stupas indicate that
Ratnagiri was a major center of Vajrayana
Buddhism.
 The site is believed to have played a crucial
role in the propagation of Buddhism in India
and beyond, particularly towards Southeast
Asia.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
14
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in

Relics and Artifacts
 Sacred Stupas and Relic Deposits: The
presence of relic caskets, sometimes
containing bone fragments, beads, or
inscriptions, suggests strong religious
reverence associated with these structures.
 Monasteries (Viharas) and Residential
Complexes: Ratnagiri houses two well-
preserved monasteries(Viharas), which
served as centers for Buddhist learning and
meditation.
 The larger monastery features a grand
entrance, a spacious courtyard, and
numerous cells for monks.
 The walls of these monasteries are adorned
with intricate carvings, including depictions
of deities such as Tara, Avalokiteshvara, and
Manjushri.
Exquisite Buddhist Sculptures:
 Seated Buddha in Bhumisparsha
Mudra (Earth-touching gesture),
symbolizing enlightenment.
 Dhyani Buddhas represent different aspects
of Buddhist philosophy.
 Images of Bodhisattvas such
as Avalokiteshvara and Maitreya.
 Female deities like Tara, signifying the
influence of Tantric Buddhism.
Inscriptions and Copper Plates:
 Several inscriptions in Brahmi and Sanskrit
scripts have been discovered, providing
valuable historical records.
 These inscriptions mention the patronage of
Buddhist kings, donations made to the
monasteries, and teachings followed at
Ratnagiri.
 Some inscriptions hint at connections with
distant Buddhist centers like Nalanda and
Vikramashila.
Terracotta Seals and Manuscripts:
 Excavations have also yielded terracotta
seals bearing the inscriptions ‘Sri Ratnagiri
Mahavihariya Arya Bhikshu
Sanghasya’ indicating that Ratnagiri was an
important monastic university.
 Fragments of ancient manuscripts suggest
the presence of scriptural studies and
Buddhist education.
Ratnagiri’s Role in Vajrayana Buddhism (A Tantric
Form)
 Numerous depictions of Vajrayana
deities and the presence of esoteric Buddhist
symbols suggest that this site was a key
center for tantric Buddhist practices.
 It is believed that Ratnagiri attracted
scholars, monks, and practitioners from
across India and beyond, contributing to the
spread of Buddhist philosophy.
Hinayana and Mahayana Buddhism
 Buddhism was separated into the Hinayana
and Mahayana sects in the Fourth Buddhist
Council (72 AD) held in Kashmir, under the
patronage of Kushan King Kanishka because
of differences in philosophy, practice, and
interpretation of Buddhist teachings.
Hinayana Buddhism (Lesser Vehicle, aka Theravāda
Buddhism)
 It emphasizes personal enlightenment (Arhat
ideal) through strict adherence to the
Buddha’s teachings.
 It focuses on monastic discipline and
the earliest Buddhist scriptures (Pali Canon or
Tripitaka).
View of Buddha: Historical teacher
It is prevalent in Sri Lanka, Myanmar, Thailand, Laos,
and Cambodia, and is often considered its surviving
school.
Mahayana Buddhism (Greater Vehicle)
 It was developed later (around the 1st century
BCE) emphasizing compassion (Karuna) and
the Bodhisattva ideal (seeking enlightenment
for all beings i.e Universal enlightenment or
Bodhisattva path).

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
15
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 It includes many texts beyond the Pali Canon,
such as the Lotus Sutra and Prajnaparamita
Sutras (Sanskrit and Chinese texts).
View of Buddha: Divine figure, multiple Buddhas
Spread across China, Korea, Japan, Tibet, and Vietnam,
leading to further branches like Zen, Pure Land, and
Vajrayana.

CLIMATOLOGY
Anticyclone System
Syllabus: GS1/Climatology
Context
 Weather experts said the anomalous spike
in temperatures in Mumbai was spurred by
the presence of an anticyclone system along
the western coast.
About
 An anticyclone is a high-pressure weather
system where the air pressure at the surface
is higher than the surrounding areas.

Key features of an anticyclone system:
 High pressure at the center: The air pressure
in the center of the system is higher
compared to the areas around it.
 Air movement: Air moves outward from the
center of an anticyclone.
 Sinking air: The air within an anticyclone
sinks rather than rising, preventing cloud
formation and often leading to dry and clear
conditions.
 Impact: Anticyclones can influence local
weather patterns significantly, sometimes
causing prolonged dry spells or heatwaves.
Source: IE
HISTORY
Saroijini Naidu
Syllabus: GS 1/History
In News
 India celebrates Sarojini Naidu’s birth
anniversary on February 13 as National
Women’s Day, marking her 146th birth
anniversary in 2025.
About Sarijini Naidu
 Sarojini Naidu, born on February 13, 1879,
in Hyderabad, was an inspiring poet and
political activist.
 She is famously known as the Nightingale of
India.
 She became the first female governor of
independent India when she was appointed
as the Governor of Uttar Pradesh in 1947.
 Major Contributions : She played a key role
in India’s struggle for independence and
was a follower of Mahatma Gandhi.
 As a member of the Constituent Assembly,
she helped in drafting the Indian
Constitution.
 She participated in the 1930 Round Table
Conference with Mahatma Gandhi.
 Poetry and Recognition: Naidu began
writing poetry at a young age, penning her
first long poem, The Lady of the Lake.
 She was elected as fellow of the Royal
Society of Literature in 1914 after
publishing her first poetry collection.
 Naidu’s poetry collection Golden Threshold
(1905) earned her the title “Bul Bul e
Hind” and recognition worldwide.
 Multilingual Abilities: She spoke multiple
languages, including Bengali, Gujarati,
Hindi, and English.
 Her eloquence in English captivated
audiences both in India and abroad, making
her a powerful voice in the Indian freedom
movement.
 Legacy: Sarojini Naidu passed away in 1949,
leaving a lasting legacy as a woman of
substance and dignity.
Source: PIB
Swami Ramakrishna Paramhansa

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
16
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Syllabus :GS 1/History
In News
 The Prime Minister paid tributes to Swami
Ramakrishna Paramhansa on his Jayanti.
Swami Ramakrishna Paramhansa
 Swami Ramakrishna was born as Gadadhar
Chattopadhyay on February 18, 1836, in
Kamarpukur, Bengal, to a poor Brahmin
family with strong religious values.
 His deep spirituality led him to explore
various religious paths, affirming that all
faiths lead to the same divine truth.
 His life was centered around uninterrupted
contemplation of God.
 His God-consciousness transcends time and
place, appealing universally to seekers of all
religions.
Notable Disciple
 Foremost among his innumerable disciples
was Swami Vivekananda, who was
instrumental in establishing the philosophy
of Ramakrishna at a global stage.
 Vivekananda established the Ramakrishna
Mission in 1897 to carry out the visions of
his Guru Ramakrishna and dedicated the
establishment in servitude of the society.
Teaching and Message
 Sri Ramakrishna’s life influenced modern
spiritual thought and currents.
 He proved that God-realization is not
limited by age, country, or people.
 His teachings demonstrated that God exists
beyond materialism and skepticism,
restoring faith in religion.
 His teachings and spiritual presence
uplifted individuals, transforming sinners
into saints and purifying all.
Relevance Today
 Ramakrishna’s greatest contribution is the
message of the harmony of religions.
 His message offers hope for the present-day
world, threatened by religious intolerance
and global crises.
 His teachings promote religious tolerance
and mutual respect, fostering fellowship
between different faiths.
Source :TH
Chhatrapati Shivaji Maharaj Jayanti
Syllabus: GS 1/History
In News
 The Prime Minister, Narendra Modi has
paid homage to Chhatrapati Shivaji Maharaj
on his Jayanti.
About Shivaji
 He was born in 1630 in Maharashtra.
 He was a prominent warrior king and
founder of the Maratha Empire, widely
admired for his progressive leadership,
military acumen, and fight for Swarajya
(self-rule).
 He was inspired by the teachings of
Maharashtra saints like Tukaram,
Dnyaneshwar, and Ramdas, who promoted
social equality and spiritual awakening.
Coronation
 In 1674, Shivaji crowned himself at Raigad,
marking the start of the ‘Rajyabhisheka Era’.
 Shivaji aimed to completely separate from
the Mughal Empire by establishing a new
coinage and regal insignia.
Administration
 He formed a council of eight ministers
called the Ashtapradhna, drawing
inspiration from ancient Indian political
texts like Mahabharata and Sukraniti.
 Shivaji’s kingdom was divided into
administrative units like Prants, Tarafs, and
Maujas.
 Chauth: 25 per cent of the land
revenue claimed by zamindars.
In the Deccan, this was collected
by the Marathas.

Sardeshmukhi: 9–10 per cent of
the land revenue paid to the
head revenue collector in the
Deccan.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
17
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Each Prant was governed by a Subedar and
a Karkun, while a Taraf was managed by a
Havaldar.
 Sanskrit titles were given to positions like
Deshadhikari, Mukhya-Deshadhikari,
Lekhak, and Mukhya-Lekhak
Revenue System
 He ensured financial unity by
adopting Malik Ambar’s land
revenue system, which classified land based
on fertility and fixed government shares.
 He abolished intermediaries (landlords or
mirasdars) and controlled land revenue
collection directly.
 Other sources of state revenue included
customs, transit duties, fines, war
booty, Chauth, and Sardeshmukhi.
Judicial System
 The judicial system was based on ancient
Indian texts like Manusmriti and Sukraniti.
 Courts like the Raj Sabha, Dharmasabha,
and Brahman Sabha played crucial roles in
decision-making.
 Disputes at the village level were resolved
by panchayats, with higher appeals made to
the mamladar or Peshwa.
Economic and Agricultural Policies
 Shivaji encouraged agriculture and the
prosperity of peasants by eliminating
oppressive feudal lords.
 New cultivators were given seeds and cattle
and their loans recovered over time.
 He also emphasized moderate taxation on
newly cultivated lands and excluded
wastelands from taxation initially.
Military and Foreign Affairs
 He maintained a strong military to protect
Swarajya and manage territories.
 His foreign policy involved strategic
alliances, diplomacy, and maintaining an
efficient intelligence network.
 He charted a course for a self-reliant naval
force, earning the title of the ‘Father of the
Indian Navy’.
Legacy
 Shivaji’s governance laid the foundation for
the Maratha Empire, combining a spirit of
nationalism with a strong, practical
administrative structure.
 His legacy is seen as a transformation in the
way leadership and governance were
perceived in 17th-century India.

900-yr-old Kalyana Chalukya-era inscriptions
unearthed
Syllabus :GS 1/History
In News
 Three Kannada inscriptions from the
Kalyana Chalukya era were noticed for the
first time in Kankal village of Telangana.
Historical Context
 The inscriptions belong to the
reign of Emperor Someswara-III
Bhulokamalladeva.
 The dates of the inscriptions are:
Dec 25, 1129 CE, Oct 5, 1130 CE,
and Jan 8, 1132 CE.
Details of the Inscriptions
 First inscription mentions the construction
of the Bijjeswara temple, consecration of a
Shivalinga, and a donation of 100 martars (a
historical land measure) of land by a local
chief.
 Second inscription records land and cash
donations to the Bijjeswara temple by a
local.
 The third inscription also documents
donations to the Bijjeswara temple.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
18
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Chalukyas
 The Chalukyas of Badami began their rule
in North Karnataka.
 Pulakesin I (543-66 CE), the founder of the
Chalukya dynasty, fortified Badami and
began territorial expansion.
 Pulakesin II defeated Harsha of Kanauj,
securing a major victory and assuming the
title “Parameshvara” (Supreme Lord).
 The Chalukyan rule in Badami ended
around 750 CE when Rashtrakuta
feudatory Dantidurga defeated
Kirtivarman II, bringing an end to the
Chalukya dynasty.
Chalukyas of Kalyana (Later Chalukyas):
 Known as the Later Chalukyas or Kalyani
Chalukyas, descended from the Badami
Chalukyas.
 Taila II, a key figure, rose to power under
the Rashtrakutas around 957 CE.
 Defeated Rajaraja Chola (992 CE), Latas,
Gurjaras, Chedis, and Paramaras.
Source :TOI

INDIAN SOCIETY AND SOCIAL ISSUES
Legal Protection of Domestic Workers
Syllabus: GS1/ Society, GS2/ Governance
In News
 In a landmark move, the Supreme Court of
India has directed the Union government to
examine the need for a separate law for
domestic workers.
 The Court has ordered the formation of
an inter-ministerial committee to assess and
recommend a legal framework for
their benefit, protection, and regulation of
rights.
Current Situation of Domestic Workers
About:
 Despite their crucial role in millions of
households, domestic workers lack legal
protection under many labour laws,
including the Minimum Wages Act and the
Equal Remuneration Act.
 While some states have introduced
regulations, there is no national-level
law ensuring their rights.
 Vulnerability and Exploitation:
 Domestic work is a feminized occupation,
with a large proportion of workers
being women from marginalized
communities.
 Workers face low wages, job insecurity, and
increased workloads without additional pay.
 Social security measures are almost non-
existent, leaving workers vulnerable to
financial crises.
 Domestic work is socially undervalued and
perceived as an inherent skill all women
should possess, contributing to its
invisibility and lack of recognition.
Challenges and Judicial Interventions
 ILO Convention 189: India has not
ratified this global standard on domestic
workers’ rights, which mandates fair wages,
social security, and protection against
abuse.
 Judicial Orders on Placement Agencies: The
Supreme Court has previously directed
the registration of placement agencies, but
enforcement remains weak, leaving
workers unprotected.
 Complex Employment Structures: Domestic
work exists in multiple forms—part-time,
full-time, making it difficult to implement
standardized protections.
Need for Inclusive Legislation
A separate law for domestic workers is essential to
address their unique challenges:
 Proof of Employment: Enforcing legal
protections requires formal documentation
of employment, which is currently difficult
for workers to obtain.
 Employer Resistance: Many employers do
not recognize themselves as “employers” or
consider their homes as formal workplaces.
 Power Imbalance: The asymmetric
employer-employee relationship—
where the employer’s private space is the
worker’s workplace—limits oversight and
regulation.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
19
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Opportunities and Challenges in Implementation
 Ensuring Core Entitlements: A well-
structured law can establish minimum
wages, regulate working hours, and provide
social security, significantly improving
conditions for domestic workers.
 Redefining Power Hierarchies: Legal
protections will challenge the existing
power dynamics and recognize the value of
housework and care work.
 Regional Considerations: States like Kerala
and Delhi have implemented measures for
domestic workers, which can serve as
models for national legislation.
 Challenges in Enforcement: Even with a new
law, effective implementation remains a key
challenge, requiring strong monitoring
mechanisms and employer accountability.
Conclusion
 The Supreme Court’s directive presents
a crucial opportunity to advocate for
a national law protecting domestic workers.
 While legislation alone may not
immediately transform working conditions,
it is a necessary first
step toward recognizing their rights,
ensuring fair wages, and providing social
security.
 The real impact will depend on
the recommendations of the committee and
the Union government’s commitment to
enforcing meaningful reforms.
Rules For Registering Live-in Relationships Under
UCC
Syllabus: GS1/Society; GS2/Government Policies &
Interventions
Context
 The newly implemented Uniform Civil Code
(UCC) in Uttarakhand has introduced a set
of detailed rules for registering live-in
relationships, aiming to regulate such
relationships and ensure that they are
recognized legally.
 However, they have also sparked significant
debate and raised concerns about privacy
and state surveillance.
About Live-in Relationships in India
 The concept of live-in relationships,
where couples cohabit without formal
marriage, has gained legal and social
recognition in India over the past two
decades.
 Historical Context: Historically, Indian
society has been rooted in traditional
values, where marriage was the only
recognized form of a committed
relationship.
 Live-in relationships were often stigmatized
and faced societal disapproval.
 However, with the influence of globalization
and exposure to Western culture, the
acceptance of live-in relationships has
grown.
Legal Recognition of Live-in Relationships in India
 Indian courts have acknowledged live-in
relationships through various judgments,
primarily invoking the Right to Life and
Personal Liberty (Article 21) of the
Constitution.
Various Judgements:
 S. Khushboo v. Kanniammal (2010): It ruled
that live-in relationships fall under the right
to personal liberty.
 Indra Sarma v. V.K.V. Sarma (2013): It
categorized live-in relationships into
various types, recognizing those that
resemble marriage under Protection of
Women from Domestic Violence Act, 2005
(PWDVA).
 The Chief Justice of India has emphasized
that the freedom to choose a partner and
form intimate relationships falls under the
ambit of free speech and expression, as
enshrined in Article 19(c) of the
Constitution.
Protection Against Domestic Violence Act, 2005
(PWDVA): It includes within its ambit ‘relationships
in the nature of marriage’, thereby extending
protection to women in live-in relationships who
face domestic violence.
 In D. Velusamy v. D. Patchaiammal (2010),
the Court held that only relationships in the
nature of marriage would be eligible for
legal protection under domestic violence
laws.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
20
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Inheritance and Maintenance Rights: In cases where
the couple has children, the Supreme Court has held
that children born out of live-in relationships are
entitled to inheritance rights similar to those born
to legally married parents.
Rules For Registering Live-in Relationships Under
UCC
 The Uttarakhand UCC mandates the
registration of live-in relationships. It
applies to both residents of Uttarakhand
and individuals residing elsewhere in India.
 Registration Requirements: Under the UCC,
couples entering into a live-in relationship
must register their relationship both at the
commencement and termination stages.
 Supporting documents include Aadhaar-
linked OTPs, a registration fee, and a
certificate from a religious leader affirming
the couple’s eligibility for marriage if they
wish to formalize their relationship.
Prohibited Relationships: The UCC Act specifies 74
prohibited relationships, with 37 each for men and
women.
 Couples falling within these degrees of
prohibited relationships must obtain
approval from religious leaders or
community heads.
 The registrar has the authority to reject
registrations if they conclude that the
relationship is against public morality or
customs.
Key Concerns and Impacts
 Privacy Concern: It is argued that it
constitutes a gross violation of the right to
privacy enshrined in Article 21 of the
Constitution (Justice K.S. Puttaswamy v.
Union of India), as increased state
surveillance over private lives.
 New rules have raised concerns about
the potential barriers they create
for interfaith and inter-caste relationships.
 Rights of Women and Children: Currently,
women in live-in relationships can claim
maintenance under Section 125 of the
Criminal Procedure Code
(CrPC) and PWDVA, 2005, but these rights
are not absolute.
 Protection Against Misuse: Individuals may
enter into such relationships without long-
term commitment but later claim legal
rights, leading to legal disputes.
 Social and Cultural Challenges: It
challenges traditional notions of family and
marriage, and raises questions about
the moral and ethical implications of live-in
relationships, particularly in conservative
communities.
Conclusion and Way Forward
 While the UCC in Uttarakhand aims to
provide legal recognition and protection for
live-in relationships, it also raises important
concerns about privacy and state
intervention.
 The balance between regulating
relationships and respecting individual
autonomy will be crucial in ensuring that
the new rules are implemented in a manner
that promotes social harmony and protects
the rights of individuals.
 If UCC replaces personal laws, there is a
need to focus on:
 ensuring equal rights for women in live-in
relationships.
 providing inheritance and maintenance
rights similar to those in marriage.
 clarifying the legal status of children born
out of live-in relationships, especially
regarding legitimacy and inheritance rights.
Bhopal Prohibits Begging
Syllabus: GS1/ Social Issue, GS2/ Governance
In News
 The Bhopal district administration has
prohibited all forms of begging, giving alms,
and purchasing goods from beggars,
invoking Section 163 of the Bharatiya
Nagarik Suraksha Sanhita (BNSS), 2023.
 Section 163 of BNSS empowers the DM, or
any other Executive Magistrate to issue
orders in cases of public nuisance.
 Section 223 of BNSS deals with the
punishment for disobedience of orders.
About
 As per the Census 2011, there are 4.13 lakh
beggars and vagrants in India.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
21
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Many cities have repeatedly undertaken
similar actions before major events. In
2017, Hyderabad banned begging before
the Global Entrepreneurship Summit, while
in 2010, Delhi removed beggars ahead of the
Commonwealth Games.
 These measures have drawn criticism for
targeting the most vulnerable sections of
society without addressing the root causes.
Need for Criminalising Begging
 Public Nuisance and Beautification: It is
often claimed that beggars create a negative
image for tourists and investors,
particularly before high-profile events.
 Traffic and Safety Concerns: Many beggars
operate at busy intersections, leading to
accidents and disrupting traffic flow.
 Organized Begging Syndicates: Law
enforcement agencies argue that many
beggars are part of larger organized
networks that exploit individuals, including
children and disabled persons.
 Public Health Risks: Some states cite health
and hygiene concerns, particularly in
crowded urban areas, as reasons for
imposing bans on begging.
Legal Framework for Begging in India
 Begging is not explicitly prohibited under a
national law, but several states have their
own anti-begging laws. The criminalization
of begging in India has its roots in colonial
jurisprudence, with several laws still in
effect today:
European Vagrancy Act, 1869: Enacted by the
British to maintain racial superiority by preventing
poor Europeans in India from resorting to begging.
 Bombay Prevention of Begging Act,
1959: Considered a model law, adopted by
multiple states including Gujarat,
Karnataka, Uttar Pradesh, and Andhra
Pradesh.
 It criminalizes begging and grants
authorities power to detain and penalize
beggars.
Bengal Vagrancy Act, 1943, and Madras Prevention
of Begging Act, 1945: These pre-independence laws
aimed at criminalizing beggars and rehabilitating
beggars in workhouses.
Vagrancy Laws under Concurrent List (Entry
15): Both the Union and state governments have
the authority to legislate on vagrancy and
destitution-related matters.
Section 163 & 223 of Bharatiya Nagarik Suraksha
Sanhita (BNSS), 2023
Article 23 of the Indian Constitution: Prohibits
traffic in human beings, begar (forced labor without
payment), and other forms of forced labor.
Why Begging Persists in India?
 Poverty and Unemployment: Economic
disparities and lack of job opportunities
force many individuals into begging.
 Lack of Social Security: Inadequate access to
food, healthcare, and shelter pushes
marginalized individuals to seek alms.
 Forced Begging and Trafficking: Organized
crime syndicates force children and
disabled individuals into begging.
 Migration and Urbanization: Many rural
poor migrate to cities in search of work but
fail to secure employment, ending up as
beggars.
 Disability and Mental Illness: Lack of proper
healthcare services leaves disabled and
mentally ill individuals with no choice but
to beg.
Implications of Criminalizing Begging
 Violation of Human Rights: Penalizing
begging disproportionately affects the
poorest sections of society and contradicts
constitutional guarantees of dignity and
equality.
 Arbitrary Detentions: Many anti-begging
laws empower authorities to detain the
beggars without due process of law.
 Failure to Address Root Causes: Simply
banning begging does not provide a solution
to poverty or homelessness.
Judicial Interventions:
 Delhi High Court (2018): Struck down parts
of the Bombay Prevention of Begging Act as
unconstitutional.
 Jammu and Kashmir High Court
(2019): Declared the Prevention of Beggary
Act and related rules as unconstitutional.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
22
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Supreme Court (2021): Recognized begging
as a socio-economic issue, refusing to
impose restrictions during COVID-19.
Government Initiatives for Rehabilitation
 SMILE Scheme (2021) : Central Sector
Scheme; “Support for Marginalized
Individuals for Livelihood and Enterprise”
focuses on rehabilitating beggars and
providing them with alternative livelihood
options.
 Persons in Destitution (Protection, Care and
Rehabilitation) Model Bill, 2016: Proposed
by the Ministry of Social Justice and
Empowerment to provide comprehensive
care and rehabilitation for destitute persons
but was eventually dropped.
 Shelters and Skill Development
Programs: Several states have launched
temporary shelters, food distribution
centers, and vocational training programs
to help reintegrate beggars into society.
Way Forward
 Legal Reforms: A comprehensive national
law focused on rehabilitation, rather than
criminalization, should replace outdated
colonial-era legislation.
 Strengthening Social Welfare
Schemes: Expanding social security
programs, healthcare access, and
employment opportunities can address the
root causes of begging.
 Regulation of Street Vending: Many beggars
resort to street vending. Legalizing and
supporting this activity can provide them
with sustainable livelihoods.
 Rehabilitation through NGOs and Private
Partnerships: Collaborating with NGOs and
private organizations can help implement
structured rehabilitation programs.
Legal Standing of Adultery in Civil Cases
Syllabus: GS1/Social Issues
Context
 Adultery remains in the statute books as
a ground for relief in civil cases relating to
maintenance and divorce, and as a ground
for punishment in the armed forces.
About
 Recently the Madhya Pradesh High Court
ruled that evidence of consensual sexual
intercourse was necessary to prove
adultery as a ground for cancellation of
maintenance.
 The ruling effectively restates the legal
definition of adultery that has been
accepted by the courts in civil proceedings.
What is Adultery?
 Section 497 of the Indian Penal Code, 1860
(IPC), recognised the crime of adultery and
provides the accompanying punishment.
 It defined adultery as “whoever has sexual
intercourse with a person who is and whom
he knows or has reason to believe to be the
wife of another man, without the consent of
that man, such sexual intercourse is guilty
of the offence of adultery”.
 Under it only a man could be prosecuted and
punished for committing the crime of
adultery.
 For someone to be punished for adultery he
must have had sexual intercourse with
another man’s wife, without that man’s
consent.
 Punishment: It was punishable with up to
five years imprisonment and a fine.
Decriminalization of Adultery
 The Supreme Court of India, in the
landmark judgment of Joseph Shine v. Union
of India (2018),struck down Section 497 IPC,
declaring it unconstitutional. The court held
that:
 Adultery is a private matter and does not
warrant criminal prosecution.
 It violates Article 14 (Right to Equality) and
Article 21 (Right to Life and Personal
Liberty) of the Constitution.
 Marriage is a personal relationship, and the
state should not interfere by imposing
criminal liability.
 However, the SC clarified that adultery
would remain a moral wrong and could be
invoked as a ground in civil proceedings.
 Despite decriminalization in civilian
life, adultery is still an offense under the
Army Act, 1950, the Navy Act, 1957, and the
Air Force Act, 1950. Military personnel can

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
23
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
face disciplinary action for adultery under
these laws.
Arguments in Favour of Decriminalising of Adultery
in India
 Gender Equality: As per the law only men
could be prosecuted, decriminalizing it
promotes gender equality.
 Personal Autonomy: Criminalizing adultery
undermines personal freedom and choice in
relationships.
 Encouragement of Healthy
Relationships: Decriminalizing adultery
shifts the focus from punishment to
addressing marital issues and encourages
individuals to resolve personal disputes
privately instead of using the legal system.
 Overburdening of Legal
System: Decriminalizing adultery would
reduce the burden on the judicial system,
allowing courts to focus on more pressing
criminal matters.
Arguments Against Decriminalising of Adultery in
India:
 Protecting Marital Integrity: Criminalizing it
helps protect the sanctity of marital bonds
and discourages actions that undermine
relationships.
 Deterrence: The threat of legal
consequences may act as a deterrent to
infidelity.
 Social and Moral Values: Decriminalizing it
could be seen as encouraging behavior that
erodes the foundation of family and societal
structures.
 Impact on Women: In societies where
patriarchy is still prevalent, removing
criminal consequences might encourage
men to engage in infidelity.
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY
Ocean Coordination Mechanism
Syllabus: GS1/ Physical Geography
In News
The Ocean Coordination Mechanism (OCM) is a
new initiative for ocean conservation.
About
 Announced by Intergovernmental
Oceanographic Commission (IOC) of
UNESCO on January 14, 2025.
 Focuses on the Caribbean and North Brazil
shelf, which are rich in biodiversity, coral
reefs, and fisheries.
Objectives: Establishes a collaborative framework
for ocean conservation.
 Builds on lessons from past initiatives like
Pacific Islands Regional Ocean Policy
(PIROP).
 Addresses financial sustainability with an
initial $15 million investment from Global
Environment Facility (GEF), plus $126.02
million in co-financing.
 Promotes Blue Carbon Projects to enhance
carbon storage and ecosystem resilience.
 Integrates traditional knowledge with
scientific research for community-driven
conservation efforts.
Importance of Oceans
 Cover 70% of Earth’s surface, playing a key
role in climate regulation, biodiversity, and
livelihoods.
 Threatened by pollution, overfishing,
climate change, and habitat destruction.
 Coastal ecosystems provide natural barriers
against storms and are crucial for economic
sustainability.
About Caribbean Sea
 The Caribbean Sea is a part of the Atlantic
Ocean, located southeast of the Gulf of
Mexico and north of South America.
 It is bounded by the Greater Antilles (Cuba,
Jamaica, Hispaniola, Puerto Rico) to the
north, the Lesser Antilles to the east, and
the coastlines of Central and South America
to the south and west.
 It is a major maritime route
connecting North and South America,
Europe, and Asia.
 It is home to one of the world’s largest coral
reef systems, including the Mesoamerican
Barrier Reef (2nd largest after the Great
Barrier Reef).
Western Disturbance

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
24
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Syllabus: GS1/ Geography
In Context
 The India Meteorological Department (IMD)
has reported a sharp temperature drop
across North India due to an active western
disturbance positioned over North
Pakistan.
What is Western Disturbance (WD)?
 It is an extra-tropical storm that originates
in the Mediterranean region.
 The disturbance travels from the “western”
to the eastern direction and gradually
travels across the middle-east from Iran,
Afghanistan and Pakistan to enter the
Indian subcontinent.
 Disturbance means an area of “disturbed” or
reduced air pressure.
 Equilibrium exists in nature due to which
the air in a region tries to normalize its
pressure.
 In the term “extra-tropical storm”, the
storm refers to low pressure.
 “Extra-tropical” means outside the tropics
(as WD originates outside the tropical
region).

Impacts
 It brings rainfall, snowfall, and fog to
northern India.
 WD is important for the agriculture of the
Rabi crop in the Northern subcontinent.
 The WD is not always the harbinger of good
weather and sometimes, they can cause
extreme weather events like floods, flash
floods, landslides, dust storms, hail storms
and cold waves killing people, destroying
infrastructure and impacting livelihoods.
Indian Meteorological Department
 Established in 1875.
 The India Meteorological Department is an
agency of the Ministry of Earth Sciences of
the Government of India.
 It is the principal agency responsible for
meteorological observations, weather
forecasting and seismology.
Source: PIB
Darien Gap
Syllabus: GS1/World Geography
Context
Darien Gap was in the news for being a major route
for the illegal migration to the US.
Darien Gap
 The Darien Gap is a dense, swampy
rainforest spanning approximately 97 km
(60 miles) between northern Colombia in
South America and southern Panama in
North America.
 Environment: The terrain is characterized
by muddy trails, wetlands, and steep
mountains, making it one of the most
inhospitable and dangerous regions in the
world.
 Concerns: The area is controlled by criminal
gangs and armed groups, further increasing
the dangers for those attempting to cross it.

Source: IE
Earth’s Inner Core is Undergoing Structural Changes
Syllabus :GS 1/Geography
In News

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
25
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 A recent study published in Nature
Geoscience suggests that the Earth’s inner
core is undergoing structural changes.
About the Study
 Methodology: Researchers used seismic
waves (shockwaves from earthquakes) to
examine Earth’s internal layers.
 These waves help visualize the Earth’s
internal structure, similar to how CT scans
work for the human body.
Observations Made:
 Scientists previously assumed Earth’s inner
core was solid and rigid. New findings
suggest it is softer near the surface.
 The solid inner core is being influenced by
the turbulent molten outer core. This
interaction might be altering its rotation
and affecting Earth’s day-length.
 Earlier, it was believed that the inner core
rotates independently due to interactions
with the mantle. The study suggests that this
rotation is now slowing down.
About Earth’s Layers
 Earth is a dynamic planet that undergoes
continuous changes inside and outside.
 The Earth is made up of several concentric
layers:
 Crust: The outermost layer; thinnest (35 km
on continents, 5 km on ocean floors). It
consists of silica and alumina (sial) on
continents and silica and magnesium (sima)
on the ocean floors.
 The Mantle: Located beneath the crust,
extends from the Moho’s discontinuity to a
depth of 2,900 km.
 The upper portion is called
the asthenosphere (extends up to 400 km)
and is the main source of magma.
 The crust and the upper mantle form the
lithosphere with a thickness ranging from
10-200 km.
 The lower mantle is solid and extends
beyond the asthenosphere.

 The Core: Located beneath the mantle at a
depth of 2,900 km.
 The core has very high temperature and
pressure and It consists of two parts:
 Outer core: Liquid state.
 Inner core: Solid state.
 Made mostly of nickel and iron, sometimes
called the nife layer.
 The outer core has been known to be
turbulent, it was previously believed that
this turbulence did not affect the inner core
on human timescales.
Delhi’s Shallow Earthquake
Syllabus: GS1/Geography; Important Geo-physical
Phenomena
Context
 Recently, a 4.0-magnitude earthquake
struck Delhi-NCR, causing strong tremors
despite its moderate intensity.
 The National Center for Seismology (NCS)
attributed the quake to in-situ material
heterogeneity—natural geological
variations—rather than plate tectonics.
What is ‘In-Situ Material Heterogeneity’?
 Unlike earthquakes caused by tectonic plate
movement, this event resulted from
variations in the physical properties of the
Earth’s crust. Differences in rock type, fluid
presence, and stress concentration can
create localized seismic activity.
Delhi’s Seismic Risk
 Located in Seismic Zone IV (second highest
in India).

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
26
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Near the Indian-Eurasian Plate collision
zone, where stress builds along fault lines.
Major Fault Systems:
 Delhi-Haridwar Ridge (extension of the
Indian Plate).
 Aravalli Fault System (deep-seated
geological structure).
Reasons for Strong Tremors
 Shallow Depth (5 km): Seismic waves had
less distance to travel, intensifying the
impact.
 Epicenter Within Delhi: The city’s dense
urban landscape and high-rise structures
amplified the effects.
 Soft Alluvial Soil: The Indo-Gangetic Plain
geology enhances wave propagation,
making tremors feel stronger.
About Earthquake
 It is the shaking of the ground caused by
movement beneath the earth’s surface
when two blocks slip past each other along
a fault.
 It releases stored elastic strain energy in the
form of seismic waves, which causes ground
shaking.
 Epicentre: location directly above it on the
surface of the earth;
 Hypocenter: location below the earth’s
surface where the earthquake;
Measuring of Earthquake:
 Magnitude: Richter scale;
 Intensity: Mercalli scale;
Earthquake in India
 India is one of the most seismically active
regions in the world due to its geographical
positioning along the Indian Plate, which is
colliding with the Eurasian Plate.
 Earthquakes have historically caused
significant devastation in various parts of
the country, particularly in the Himalayan
belt and other seismically vulnerable
regions.
 The growing number of tremors could be
linked to shifts in tectonic stress along fault
lines, particularly in northern India, and due
to the activation of the Almora fault.
India’s Earthquake Zones and Risk Areas
 India is highly vulnerable to earthquakes,
with 58.6% of India’s landmass is prone to
moderate to very high intensity
earthquakes.
 State-wise ‘Seismic Zonation Map’ of the
India country given by Bureau of Indian
Standards (BIS).
 Approximately 11% area falls in Zone V,
about 18% in Zone IV, about 30% in Zone III
and remaining in Zone II.
Seismic Zones in India
 Zone V (Highest Risk): Northeast India,
Himachal Pradesh, Uttarakhand, parts of
Bihar and Gujarat.
 These are the most vulnerable areas in
India, corresponding to MSK-9 levels of
intensity or higher.
 Zone IV:Delhi, parts of Maharashtra, Jammu
& Kashmir.
 It includes areas that are expected to
experience MSK-8-level intensity during an
earthquake.
 Zone III: Southern and central states with
moderate seismic activity.
 Zone II: Least risk, including parts of
southern India.

Key Initiatives
 Seismic Monitoring: The India
Meteorological Department (IMD) actively
monitors seismic activity and provides real-
time updates.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
27
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 NDMA Guidelines: The NDMA has issued
detailed guidelines for earthquake
preparedness, including community
awareness programs and structural safety
measures.
 Smart Cities and Resilient
Infrastructure: Government policies now
emphasize earthquake-resistant buildings,
particularly in high-risk areas.
PLACES IN NEWS
Sagar Island
Syllabus: GS1/Places in News
Context
 The West Bengal government has
announced comprehensive preparations for
the Gangasagar Mela 2025.
About
 Sagar Island is situated at the mouth of the
Bay of Bengal about 120 km from the State
capital Kolkata.
 It is the largest island in the Sundarbans
archipelago.
 Lakhs of pilgrims visit the island every year
to participate in the religious fair and take a
dip at the confluence of the Ganga and the
sea on the occasion of Makar Sankranti.
 The site is considered sacred and is home to
the Kapil Muni temple.
Source: TH
Gulf of Eilat (Gulf of Aqaba)
Syllabus: GS1/ Places In News
In News
 Recent research has uncovered a significant
pause in coral reef growth in the Gulf of
Eilat (Gulf of Aqaba).
About Gulf of Eilat
 Location: Northern tip of the Red Sea,
between the Sinai & Arabian Peninsulas.

 Bordering Countries: Egypt, Israel, Jordan,
and Saudi Arabia.
 Depth & Contrast: The Gulf of Aqaba is deep
(1,850 meters), unlike the much shallower
Gulf of Suez (100 meters).
 Coral Resources: The Gulf of Aqaba is
notable for its coral reef ecosystems, which
are among the world’s northernmost coral
reefs.
Source: TH
Sexual Equality Must be a Part of School Syllabus
Syllabus: GS1/ Society
Context
 The Supreme Court recently emphasized
that sexual equality, along with moral and
ethical training on respectful behavior
towards women, must be integrated into
the school curriculum.
Need for Sexual Equality
 Address Deep-Rooted Patriarchy: India
continues to grapple with gender biases
that limit opportunities for women in
various fields.
 Economic Participation: Gender disparity in
education and employment contributes to
lower economic growth.
 Gender Gap in Education: As per NFHS-
5, 70.3% of females are literate, compared to
84.7% of males.
 Labor Force Participation: In India, only
around 37% of women aged 15 years and
above participate in the workforce
(compared to about 73% of men).

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
28
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Constitutional Mandate: Articles 14, 15, and
21 of the Indian Constitution uphold gender
equality, and integrating it into education
aligns with these principles.
 Gender-Based Violence: Educating children
on gender equality from an early age can
help reduce incidents of gender-based
violence, harassment, and discrimination.
Challenges to Achieving Sexual Equality
 Deep-Rooted Patriarchy: Societal norms and
traditional biases reinforce gender
stereotypes, limiting opportunities for
women.
 Educational Gaps: Lack of gender-sensitive
curricula and inadequate teacher training
hinder effective implementation of gender
equality education.
 Workplace Disparities: Wage gaps,
underrepresentation in leadership roles,
and gendered career preferences continue
to perpetuate inequality.
 Violence Against Women: Sexual
harassment, domestic violence, and crimes
against women persist despite legal
frameworks aimed at protection and justice.
 Digital and Media Influence: Objectification
of women in media and unchecked cyber
abuse contribute to gender biases.
Global Efforts Towards Sexual Equality
 United Nations Sustainable Development
Goal 5: Aims to achieve gender equality and
empower all women and girls.
 Beijing Declaration and Platform for Action
(1995): The resolution adopted by the
United Nations in 1995 outlines key
commitments for gender equality
worldwide.
 Convention on the Elimination of All Forms
of Discrimination Against Women
(CEDAW): Encourages policy reforms and
legal protection against gender
discrimination.
National Efforts Towards Sexual Equality
 Beti Bachao Beti Padhao (BBBP): Promotes
awareness and education of the girl child to
combat gender biases.
 National Education Policy (NEP)
2020: Recognizes gender inclusion as a key
priority and promotes sensitization
programs.
 Nirbhaya Fund: Supports initiatives to
ensure women’s safety and security.
 Digital Literacy Programme for Women: It is
part of Pradhan Mantri Gramin Digital
Saksharta Abhiyan (PMGDISHA)
and empowers women to access e-
governance services and financial platforms,
helping them participate in the digital
economy.
 One Stop Centre Scheme (Sakhi
Centres), aims to facilitate women affected
by violence with a range of integrated
services under one roof such as Police
facilitation, medical aid, legal aid and legal
counseling, psycho-social counseling,
temporary shelter, etc.
Concluding remarks
 Integrating sexual equality into school
education is crucial for fostering a just and
equitable society.
 Implementing a well-structured and
effective gender-sensitization curriculum
can be a transformative step toward a more
progressive and inclusive India.
GS II
EDUCATION
NITI Aayog Releases Policy Report on State Public
Universities (SPUs)
Syllabus: GS2/Education
Context
 NITI Aayog launched a policy report
titled ‘Expanding Quality Higher Education
through States and State Public Universities’.
About
 The report is a first-of-its kind policy
document in the higher education sector
focused specifically on States and State
Public Universities (SPUs).
 State Public University (SPU) is a university
established or incorporated by a Provincial
Act or by a State Act can be termed a State
(Public) University.
 It provides detailed quantitative analysis on
vital indicators of Quality, Funding and

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
29
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Financing, Governance and Employability
over the last decade across the themes.
Key Findings of Report
 Highest Funding: Maharashtra leads in
higher education funding, followed by Bihar
and Tamil Nadu.
 Lowest Funding: Sikkim, Arunachal Pradesh,
and Nagaland have the lowest higher
education budgets.
 University Density: The national average
university density is 0.8.
 Sikkim has the highest density of 10.3,
followed by Arunachal Pradesh, Ladakh,
Himachal Pradesh, Meghalaya and
Uttarakhand.
 In Bihar, Uttar Pradesh, West Bengal and
Maharashtra, density at the state level is
below the national average.
 Female Enrolment: Kerala, Chhattisgarh and
Himachal Pradesh have higher female
enrolment rates than males.
Challenges
 Dearth of good quality infrastructure.
 Shortage of faculty and staff.
 Insufficient expenditure on R&D.
 There is a low enrolment of students at the
MTech and Ph.D. levels, presenting a
significant challenge in fostering advanced
research and academic growth.
 Courses, syllabus, curriculum not being
industry-ready.
 Issues in funding: They face financial
challenges due to dependency on traditional
revenue sources such as admission fees and
state grants.
 There are administrative delays in fund
sanctioning along with the lack of
framework for bank loans as major
challenges for funding and financing of
SPUs.

Recommendations
 It has presented nearly 80 policy
recommendations to address various issues
related to four areas of SPUs: quality of
education; funding and financing;
governance; and employability among
students enrolled in them.
 Increasing the combined investment of
Centre and States on education to 6% of
GDP as recommended in NEP 2020.
 Increasing the R&D Investment (public and
private) to 2% of GDP as recommended in
the Economic Survey 2017-18.
 Clusters of SPUs should identify 2 to 3 local
issues and establish Centres of Excellence
dedicated to addressing these challenges.
 States may consider establishing a finance
agency similar to the Higher Education
Financing Agency (HEFA), dedicated
specifically to SPUs.
 HEFA is a joint venture of the Centre and
Canara Bank set up in 2017.
 This agency should focus on bolstering
infrastructure and research facilities
GOVERNMENT POLICIES & INTERVENTIONS
International Mother Language Day
Syllabus: GS2/ Government Policies & Interventions
Context
 International Mother Language Day,
observed on February 21, reminds us of the
need to preserve linguistic diversity and
protect fading languages.
Background

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
30
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 The idea to celebrate International Mother
Language Day was the initiative of
Bangladesh to commemorate the 1952
Bengali Language Movement.
 It was approved at the 1999 UNESCO
General Conference and has been observed
throughout the world since 2000.
The diversity of India’s languages
 India is one of the most linguistically diverse
countries in the world and considered
a language hotspot.
 According to the 2018 Census, India has
over 19,500 languages and dialects,
with 121 languages spoken by 10,000 or
more people.
Linguistic Loss and Its Impact
 The Indian Census of
1961 recorded 1,652 mother tongues, but
by 1971, this number had dropped
to 109, as many languages were grouped
under broader linguistic categories.
 42 Indian languages are critically
endangered, a higher number than any
other country in the world (UNESCO).
 197 languages in India are currently
endangered.
 Around 250 languages have gone extinct in
the last 60 years.
 Languages spoken by remote and
indigenous communities, particularly in
the Northeast and Andaman & Nicobar
Islands, are the most vulnerable.
 Example: The Great Andamanese
language and Rai-Rokdung language
(Sikkim) are critically endangered.
Reasons for Language Disappearance
 Modernization: Younger generations prefer
dominant languages like Hindi and English
for better education, job opportunities, and
social integration.
 Lack of Speakers: Fewer speakers lead to
difficulty in transmission across
generations.
 Dominance of Major Languages: Larger
languages tend to overshadow regional and
indigenous languages, reducing their
practical usage in daily life.
 Standardization and Script: Many
endangered languages lack a written script,
making their documentation and
preservation difficult.
Preservation efforts
 People’s Linguistic Survey of India
(PLSI) documents linguistic profiles of
communities.
 Sidhela Archive of Sikkim University aims to
preserve endangered languages in
Northeast India.
 Scheme for Protection and Preservation of
Endangered Languages (SPPEL): Under the
Scheme, the Central Institute of Indian
Languages (CIIL), Mysore works on
protection, preservation and
documentation of all the mother
tongues/languages of India spoken by less
than 10,000 people which are called
endangered languages.
 AI4Bharat Initiative: Uses AI to develop
speech recognition, machine translation,
and text-to-speech models in 22 Indian
languages, making them accessible to
researchers, industries, and native
speakers.
Conclusion
 Language preservation is not merely about
safeguarding words; it is about protecting
cultural heritage, indigenous knowledge,
and unique identities.
 As languages disappear, so do the rich
traditions and histories they carry.
Therefore, preserving linguistic diversity is
crucial for cultural sustainability and
inclusive development.
Integrating AI in India’s Judiciary and Law
Enforcement
Syllabus: GS2/Government Policies & Interventions;
GS3/Science & Technology
Context
 By integrating Artificial Intelligence (AI)
into judicial processes, case management,
legal research, and law enforcement, India
is streamlining operations, reducing delays,
and making justice more accessible to all.
Current State of India’s Legal and Law Enforcement
System

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
31
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 India’s judiciary operates under
a hierarchical structure with the Supreme
Court at the apex, followed by High Courts
and subordinate courts.
 Despite its well-established legal
framework, the system grapples with
challenges such as:
 Case Backlogs: Over 5 crore pending cases
(as per National Judicial Data Grid,
NJDG) burden the courts.
 Delayed Judgments: Prolonged legal
proceedings due to complex documentation
and procedural inefficiencies.
 Manual Case Management: Traditional
paper-based documentation slows judicial
functions.
 Law Enforcement Challenges: Policing
inefficiencies, rising cybercrime, and limited
resources hamper effective crime
prevention and investigation.
Applications of AI in India’s Judiciary
 AI-Powered Legal Research & Case
Management: AI-driven legal research tools
like SUPACE developed by the Supreme
Court of India, assist judges in analyzing
vast legal data efficiently.
Predictive Justice & Case Prioritization:
 Machine learning algorithms can predict
case outcomes based on past rulings and
legal precedents. Courts can leverage AI
models to:
 Prioritize urgent cases, reducing delays.
 Estimate probable case durations.
 Identify patterns in case dismissals or
approvals.
Virtual Courts & AI-Powered Dispute Resolution:
 India has launched E-Courts, enabling
virtual hearings and online case
management.
 AI-powered Online Dispute Resolution
(ODR) platforms help resolve minor
disputes without judicial intervention,
saving time and resources.
 AI-Assisted Translation for Legal
Documents: With India’s linguistic diversity,
AI-based real-time legal translation tools
can bridge the language gap in courts,
making legal resources accessible in
regional languages.
AI in Law Enforcement and Crime Prevention
AI-Powered Surveillance & Facial Recognition:
 The Crime and Criminal Tracking Network
& Systems (CCTNS) integrates AI-driven
facial recognition and predictive policing to:
 Identify suspects using CCTV footage.
 Track missing persons and criminals in
real-time.
 Enhance public safety with AI-assisted
crowd monitoring.
Predictive Policing & Crime Analytics:
 AI-based predictive analytics helps law
enforcement agencies anticipate and
prevent crimes. AI tools analyze:
 Historical crime data to detect crime
hotspots.
 Behavioral patterns of repeat offenders.
 Social media and online activities to track
cybercriminals.
AI in Forensic Investigations:
 AI-driven forensic tools enhance evidence
analysis, including:
 Voice recognition and deepfake detection in
digital investigations.
 AI-assisted DNA and fingerprint matching
for faster case resolution.
 Cybercrime tracking using AI-driven data
forensics.
AI Chatbots for Public Assistance:
 Several states have deployed AI-powered
police chatbots to assist citizens in:
 Filing FIRs online.
 Tracking case updates.
 Getting legal advice in simple language.
 Others: AI-powered technologies —
including Machine Learning (ML), Natural
Language Processing (NLP), Optical
Character Recognition (OCR), and
Predictive Analytics are now being
leveraged to automate administrative tasks,

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
32
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
improve case tracking, and enhance crime
prevention.
Challenges in AI Adoption in India’s Judiciary and
Law Enforcement
 Ethical and Bias Concerns: AI models may
inherit biases from historical judicial data,
raising fairness and impartiality concerns in
legal decision-making.
 Data Privacy & Security: AI-driven systems
require access to vast legal and crime
databases. Ensuring data confidentiality and
security is crucial.
 Infrastructure and Digital Divide: Not all
courts and police stations have access to AI
infrastructure, especially in rural areas.
 Legal and Regulatory Framework: India
lacks AI-specific legal frameworks to
regulate AI-driven judicial and law
enforcement mechanisms.
Government Initiatives for AI Integration
SUVAS & SUPACE (Supreme Court AI):
 SUVAS (Supreme Court VidhikAnuvaad
Software) for translating Judicial domain
English documents in vernacular languages
and vice versa has been developed.
 SUPACE (Supreme Court Portal for
Assistance in Court Efficiency) assists
Supreme Court judges in case research and
legal analysis.
AI for Legal Translation and Language Accessibility:

E-Courts (Phase III) Mission Mode Project:
 It integrates advanced AI solutions to
enhance case management and
administrative efficiency across courts in
India.
 The Union Government allocated ₹7210
Crore for the e-Courts Phase III
project, within this, ₹53.57 Crore is
specifically earmarked for the integration of
AI and Blockchain technologies across High
Courts in India.
 CCTNS (Crime and Criminal Tracking
Network & Systems): A nationwide AI-
enabled police database to track criminals
and coordinate investigations across states.
 AI Task Force & NITI Aayog’s AI
Strategy: The NITI Aayog AI Task Force is
formulating policies for AI adoption in
governance, including judicial and police
reforms.
Way Forward: AI for a Smarter Justice System
 Establish AI Ethics Guidelines: Ensure
fairness and transparency in AI-driven legal
decisions.
 Strengthen AI Infrastructure: Invest in AI
training for judges and law enforcement
personnel.
 Enhance Public Awareness: Educate citizens
on AI-based legal resources and rights.
 Encourage AI Research in Law: Support
innovation in legal AI applications through
academic and industry partnerships.
HEALTH
Mental Well Being and Economic Growth
Syllabus: GS2/Health
Context
 The Economic Survey 2024-25 highlights
the connection between mental health and
the country’s economic future, emphasizing
its impact on productivity, economic
growth, and overall well-being.
 The survey highlights how mental well-
being influences workplace efficiency,
lifestyle choices, and national economic
progress.
Understanding Mental Wellbeing
The survey defines mental well-being as a
multidimensional concept that includes:
 Emotional health: Managing stress and
emotions effectively.
 Social health: Building healthy relationships
and a supportive community.
 Cognitive health: Enhancing focus, decision-
making, and problem-solving abilities.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
33
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Physical health: Maintaining overall fitness
through a healthy lifestyle.
Rise in Mental Health Issues Among Youth
The survey highlights the rising mental health
concerns among India’s youth due to:
 Excessive internet & social media use: Leads
to anxiety, sleep disorders, and attention
issues.
 Lack of family engagement: Weak social
support systems negatively impact
emotional well-being.
 Hostile workplaces & long working
hours: Cause burnout, stress, and reduced
productivity.
 Unhealthy lifestyle choices: Ultra-processed
foods and lack of physical activity worsen
mental and physical health.

Mental Health and Economic Growth
 Hostile work cultures and excessive hours
spent working at the desk can adversely
affect mental well-being and ultimately put
the brakes on the pace of economic growth.
 The World Health Organisation (WHO)
estimated that mental health disorders
could lead to an economic loss of $1.03
trillion for India between 2012 and 2030.
 India’s demographic dividend is riding on
skills, education, physical health and, above
all, mental health of its youth.
Suggestions
 A positive work environment can benefit
mental health.
 It calls for interventions at both school and
family levels to encourage healthier
lifestyles.
 Promoting outdoor activities, building
friendships, and strengthening family
relationships can help reduce internet
overuse and improve mental well-being.
India’s Mental Health Landscape
 For the first time ever, the Economic Survey
2023-24 talked about mental health, its
significance and implications on policy
recommendations.
 As per the National Mental Health Survey
(NMHS) 2015-16, 10.6% adults in India
suffered from mental disorders while
treatment gap for mental disorders ranged
between 70% and 92%.
 The prevalence of mental morbidity
was higher in urban metro regions
(13.5%) as compared to rural areas (6.9%).
 Lack of Psychiatrists in India: The World
Health Organization’s guidelines state that
there should be at least three practising
psychiatrists per one lakh population.
 As per the latest National Mental Health
Survey (NMHS) 2015 and 2016, India has
only 0.75 psychiatrists per 1 lakh population.
Key Initiatives
 Mental Healthcare Act, 2017: The
act decriminalised suicide attempts in India
and also included WHO guidelines in the
categorisation of mental illnesses.
 The most significant provision in the act
was “advanced directives”, which allowed
individuals with mental illnesses to decide
the course of their treatment.
 It also restricted the use of electro-
convulsive therapy (ECT), and banned its
use on minors, introducing measures to
tackle stigma in Indian society.
 Rights of Persons with Disabilities Act,
2017: The Act acknowledges mental illness
as a disability and seeks to enhance the
Rights and Entitlements of the Disabled.
 Kiran Helpline: The helpline is a step
towards suicide prevention, and can help
with support and crisis management.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
34
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 District Mental Health Programme
(DMHP): Delivered in 767 districts, offering
services like suicide prevention, stress
management, and counseling.
 National Tele Mental Health Programme
(NTMHP): Launched in 2022 to provide
access to mental health services through 53
Tele MANAS Cells across 36 states/UTs.
 Expansion of Mental Health
Capacity: Strengthening mental health
services and educational
Conclusion
 Mental health is crucial for both personal
and societal development.
 Governments, employers, and organizations
must continue efforts to improve mental
health care access and reduce stigma.
 India is making strides in mental health
with policies and programs to address
challenges and bridge treatment gaps.
Brucellosis
Syllabus: GS 2/Health
In News
An eight-year-old girl from Kerala recently died
after being treated for brucellosis for two months.
About Brucellosis
 It is a bacterial zoonotic disease caused by
Brucella species, mainly affecting livestock
like cattle, goats, sheep, and swine
Transmission :
 It is transmitted to humans through contact
with infected animals, consumption of
unpasteurized milk or cheese, or inhalation
of airborne agents.
 The disease is common in endemic areas
and can have serious public health
implications.
 Most cases result from consuming raw milk
or cheese, especially from sheep and goats.
Symptoms of brucellosis include fever, weakness,
weight loss, and general discomfort.
 In many cases, symptoms are mild, which
can delay diagnosis. The incubation period
varies from one week to two months, but
usually lasts 2-4 weeks.
Risk Groups: Farmers, butchers, veterinarians, and
laboratory workers are at higher risk due to direct
contact with infected animals, blood, or bodily
fluids.
Prevention and Control:
 The key strategy is to eliminate infection in
animals, including vaccination and culling.
 Pasteurization of milk and raising
awareness about food safety help reduce
human infection.
 Brucellosis is treated with doxycycline
combined with streptomycin or rifampicin,
typically for 45 days.
Source :TH
Financial Assistance For Rare Disease
Syllabus: GS 2/Health
In News
 The government has announced financial
assistance of up to ₹50 lakh for the
treatment of patients with rare diseases
identified under the National Policy for Rare
Diseases, covering 63 categories of rare
diseases.
About Rare Disease
 A rare disease is a health condition with low
prevalence, affecting a small number of
people compared to more common diseases
in the general population.
 Rare diseases have no universally accepted
definition, however, they are typically
characterized by their low prevalence,
severity, and often the lack of alternative
treatments.
 They include genetic diseases, rare cancers,
infectious tropical diseases, and
degenerative diseases.
 WHO defines rare disease as often
debilitating lifelong disease or disorder
condition with a prevalence of 1 or less per
1000 population.
Issues and Concerns
 Prevalence: India accounts for one-third of
the global rare disease incidence, with over
450 identified diseases, affecting 8-10 crore
people, predominantly children.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
35
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 However, rare diseases are largely
neglected in India.
 Lack of a Standard Definition: India lacks a
standard definition for rare diseases. This
gap persists despite efforts to address the
issue.
 Diagnosis Challenges: On average, rare
diseases take seven years to diagnose, with
healthcare professionals often unable to
interpret symptoms accurately.
 Funding Issues: The budget for rare diseases
remains low.
Initiatives
 The National Policy for Rare Diseases
(NPRD) was launched by the Ministry of
Health & Family Welfare in March 2021.
 63 rare diseases are currently included
under the policy, based on
recommendations by the Central Technical
Committee for Rare Diseases (CTCRD).
 12 Centres of Excellence (CoEs) identified as
premier government hospitals specializing
in diagnosis, prevention, and treatment of
rare diseases.
 Exemption from GST and Customs Duty on
drugs imported for rare diseases.
 The National Consortium for Research and
Development on Therapeutics for Rare
Diseases (NCRDTRD) was established for
streamlining research activities.
 The ICMR has set up an Extramural
Programme Task Force on Rare Diseases
and initiated 19 projects focused on
developing indigenous therapies for rare
diseases
Suggestions and Way Forward
 Time is critical for rare disease patients, and
the government must address these issues
with urgency to improve the lives of
affected individuals.
 The government needs to define rare
diseases, enhance drug development,
improve Centres of Excellence (CoEs)
coordination, and provide dedicated
funding.
 State governments should introduce social
assistance programs and satellite centres,
while private companies can help through
CSR initiatives.
 The government should incentivize
domestic manufacturers and consider
repurposing drugs, reducing clinical trial
requirements.
Rural Indians Suffer from a ‘Hidden Hunger’
Syllabus: GS2/Health
Context
 A new study by the International Crops
Research Institute for the Semi-Arid Tropics
(ICRISAT) shows that many Indians in rural
areas suffer from protein deficiency in spite
of producing sufficient protein-rich foods or
being able to afford them.
Major Findings
 More than two-thirds of
households surveyed across India’s semi-
arid tropics consume less protein than
recommended despite sufficient availability
of protein sources.
 Consumptions of Staples: Regions rely
heavily on staple grains like rice and wheat,
which contribute 60–75% of daily protein
intake.
 Underutilization of Protein-rich foods: Foods
such as pulses, dairy, eggs, and meat remain
underutilized, not necessarily because they
are scarce, but due to a mix of cultural food
preferences, limited nutritional awareness,
and financial constraints.
 Deficiency in Wealthier Families: Even
wealthier families, who can afford diverse
diets, often fail to meet recommended
protein intake levels.
 Households where women had higher levels
of education were more likely to consume a
balanced diet.
 PDS System: India’s Public Distribution
System (PDS), has been successful in
improving calorie intake.
 However, it has inadvertently reinforced a
diet dominated by cereals while failing to
provide sufficient protein-rich options.
Reasons for the Dietary Habits:
 deeply ingrained dietary habits,

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
36
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 lack of understanding about the importance
of protein-rich foods,
 financial constraints.
Recommendations
 Increasing the inclusion of pulses, millets,
and other protein-dense foods in
government food programs to significantly
improve nutritional outcomes.
 Region-specific strategies would be needed
to promote balanced nutritional intake.
 Integrating nutrition education into public
health programmes and school curricula.
 Encouraging farmers to grow a wider
variety of nutrient-dense crops.
International Crops Research Institute for the
Semi-Arid Tropics (ICRISAT)
 ICRISAT stands as the premier drylands
agricultural research institute, dedicated
to uplifting smallholder farmers and
ensuring food security in semi-arid
tropics.
 It was established under a Memorandum
of Agreement between the Government
of India and the CGIAR in 1972.
 ICRISAT’s headquarters are located in
Asia (India), and the organization
maintains offices across Eastern and
Southern Africa, West and Central Africa.

Development and Commercialisation of Typhoid
Vaccine
Syllabus: GS2/ Health
In News
 The Indian Council of Medical Research
(ICMR) is seeking expressions of interest
(EoI) for the joint development and
commercialization of a Typhoid and
Paratyphoid vaccine.
 Manufacturers/companies must meet
technical requirements and will be
shortlisted based on research and
development plans, facilities, and
capabilities.
Typhoid
 Typhoid is a bacterial infection caused
by Salmonella Typhi, spread through
contaminated food, water, or contact with
infected individuals.
 It can be life-threatening without
treatment, and antibiotics like
chloramphenicol, ampicillin, or
ciprofloxacin are used for treatment.
 Typhoid Burden: Typhoid fever is a
significant public health issue in India, with
approximately 4.5 million cases annually,
especially in urban areas, making it a major
health concern.
 Vaccines in India: Typhoid vaccines
available in India include Typbar-TCV,
Ty21a, Typhim Vi, and Typherix. Typhoid
conjugate vaccines (TCVs) are for children
over 6 months, while Vi vaccines are for
children over 2 years. TCVs are currently
available only in the private sector.
 Latest Developments : The ICMR-National
Institute for Research in Bacterial Infections
(NIRBI) has developed a technology for an
enteric fever vaccine based on outer
membrane vesicles from two strains of
typhoidal Salmonella.
Source :TH
Medical Termination of Pregnancy (MTP) Act
Syllabus: GS2/Health
Context
 The Bombay High Court allowed a woman
to terminate her 25-week pregnancy in a
private hospital.
Abortion Laws in India
 The Medical Termination of Pregnancy
(MTP) Act permits abortions in specific
predetermined situations.
 Before the enactment of the MTP Act in
1971, the medical termination of pregnancy
was governed by the Indian Penal Code
(IPC).
 Most of these provisions aimed
at criminalising abortions, except where the
procedure was done in good faith in order
to save the woman’s life.
 The provisions failed to make a
distinction between wanted and unwanted

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
37
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
pregnancies, making it extremely onerous
for women to access safe abortions.
 In 1971, the MTP Act was enacted by
Parliament as a “health” measure, to
decriminalise abortion in certain defined
circumstances and under due supervision of
registered medical practitioners.
 A pregnancy could only be
terminated under Section 3(2) if it did not
exceed 20 weeks.
 It laid down that the pregnancy can be
terminated on the opinion of one doctor if it
is done within 12 weeks of conception
and two doctors if it is done between 12 and
20 weeks.
The 2021 amendment to the MTP Act:
 Rule 3B permitted abortion up to 24
weeks for women due to change of marital
status during the ongoing pregnancy,
besides in cases of survivors of rape, victims
of incest, and other vulnerable women.
 It also replaced the word “by any married
woman or her husband” with the words “any
woman or her partner”, bringing within the
fold of the law pregnancies outside marriage
institutions.
 After 24 weeks, the MTP Act
requires medical boards of expert doctors to
be set up by the state government in each
district, which opine on whether to allow
termination of pregnancy in case
of substantial foetal abnormality.
Source: IE
Russia’s MRNA Based Cancer Vaccine
Syllabus: GS2/ Health
In News
 Russia has announced the development of
an mRNA-based personalized cancer
vaccine, expected to be available free for
patients by early 2025.
mRNA Vaccine Technology
 Messenger RNA vaccines gained attention
during the COVID-19 pandemic following
the use of this technology to manufacture
vaccines.
 mRNA vaccines provide genetic
information to teach the body’s cells to
produce antigens, which can trigger an
immune response to target and attack
cancer cells.
 Features : mRNA cancer vaccines are a
form of immunotherapy, designed to boost
the immune system to detect and destroy
cancer cells, preventing their spread
without damaging healthy cells.
 Unlike traditional vaccines, cancer mRNA
vaccines are personalized for each patient to
target specific antigens present on their
tumors, making them potentially more
effective.
Global Research:
 Other countries, including the UK and the
US, are also researching cancer vaccines.
 The UK’s NHS launched the Cancer Vaccine
Launch Pad in collaboration with BioNTech,
and CureVac in the US has announced a
promising mRNA cancer vaccine for
glioblastoma.
Messenger RNA (mRNA)

 It is a type of single-stranded RNA
involved in protein synthesis. mRNA is
made from a DNA template during the
process of transcription.

 The role of mRNA is to carry protein
information from the DNA in a cell’s
nucleus to the cell’s cytoplasm (watery
interior), where the protein-making
machinery reads the mRNA sequence
and translates each three-base codon
into its corresponding amino acid in a
growing protein chain.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
38
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Source :TH
Intensified Non Communicable Disease (NCD)
Screening Campaign Launched
Syllabus: GS2/ Health
In News
 The Government of India has intensified its
efforts to combat Non-Communicable
Diseases (NCDs) through the National
Programme for Prevention and Control of
Non-Communicable Diseases (NP-NCD).
About
 With the establishment of NCD divisions at
the National, State, and District levels, the
government aims to ensure 100% screening
of individuals aged 30 years and above to
identify and manage prevalent NCDs,
including Diabetes, Hypertension, and
common cancers (Oral, Breast, and
Cervical).
About Non-Communicable Diseases (NCDs)
 NCDs are chronic diseases that do not
spread from person to person but pose
significant health and economic burdens.
According to the WHO (2018), NCDs
account for 63% of all deaths in India, with
key contributors being:
 Cardiovascular Diseases (27%)
 Chronic Respiratory Diseases (11%)
 Cancers (9%)
 Diabetes (3%)
 The increasing prevalence of NCDs is driven
by multiple factors, including lifestyle
changes, environmental conditions, and
genetic predisposition.
 Lifestyle Choices: Tobacco use, alcohol
consumption, unhealthy diet, lack of
exercise, and air pollution.
 Health Risks: Obesity, high blood pressure,
high cholesterol, and high blood sugar.
 Other Factors: Stress and hereditary
predisposition.
Implications of NCDs
 Health Burden: Increased demand for long-
term care and treatment.
 Economic Impact: Loss of productivity and
higher medical expenses.
 Healthcare Inequality: Limited access to
early diagnosis in rural areas.
Government Initiatives
 NP-NCD: Screening, early diagnosis, and
awareness programs.
 PMBJP Scheme: Affordable generic
medicines.
 AMRIT Program: Low-cost treatment for
cancer and heart diseases.
 Eat Right India Movement: Promotes
healthy eating habits.
 Ayushman Bharat: Free healthcare services
for the underprivileged.
Way Forward
 Strengthen Primary Healthcare for
prevention and early detection.
 Promote Healthy Lifestyles through
awareness campaigns.
 Improve Air Quality and reduce pollution-
related risks.
 Enhance Insurance Coverage for affordable
treatment.
 Encourage Public Participation in health
initiatives.
Harnessing AI to Generate Patterns of Antibiotic
Resistance
Syllabus: GS2/Health
Context
Do you know ?
 Cancer is a large group of diseases that can
start in almost any organ or tissue of the body
when abnormal cells grow uncontrollably, go
beyond their usual boundaries to invade
adjoining parts of the body and/or spread to
other organs.
 In India, around 100 out of every 1 lakh people
are diagnosed with cancer.
 The Union Budget 2025-26 emphasizes
strengthening cancer care with initiatives like
Day Care Cancer Centres and customs duty
exemptions on life-saving drugs.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
39
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 IIIT-Delhi and Indian Council of Medical
Research (ICMR) researchers
developed AMRSense, an AI tool that
analyzes hospital data for real-time
antibiotic resistance insights.
About
 This initiative aims to enhance AMR
surveillance at the global, national, and
hospital levels.
 AMRSense leverages hospital-generated
culture sensitivity test reports (blood,
sputum, urine, pus, etc.) to construct AI-
based pipelines, enhancing antimicrobial
stewardship.
Role of AI in Combating AMR
 Early Outbreak Detection: AI-powered tools
analyze large-scale hospital data to track
emerging AMR trends, enabling proactive
interventions.
 AMRSense predicts resistance patterns
using routine hospital records, aiding in
faster decision-making.
 Integration of Data: AI can combine hospital
AMR data with antibiotic sales records,
agricultural antibiotic use, and
environmental factors to offer a holistic
approach to AMR surveillance and control.
 Overcoming Limitations: Unlike genomic
sequencing, which is expensive and time-
consuming, AI models use routine hospital
data to generate cost-effective, actionable
insights.
Challenges
 Data Quality: The accuracy of AI models
heavily depends on the quality and
completeness of available data, which can
be a significant challenge in healthcare
settings.
 Model Accuracy & Validation: AI predictions
depend on past trends; unexpected events
(e.g., pandemics) can disrupt accuracy.
 Implementation: Hospitals and
policymakers face challenges in adopting
AI-based AMR strategies due to regulatory,
ethical, and technical barriers.
Concluding remarks
 AI plays a pivotal role in AMR surveillance,
prediction, and stewardship, transforming
public health responses.
 With proper integration of AI-driven tools,
evidence-based policies can help combat
the rising threat of antimicrobial resistance
effectively.
IMPORTANT INTERNATIONAL INSTITUTIONS
US Withdrawal from UNHRC, WHO, and Other
International Forums
What is Antimicrobial Resistance?
 Antimicrobial Resistance (AMR) occurs
when bacteria, viruses, fungi and parasites
change over time and no longer respond to
medicines making infections harder to
treat and increasing the risk of disease
spread, severe illness and death.
 Antibiotic resistance is emerging as the
threat to successful treatment of infectious
diseases, organ transplantation, cancer
chemotherapy and major surgeries.
Causes for Antimicrobial Resistance
Overuse and Misuse of Antibiotics:
 The excessive and inappropriate use of
antibiotics in humans and animals is a
major driver of antimicrobial resistance.
 A survey on prescribing trends for
antibiotics released by the National Centre
for Disease Control (NCDC) in 2023 found
that 71.9% of patients coming to hospitals
were prescribed antibiotics on average.
Inadequate Dosage and Duration: When antibiotics
are not taken in the correct dosage and for the
recommended duration, it can lead to incomplete
eradication of the targeted microorganisms,
allowing the surviving bacteria to develop
resistance.
 Self-Medication: Self-prescription without
proper medical guidance contributes to the
misuse of antibiotics.
 Antibiotics in Food-Animals: Use of
antibiotics as growth promoters in food
animals and poultry is a common practice
and later it evolves in the food chain.
 Poor Sanitation: A significant proportion of
sewage is discharged untreated into water
bodies, leading to severe river
contamination with antibiotic residues and
antibiotic-resistant organisms.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
40
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Syllabus: GS2/Important International Institutions
Context:
The United States has recently announced its
withdrawal from several key international
organizations, including the UNHRC, the WHO, and
other international forums.
Key Instances of U.S. Withdrawal from International
Forums
United Nations Human Rights Council (UNHRC):
 US cited the UNHRC’s ‘chronic bias against
Israel’ and its failure to address genuine
human rights concerns.
 It was part of a broader pattern of the
Trump administration stepping back from
international agreements and organizations
under its ’America First’ policy.
 It accused the UNHRC of ‘obsessively
demonizing the one democracy in the Middle
East’ and propagating antisemitism.
 The US prohibits any future funding for
the United Nations Relief and Works Agency
(UNRWA), which provides aid to millions of
Palestinians.
 It is important to note that the UNHRC has
passed over 100 condemnatory resolutions
against Israel, which amounts to more than
20% of all resolutions passed by the council.
World Health Organization (WHO):
 Reasons behind withdrawal are
WHO’s handling of the COVID-19
pandemic and its perceived bias towards
China.
 The US, being the largest financial
contributor to the WHO, argued that the
organization needed to be reformed to
better serve its member states.
 It could cost WHO $130 million in annual
funds and hinder global public health
response.
Other International Forums
 The US has reviewed its involvement in
other international organizations, such
as UNESCO and the Paris Climate
Accord, citing ‘wild disparities’ in financial
contributions among member countries.
 Earlier, US left UNESCO in 2017, citing an
alleged anti-Israel bias within the
organization.
 It echoed a similar withdrawal in
1984 under President Ronald Reagan,
which was reversed in 2003.
 The US withdrew from the Trans-Pacific
Partnership (TPP) in 2017, citing the need
to protect American jobs and industries.
 The remaining countries proceeded with
a revised version called the Comprehensive
and Progressive Agreement for Trans-Pacific
Partnership (CPTPP).
Implications of U.S. Withdrawal from International
Forums
Weakening of Global Multilateralism:
 The repeated exits from key international
organizations have raised concerns about
the effectiveness of multilateralism.
 U.S. disengagement often leads to leadership
vacuums that other nations, particularly
China, have sought to fill.
Geopolitical Power Shifts:
 China and Russia have leveraged U.S.
withdrawals to strengthen their influence in
global governance.
 For instance, China has expanded its
role within WHO, UNHRC, and trade
agreements following US exits.
Damage to Global Trust and Alliances:
 Frequent policy reversals, such as the U.S.
leaving and then rejoining international
agreements (e.g., Paris Climate Accord,
WHO, and UNESCO), create uncertainty
among allies and undermine trust in
American commitments.
Impact on Global Trade and Climate Policies:
 Withdrawal from agreements like the TPP
and the Paris Climate Accord has had
economic and environmental consequences.
 The U.S. lost trade opportunities while other
nations advanced regional agreements
without it.
Impact on UNRWA:

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
41
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 UNRWA provides health, education, and aid
services to millions of Palestinians in Gaza,
the West Bank, Syria, Lebanon, and Jordan.
 The US had been the largest donor to
UNRWA, contributing between $300 million
and $400 million annually.
Reforms Needed in International Forums Amid US
Withdrawal
Strengthening Multilateralism:
 Organizations like WHO, WTO, and UN
bodies suffer from funding shortfalls when
major contributors (like the US) withdraw.
Reforming financial structures—such as mandatory
contributions from all members—can reduce
dependency on a few nations.
Expanding Representation in Global Decision-
Making: Calls for expanding permanent UNSC
membership (that remain dominated by post-WWII
power structures) to include emerging powers like
India, Brazil, and South Africa.
Revitalizing Climate Agreements: Strengthening
compliance mechanisms and creating penalties for
withdrawal could ensure sustained participation.
Conclusion
 As the US withdraws from key international
forums, it is imperative to implement
reforms that address transparency,
representation, efficiency, and financial
sustainability.
 These reforms will help ensure that
international organizations remain effective
in promoting global cooperation and
addressing the world’s most pressing
challenges.
INDIA & ITS NEIGHBOURHOOD RELATIONS
India-UK Defence Collaboration
Syllabus: GS2/International Relations
Context
 India and the United Kingdom have signed
multiple agreements aimed at enhancing
bilateral defence collaboration.
Key Agreements and Collaborations
 Defence Partnership–India (DP-
I): Establishment of a dedicated programme
office within the UK’s Ministry of Defence to
serve as a one-stop hub for bilateral defence
collaboration.
 Aims to facilitate deeper cooperation and
support economic growth in both countries.
 Laser Beam Riding MANPADs (LBRM): India
and the UK signed a contract for the
delivery of Laser Beam Riding Man Portable
Air Defence Systems (MANPADS).
 The initial supply of High Velocity Missiles
(STARStreak) and launchers is set for
delivery this year.
 Lightweight Multirole Missiles
(LMM): Focuses on integrating Indian and
British industries into the global defence
supply chain.
 Advanced Short-Range Air-to-Air Missile
(ASRAAM): Collaboration to establish
an ASRAAM assembly and testing facility in
Hyderabad.
 Integrated Full Electric Propulsion (IFEP)
System: A Statement of Intent was signed
to design and develop an Integrated Full
Electric Propulsion (IFEP) system for
India’s next-generation Landing Platform
Dock (LPD) fleet.
 Both nations are working to
establish India’s first maritime Land-Based
Testing Facility, with a goal to deliver
the LPD in water by 2030.

Key Concerns
 India-UK defence cooperation has often
been derailed by the ‘three-I’
challenge posed by Indian rules and
regulations pertaining to:
 Foreign Investment;

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
42
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Intellectual Property Rights;
 Indigenous Content Requirements.
Strategic Significance
 These agreements represent a significant
step forward in India-U.K. defence
cooperation, particularly in critical areas
such as air defence and maritime
propulsion.
 It aligns with India’s Atmanirbhar Bharat
(self-reliant India) vision, promoting
indigenous defence capabilities and
technological advancements.
India-Sri Lanka Fisheries Dispute
Syllabus: GS2/India & Its Neighbourhood Relations
Context
 The maritime boundary between India and
Sri Lanka, particularly in the Palk Strait, has
been a long-standing contentious issue.
 Allegations of illegal fishing, destructive
fishing practices, and frequent arrests of
Indian fishermen by the Sri Lankan
Navy have fueled diplomatic tensions
between the two nations.
Historical Context
 India and Sri Lanka have defined
their maritime boundary through a series of
agreements, focusing on territorial waters,
exclusive economic zones (EEZ), and fishing
rights:
 1974 Agreement: India recognized Sri
Lanka’s sovereignty over Katchatheevu, an
uninhabited island in the Palk Strait.
 1976 Agreement: Extended the maritime
boundary and restricted fishing rights to the
respective countries.
Key Issues
Recurrent Arrests & Seizures:
 Indian fishermen, especially from Tamil
Nadu, frequently cross the International
Maritime Boundary Line (IMBL) in search of
fish due to depleting fish stocks in Indian
waters.
 Sri Lankan authorities have responded
with arrests, boat confiscations, and legal
actions, straining diplomatic relations.
Violation of the International Maritime Boundary
Line (IMBL):
 The IMBL, established under the United
Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea
(UNCLOS), demarcates territorial waters.
 Indian fishermen claim historical fishing
rights beyond the IMBL, leading to legal and
diplomatic conflicts with Sri Lanka.
Ecologically Destructive Fishing Methods:
 Bottom trawling by Indian fishermen is a
major concern for Sri Lanka, as it damages
marine habitats and depletes fish stocks.
 Sri Lankan fishermen advocate
for sustainable fishing practices to protect
their waters from over-exploitation.
National Security Concerns:
 Sri Lanka fears that organized trawler
intrusions could be exploited by Tamil
militant groups for illegal activities.
Katchatheevu Island Dispute:
 Indian fishermen retain limited rights to
use Katchatheevu for drying nets and
resting, but its sovereignty remains a
contentious issue.
 Tamil Nadu politicians periodically demand
its return to India, keeping the dispute alive
in public discourse.
Livelihood Crisis:
 Declining fish stocks in Indian waters have
forced Indian fishermen into Sri Lankan
territory, increasing conflicts.
 Sri Lankan Tamil fishermen, recovering
from decades of civil war (1983–2009), find
their livelihoods threatened by Indian
fishing incursions.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
43
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
International Laws on Freedom of Fishing
 UN Fish Stocks Agreement (UNFSA,
1995): Requires nations to comply with
Regional Fisheries Management
Organizations (RFMOs) for fishery access.
 UNCLOS (1982): Article 87 restricts high-
seas fishing for states that fail to comply
with international conservation measures.
Recent Developments
 Diplomatic Talks & Agreements: India and
Sri Lanka have held multiple discussions on
the issue, with Sri Lanka urging India to ban
bottom trawling.
 Joint Working Group on Fisheries: A
bilateral mechanism to address fishing
disputes and explore sustainable solutions.
 Deep-Sea Fishing Initiatives: The Indian
government has introduced schemes to
promote deep-sea fishing,
but implementation has been slow.
 Continued Arrests: Despite diplomatic
efforts, arrests of Indian fishermen persist,
with incidents reported in 2023, 2024, and
early 2025.
Potential Solutions
 Bilateral Agreements on Fishing Rights: A
structured agreement allowing regulated
access to Sri Lankan waters for Indian
fishermen under specific conditions.
 Technology and Sustainable Fishing:
Encouraging Indian fishermen to adopt
sustainable fishing practices and transition
to deep-sea fishing instead of bottom
trawling.
 Joint Patrolling and Monitoring:
Strengthening cooperation between Indian
and Sri Lankan Coast Guards to
prevent illegal crossings and ensure fair
treatment of fishermen.
 Compensation and Livelihood Support:
The government should provide financial
aid and alternative employment
opportunities for affected fishermen to
reduce dependence on illegal fishing.
 People-to-People Diplomacy: Facilitating
dialogue between Indian and Sri Lankan
fishing communities to foster mutual
understanding and reduce tensions.
Conclusion
 The India-Sri Lanka maritime dispute
remains a complex issue with economic,
diplomatic, and ecological dimensions.
While diplomatic discussions continue,
a comprehensive
approach involving sustainable fishing
practices, alternative livelihoods, and
enhanced maritime cooperation is crucial to
achieving a long-term resolution.
INDIAN POLITY & GOVERNANCE
UIDAI Notifies New Rules for Aadhar Authentication
Syllabus: GS2/ Governance
In News
 Recently, MeitY has notified the Aadhaar
Authentication for Good Governance (Social
Welfare, Innovation, Knowledge)
Amendment Rules, 2025 under the Aadhaar
Act, 2016.
Key Highlights of the 2025 Amendment
Expansion of Aadhaar Authentication Scope:
 Allows government and non-government
entities to use Aadhaar authentication for
specific public interest services.
 Expands to e-commerce, travel, tourism,
hospitality, and healthcare sectors, ensuring
seamless access to services beyond
government initiatives.
Enhancing Ease of Living & Service Delivery:
 Aadhaar authentication will improve
service accessibility for residents, reducing
bureaucracy and delays.
 Ensures trusted transactions between
service providers and users.
Approval Process for Aadhaar Authentication
Requests:
 Entities must submit an application to the
concerned ministry or department through
a dedicated portal.
 The Unique Identification Authority of India
(UIDAI) will examine applications and
provide recommendations.
Significance of the Amendments

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
44
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Promotes innovation by enabling digital
transformation through Aadhaar-based
solutions.
 Boosts knowledge dissemination and access
to essential services.
 Strengthens collaboration between the
government and private sector for efficient
service delivery.
 Ensures regulatory oversight, maintaining
privacy and security standards.
Know About Aadhar
 Aadhaar is a 12-digit unique identification
number issued by the Unique Identification
Authority of India (UIDAI) (established
under the Aadhaar Act, 2016) to residents of
India.
 Aadhaar is based on biometric and
demographic data. Each Aadhaar number is
unique to an individual, preventing
duplication and ensuring accuracy.
 Aadhaar is not proof of citizenship.
Legal Framework of Aadhaar
 Section 7 of Aadhaar (Targeted Delivery of
Financial and Other Subsidies, Benefits and
Services) Act, 2016: Government may
require Aadhaar for accessing benefits,
subsidies, and services funded by the
Consolidated Fund of India or States.
 Supreme Court Ruling on Aadhaar
(2018): Aadhaar is constitutional but not
mandatory for private services like bank
accounts, mobile numbers, or school
admissions.
 Aadhaar metadata retention: UIDAI cannot
store authentication data beyond six
months.
 Aadhaar and Privacy: The Right to Privacy
(2017) Puttaswamy judgment reaffirmed
that Aadhaar data must be secured and not
misused.
US Reviews Sanctions Waiver for India’s Chabahar
Port Project
Syllabus: GS2/ International relations
Context
 The US government is currently reviewing
the sanctions waiver granted to India for
the Chabahar Port project, which could
impact India’s connectivity plans with
Central Asia.
Background
 The United States has imposed multiple
rounds of sanctions on Iran, primarily
targeting its nuclear program and economic
activities.
 US Sanctions Waiver for Chabahar: The US
granted a waiver for India’s involvement in
Chabahar. The key aspects of the waiver
include:
 First Waiver: In 2018 the US exempted India
from sanctions related to Chabahar,
acknowledging its humanitarian and
regional connectivity benefits.
 Renewed Waiver: Further exemptions were
granted, ensuring continued Indian
operations at the Shahid Beheshti Terminal
and related connectivity projects.
Impact of US Sanctions on India
 Potential Disruption in Development: The
new US directive restricts India’s ability to
continue its operations at Chabahar port.
 Despite US sanctions on Iran, India
continues to import oil from Russia amid
growing global pressure.
 Effect on Trade and Connectivity: Since
2018, the port has handled over 90,000
TEUs (twenty-foot equivalent unit) of
container traffic and more than 8.4 million
metric tons of cargo.
 Any sanctions will hinder further progress.
 Declining Trade with Iran: The earlier
sanctions have led to a significant decline in
India’s trade with Iran.
 In 2018-19, India’s imports from Iran were
worth $13 billion, primarily crude oil.
However, post-2019, imports fell to less
than $1 billion annually.
Chabahar Port
Iran’s Chabahar port is located on the Gulf of
Oman and is the only oceanic port of the country.
 It is situated in the city of Chabahar in
Sistan and Baluchestan Province.
Chabahar has two ports; Shahid Kalantari and
Shahid Beheshti.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
45
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 The former is an old port with limited water
front to accommodate feeder vessels.
 The Shahid Beheshti Port is being
developed in four phases. On completion of
all 4 phases, port capacity will be 82 million
tons per year.

Significance of Chabahar Port for India
 Strategic Importance: The Chabahar port
provides India with a direct trade route to
Afghanistan and Central Asia, bypassing
Pakistan.
 It strengthens India’s regional presence and
offers an alternative to China’s Belt and Road
Initiative.
 Economic Benefits: The port facilitates trade
through the International North-South
Transport Corridor (INSTC), reducing
transport costs and time.
 The Economic Survey 2024-25 reported
a 43% increase in vessel traffic and a 34%
rise in container traffic at the Shahid
Beheshti Terminal.
 India’s Investment: Under the 2024
agreement, India Ports Global Ltd (IPGL)
has committed $120 million to equip the
port.
 Additionally, India has extended a $250
million credit facility for infrastructure
development linked to Chabahar.
Way Ahead
 India has balanced its strategic relations
with both the US and Iran, but the potential
revocation of the Chabahar waiver poses a
diplomatic challenge.
 Due to its regional importance, India’s
continued investment in Chabahar is
essential for its long-term connectivity and
economic interests in Central Asia and
Afghanistan.
 The development of Chabahar port remains
crucial for India’s foreign policy and
regional outreach, requiring careful
diplomatic negotiations with both the US
and Iran.
State Emblem of India
Syllabus :GS 2/Governance
In News
The Union Home Ministry has noted the improper
use of the State Emblem of India, specifically the
omission of the motto “Satyamev Jayate”.
About State Emblem of India
 The State Emblem of India is an adaptation
of the Lion Capital of Asoka at Sarnath.
 The original Lion Capital features four lions
mounted back-to-back on a circular abacus,
resting on a bell-shaped lotus.
 The abacus frieze has sculptures of
elephant, galloping horse, bull, and lion,
separated by Dharma Chakras.
 The adopted State Emblem (since January
26, 1950) shows three lions mounted on an
abacus with:
 A Dharma Chakra in the center.
 A bull on the right and a galloping horse on
the left.
 Dharma Chakras at the extreme right and
left.
 The bell-shaped lotus was omitted in the
adopted design.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
46
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Motto: The motto “Satyamev Jayate”
(meaning “Truth Alone Triumphs”) is
written in Devanagari script below the
profile of the Lion Capital, forming an
integral part of the emblem.
Regulations
 The State Emblem of India (Prohibition of
Improper Use) Act, 2005, and the State
Emblem of India (Regulation of Use) Rules,
2007 restrict the use of the emblem to
specified authorities and purposes.
 Omitting the motto or displaying the
incomplete design violates the State
Emblem of India (Prohibition of Improper
Use) Act, 2005.
Source :TH
Tribhuvan Sahkari University
Syllabus: GS2/Governance
In News
The government introduced a Bill in Lok Sabha to
establish the Tribhuvan Sahkari University, on the
campus of the Institute of Rural Management Anand
(IRMA) in Gujarat.
About Tribhuvan Sahkari University
 Background: The current education and
training infrastructure in the cooperative
sector is fragmented and inadequate to
meet the demand for qualified manpower.
 The Home Minister and Minister of
Cooperation, announced plans for a National
Cooperative University in 2021.
 The university will be India’s first
cooperative university, though countries
like Germany, Kenya, Colombia, and Spain
already have similar institutions.
Focus : The university will be declared an
institution of national importance.
 The university aims to provide technical
and management education and training in
the co-operative sector.
 It will focus on promoting cooperative
research and development and achieving
global excellence.
 Key Features : The university will be a
specialized institution in the cooperative
sector, offering education, training,
research, and development to strengthen
the cooperative movement in India.
 It will have sector-specific schools such as
dairy, fishery, sugar, banking, cooperative
finance, cooperative marketing, etc.
 It will use SWAYAM, a government e-
learning platform, for online courses.
Do you know ?
 The Institute of Rural Management Anand
(IRMA), founded by Dr. Verghese Kurien in
1979, will become one of the schools of the
new university.
 IRMA will be declared a Centre of
Excellence for rural management,
preserving its autonomy and identity within
the university framework.
 IRMA’s society will be dissolved once the
Bill is legislated into an Act.
Role of Governor Over Assenting Bills
Syllabus: GS2/Polity and Governance
Context
Recently, the Supreme Court questioned the Tamil
Nadu Governor over his decision to keep several
Bills pending for over three years.
About
 The Governor, as the constitutional head of a
state, plays a crucial role in the legislative
process, particularly in assenting to bills
passed by the state legislature.
 The discretion exercised by Governors in
withholding or delaying assent has been a
subject of legal scrutiny and political
contention.
Constitutional Provisions
 Article 200 of the Indian Constitution: It
outlines the Governor’s role in the assent
process.
 When a bill is presented to the Governor
after being passed by the State Legislature,
they have four options:
 Grant Assent – The Governor may approve
the bill, making it a law.
 Withhold Assent – The Governor may reject
the bill, effectively stopping it from
becoming law.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
47
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Return the Bill for Reconsideration – The
Governor can send the bill back to the
legislature with suggestions.
 However, if the legislature passes the bill
again without modifications, the Governor
is bound to give assent.
 Reserve the Bill for Presidential Assent – If
the bill is contrary to the Constitution,
affects the powers of the High Court, or
contradicts central laws, the Governor may
reserve it for the President’s decision.
Article 201: President’s Role in Reserved Bills
 If a bill is reserved for the President’s
consideration under Article 200, the
President has two options:
 Give Assent: The bill becomes law.
 Withhold Assent or Direct
Reconsideration: The President may send
the bill back to the State Legislature for
reconsideration.
 If the Legislature re-passes the bill, the
President is not bound to give assent.
Controversies and Recent Developments
 Delays in Assent: While the Constitution
does not specify a timeframe for the
Governor to act on a bill, it mandates that
actions should be taken ‘as soon as possible’.
 Indefinite delays can lead to a constitutional
impasse, undermining the democratic
process.
 Instances of prolonged delays and the use of
the ‘pocket veto’ (withholding assent
without returning the bill) have raised
concerns about the Governor’s impartiality
and adherence to constitutional norms.
 Political Disputes: Some state governments
have accused Governors of acting under the
influence of the central government,
undermining the principles of federalism.
 In states like West Bengal, Maharashtra, and
Punjab, conflicts have arisen over the
Governor’s refusal to sign bills crucial for
governance.
Supreme Court Observations/Interpretations
 Shamsher Singh v. State of Punjab
(1974): Governor is bound to act on the aid
and advice of the Council of Ministers except
in certain specified cases.
 Nabam Rebia v. Deputy Speaker (2016):
Governor cannot act in a partisan manner
or override the elected government’s
decisions without valid reasons.
 Rameshwar Prasad Case (2006): Governor’s
discretion should not be arbitrary and must
align with constitutional principles.
Discretionary Powers
 The Governor’s discretion in withholding
assent or returning a bill is not absolute.
 The Sarkaria Commission (1987) further
emphasized that the reservation of bills for
the President’s consideration should be an
exception and not the norm.
 It recommended that the President should
decide on such bills within six months and
communicate reasons if assent is withheld.
Reforms and the Way Forward
Time-bound decision-making: The Supreme Court
has hinted that Governors should not indefinitely
delay assent.
 The Governor should communicate
promptly with the state legislature,
providing reasons for withholding assent or
referring bills to the President.
Clarification on discretionary powers: A clearer
constitutional or judicial framework is needed to
define the limits of the Governor’s role.
 Establishing clear guidelines for the
Governor’s actions in assenting bills can
help ensure transparency and
accountability.
Greater accountability: The Governor’s actions
should be subject to parliamentary or judicial
review if they appear to be politically motivated.
 Strengthening judicial oversight can help
prevent misuse of the Governor’s powers
and ensure adherence to constitutional
principles.
Power to Grant Furloughs
Syllabus :GS 2/Governance
In News

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
48
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Convicts of the Hashimpura massacre have
moved the Delhi High Court against a Delhi
prison rule about furloughs.
 The rule vests power to grant furlough with
the court where the appeal against
conviction is pending.
About Furloughs and How is it different from Parole?
 Both furlough and parole are conditional
releases, but differ in their implications.
 Furlough allows convicts to be temporarily
released without suspending their sentence,
meaning the time spent on furlough counts
toward the sentence.
 It is typically granted to long-term prisoners
for reasons like preventing isolation and
fostering social ties.
 Parole suspends a convict’s sentence
temporarily and is usually granted for
specific reasons like illness or agricultural
needs.
Delhi Prison Rules 2018:
 The challenged rule (Note 2 of Rule 1224)
states that furlough cannot be granted if an
appeal is pending before the High Court or
Supreme Court, and the convict must seek
the court’s direction.
 This provision is under scrutiny as it may
violate constitutional rights, including
Articles 14 (equality) and 21 (right to life
and liberty), and may contradict the
reformative approach to punishment.
High Court’s Interpretation:
 A single judge of the Delhi HC has
interpreted that the rule applies to both the
Delhi HC and SC.
 Now, a division bench is examining the
rule’s constitutional validity and whether it
unfairly denies furlough despite good
behavior.
Do you know?
 The case of KM Nanavati in 1960 set a
precedent where the SC ruled that only the
court, not the governor, can suspend a
sentence during the pendency of an appeal.
 Some states deny furlough during an appeal,
with NALSA highlighting that this is because
convicts can request relief from the court.
 Several states are part of ongoing litigation
regarding this practice.
Supreme Court Directive on Sacred Groves
Syllabus: GS2/ Polity and Governance
In News
 The Supreme Court of India directed that
there is a need for a nationwide survey of
sacred groves under the guidance of
the Ministry of Environment, Forest and
Climate Change (MoEF&CC).
More about the News
 The SC directed to classify Sacred Groves
as ‘forests’ and notify them as ‘community
reserves’ under the Wildlife Protection Act
(WLPA) 1972.
 The court mandated the formation of a
‘Community Reserve Management
Committee’ to the State government to
oversee their conservation and
management.
What are Sacred Groves?
 Sacred groves are patches of trees or forest
areas that are traditionally protected by
local communities for their religious,
cultural, and ecological significance.
 They are known by diverse
names: Devarakadu in Karnataka, Kavu in
Kerala, Sarna in Madhya Pradesh, Oran in
Rajasthan, Devrai in Maharashtra, Umanglai
in Manipur, Law Kyntang/Law Lyngdoh in
Meghalaya, Devan/Deobhumi in
Uttarakhand etc.
 Sacred groves preserve biodiversity,
regulate climate, conserve water, support
livelihoods, protect cultural heritage, and
promote environmental awareness.
What are community reserves?
 The concept of community reserves was
introduced through the Wildlife Protection
(Amendment) Act, 2002, to recognize and
protect community-managed ecosystems.
 These reserves are designated over private
or community-owned lands where local
communities voluntarily participate in
habitat conservation to protect wildlife and
traditional conservation values.
Key provisions include:

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
49
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Land-use changes within these reserves
require approval from the reserve
management committee and the state
government.
 The Chief Wildlife Warden has the overall
authority over the reserve’s management.
The WLPA and FRA: A potential conflict
 The Forest Rights Act (FRA), 2006, was
enacted to recognize the traditional rights
of forest-dwelling communities over forests,
including sacred groves.
 By classifying sacred groves as community
reserves under WLPA, the decision
contradicts FRA’s objective.
T.N. Godavarman v. Union of India Case (1996)
 In this case, the Supreme Court interpreted
Section 2 of the Forest (Conservation) Act,
1980. The court ruled that ‘forest land’
includes;
 Areas considered as ‘forest’ in the
dictionary sense.
 Any area recorded as forest in government
records, irrespective of ownership.
Way Forward
 Inclusive Policy Formulation: The MoEFCC
should develop a comprehensive Sacred
Grove Conservation Policy in consultation
with local communities, ensuring that
governance aligns with the FRA.
 Co-Management Approach: Instead of
transferring full control to the Forest
Department, a co-management model
between gram sabhas and forest officials
could be explored.
 Legal Harmonization: A legal reconciliation
between the WLPA and FRA is necessary to
prevent jurisdictional conflicts and uphold
community rights.
 Scientific Mapping with Traditional
Knowledge: While satellite mapping is
crucial, community knowledge should be
integrated into identifying and managing
sacred groves.
Manipur Unrest Raises the Question of President’s
Rule
Syllabus: GS2/ Polity and Governance
Context
 The resignation of the Chief Minister of
Manipur has loomed the possibility of
President’s Rule in the state.
Article 356 of the Constitution
 Article 356 empowers the President of India
to impose President’s Rule in a state when
governance cannot be carried out as per
constitutional provisions.
 This typically follows a report from the
Governor, stating that the state machinery
has failed.
 The President issues a proclamation that
transfers the state government’s functions
to the Centre and the state legislature’s
powers to Parliament.
 The judiciary, especially the High Court,
continues to function without interference.
 The proclamation remains valid for up to
two months but must be approved by both
Houses of Parliament to extend further.
 If approved, the Rule can last for six
months and be extended in increments of
six months, up to a maximum of three years.
President’s Rule in India
 Since the adoption of the
Constitution, Article 356 has been
invoked 134 times across various states and
Union Territories.
 Manipur and Uttar Pradesh have seen its
imposition the most, at ten times each.
However, some states and UTs have spent
longer durations under central control than
others.
 Other states, like Jammu and Kashmir or
Punjab, might have had fewer instances but
longer periods of central rule due to specific
circumstances like prolonged political
instability or security concerns.
S R Bommai v Union of India (1994) Case
 The Supreme Court, in the landmark S R
Bommai v. The Union of India case placed
restrictions on the misuse of Article 356.
 The judgment established that;
 The President’s decision is subject
to judicial review.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
50
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Courts can strike down the imposition if
found illegal, malafide, or based on
extraneous considerations.
 The state legislature alone would be
suspended, and the executive and other
arms of governance would continue unless
Parliament ratified the proclamation within
two months.
Emergency Provisions
 Part XVIII of the Constitution speaks of
emergency provisions.
 The emergency provisions can be classified
into three categories:
 Articles 352, 353, 354, 358, and 359 which
relate to National emergency,
 Articles 355, 356, and 357 which deal with
the imposition of President’s rule in States
in a certain situation and,
 Article 360 which speaks of financial
emergency.
Way Ahead
 President’s Rule, while a constitutionally
sanctioned instrument, remains a debatable
issue in Indian politics.
 The ongoing debate surrounding its
application, as seen in the Manipur
situation, underscores the need for a
balanced approach, ensuring both the
stability of state governments and the
preservation of constitutional values.
Contesting of Elections by the Convicted Persons
Syllabus: GS2/Polity and Governance
Context
 The Supreme Court is hearing petitions
seeking a lifetime ban on convicted persons
from contesting elections.
About
 The petition argues that if a convicted
person is not eligible for even a junior-grade
government job, how could they become
law makers?
 The Supreme Court has again sought the
response of the Central government and the
EC on the current petition.
 Criminalisation of Politics: A report by The
Association for Democratic Reforms (ADR)
states that 251 (46%) of the 543 elected
MPs in 2024, have criminal cases against
them, and 171 (31%) face serious criminal
charges including rape, murder, attempt to
murder and kidnapping.
 Chances of winning for a candidate with a
criminal background was 15.4% as against
just 4.4% for a candidate with a clean
background.
Disqualification of Convicted Person
 Section 8(3) of the Representation of the
People Act, 1951 (RP Act, 1951), provides
for the disqualification of a person
convicted of a criminal offence and
sentenced to imprisonment for not less than
two years.
 Such a person is disqualified from
contesting elections for a further period of
six years from the date of release.
 Heinous Crimes: Under Section 8(1),
individuals convicted of heinous crimes like
rape, untouchability under the PCR Act,
unlawful activities under UAPA, or
corruption will be disqualified from holding
office, regardless of their sentence length,
and for six years after release.
 Section 11 of the RP Act, 1951 provides that
the Election Commission (EC) may remove
any disqualification or reduce the period of
disqualification of a convicted person.
Arguments in Favour of Banning the Convicted
Person from Contesting Elections
 Preserving Integrity: Convicted individuals,
especially for serious crimes, make their
candidacy detrimental to the integrity of the
political system.
 Public Trust: Allowing convicted persons to
run for office will undermine public trust in
the electoral process and in elected
representatives.
 Role Model Standards: It could send the
wrong message about the acceptability of
illegal or unethical behavior.
 Security and Safety: Individuals convicted of
violent crimes or corruption may pose a
threat to the safety of citizens.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
51
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Social Justice: Preventing convicted persons
from holding office could be seen as a
safeguard for social justice, ensuring that
those with a history of criminal behavior
are not in positions of power where they
could influence laws or policies to their
benefit.
Arguments Against
 Right to Participation: Convicted individuals
still retain their fundamental democratic
rights, including the right to run for office
and participate in the political process.
 Rehabilitation: People who have served
their sentences may have reformed and
should be allowed to contribute to society
through public office.
 Presumption of Innocence: Banning
individuals based on a conviction could be
unfair if their legal status changes.
 Overreach of Power: Banning convicted
persons could be seen as an overreach by
the state, limiting citizens’ freedom to
choose their leaders.
Past Judgements of SC
 Association for Democratic Reforms (ADR)
case (2002): It mandated the disclosure of
criminal records of all candidates contesting
elections.
 The CEC vs Jan Chaukidar case (2013): It
upheld that persons who are under trial
prisoners cease to be ‘electors’ and hence
not qualified to contest elections.
 However, the Parliament amended the act
in 2013 to overturn this judgment allowing
under trial prisoners to contest elections.
 Lily Thomas (2013)Case: The court struck
down section 8(4) of the RP Act, 1951, that
allowed a sitting legislator to continue as a
member even after being convicted if they
filed an appeal, as unconstitutional and
against political justice.
 After this judgment, a sitting legislator is
disqualified immediately after the
sentencing for a conviction.
Conclusion
 The Law Commission in 1999 and 2014,
and the EC on various occasions have
highlighted the need to curb the
criminalisation of politics.
 They have recommended that even persons
against whom charges are framed by a
competent court for an offence that entails
punishment of more than five years should
not be allowed to contest elections.
 However, there has been no consensus on
this recommendation amongst political
parties considering the risk of its misuse.
Freebies Culture in India
Syllabus: GS2/Polity and Governance
Context
 The Supreme Court Judge said that the
freebies ease the poor into a parasitic life,
draining them of the will to find work.
About
 This comes amid announcement of freebies
by governments and political parties before
elections.
 SC held that the steps to make the poor and
the disadvantaged part of the
mainstream were better than offering them
freebies.
What are Freebies?
 The “freebies” or “revdi culture” refers to
the practice of political parties offering free
goods, services, or subsidies to the public,
particularly during election campaigns, in
an attempt to garner votes.
 The word “revdi” is used metaphorically to
describe the free handouts, as it evokes the
image of distributing free gifts.
 Section 123 of the RP Act: It says that it is
deemed a corrupt practice if any gift, offer
or promise of gratification is made to voters
directly or indirectly by a candidate or his
agent or any other person acting on their
consent.
Arguments in Favour of Freebies
 Social Welfare: Freebies can provide
immediate relief to economically
disadvantaged sections, helping reduce
poverty and inequality.
 Empowerment: They can empower
marginalized groups, especially women,

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
52
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
students, and low-income families, by
providing opportunities they might
otherwise not afford, like free education or
cash transfers.
 Boost to Consumption: Offering free goods
or services, like free electricity or gas, can
increase disposable income, allowing
people to spend more on other necessities,
thereby stimulating the economy.
 Incentive for Governance: Freebies can also
act as a measure of how well a government
is meeting the basic needs of its citizens,
acting as a direct reflection of governance
efficiency.
Arguments Against Freebies
 Financial Burden: The cost of providing
freebies can strain government finances,
diverting resources from long-term
development projects like infrastructure,
healthcare, and education.
 Dependency: Freebies may create a
dependency on the state, discouraging self-
reliance and a culture of entitlement,
instead of encouraging people to seek
sustainable opportunities.
 Inefficiency: Freebies often do not address
the root causes of poverty or economic
inequality, focusing on short-term solutions
rather than creating lasting opportunities
for growth and employment.
 Populist Politics: The distribution of freebies
can be seen as a way for political parties to
manipulate voter sentiment and secure
votes, undermining the integrity of elections
and democratic processes.
 Unsustainable: The long-term sustainability
of freebies is questionable, as governments
may struggle to maintain such schemes
without affecting fiscal health or leading to
increased taxes for the general population.
Important SC Judgements Related to Freebies:
 S. Subramaniam Balaji vs. State of Tamil
Nadu (2013): The Supreme Court upheld
the right of political parties to offer freebies
but emphasized that the distribution of
freebies should be done responsibly.
 It stated that only an individual candidate,
not his party, can commit a ‘corrupt
practice’ under the RP Act by promising free
gifts.
 Public Interest Litigation (PIL) on Freebies
(2022): In this case, the Supreme Court
refrained from passing any immediate
judgment but asked the Election
Commission of India to look into the matter
and come up with recommendations.
 The court also raised concerns about the
long-term sustainability of such promises
and their impact on governance.
Way Ahead
 Regulation: The government could
introduce clear guidelines to regulate the
distribution of freebies, ensuring they are
targeted and aligned with long-term welfare
goals rather than just electoral promises.
 Electoral Reform: The Election Commission
could enforce stricter rules on the
distribution of freebies during election
periods, limiting excessive promises and
ensuring they do not affect the fairness of
elections.
 Fiscal Responsibility: States and the central
government need to adopt more fiscally
responsible policies to ensure that any
welfare schemes are financially sustainable
and do not lead to a debt burden.
 Public Awareness: Educating the public
about the implications of freebies and
encouraging a demand for policies that
provide long-term solutions, such as
infrastructure development and job
creation, could shift the focus toward
growth-oriented governance.

Issue of Pendency of Cases in Indian Judiciary
Syllabus: GS2/Polity and Governance
Context
 The Supreme Court permitted High Courts
to appoint retired judges on an ad-hoc
basis to address the mounting backlog of
cases.
About
 The Supreme Court first endorsed the
appointment of ad-hoc judges in its 2021
ruling in Lok Prahari v. Union of India.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
53
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 These judges were authorised to hear only
criminal appeals as part of a bench led by a
sitting judge.
 Backlog: As of January 2025, High Courts
were burdened with a staggering backlog of
62 lakh cases.

 In 2021, the SC noted there have only
been three recorded instances of ad hoc
judges being appointed under Article 224A,
calling it a “dormant provision”.
Related Constitutional Provisions
 Article 224A of the Indian Constitution
allows the Chief Justice of a High Court to
request retired HC judges to perform the
duties of a judge again, with the permission
of the President of India.
 Such appointees are entitled to allowances
as determined by the President’s order and
have all the jurisdiction, powers and
privileges of a Judge of that High Court.
 Lok Prahari v Union of India (2021): SC held
that ad hoc judges can only be appointed
when recommendations have not been
made for less than 20% of the vacancies,
after considering both the number of active
judges and pending proposals for judge
appointments.
Reasons for the Backlog of Cases in Indian Judiciary
 Insufficient Judges: India has one of the
lowest judge-to-population ratios globally.
 Increased Litigation: The growing number
of litigants and cases, coupled with the
increasing population and socio-economic
complexities, contributes to the rise in the
number of cases.
 Delays in the Justice System: There are
delays due to procedural inefficiencies,
adjournments, and delays in filing of
evidence, which further prolong case
resolutions.
 Lack of Infrastructure: Many courts,
especially in rural areas, are under-
equipped and under-staffed, making it
difficult to handle the growing number of
cases efficiently.
 Bureaucratic and Administrative
Challenges: The judicial process can
sometimes be slowed down by
inefficiencies in the system, including
paperwork, administrative delays, and a
lack of modernization in court processes.
How does it impact?
 Delay in Justice: The backlog results in long
delays in cases, and justice is often delayed
for years.
 Increased No. of Undertrials: The number of
undertrials (accused awaiting trial) in
prisons has increased, prisons are running
at an over-capacity of 114%.
 Increased Costs: The delay in cases causes
financial strain on the litigants and the
government. It can also result in the erosion
of public confidence in the judicial system.
 Overburdened Judges: Judges are often
overburdened with cases, leading to
burnout and further delays.
Efforts to Address the Issue
 Judicial Reforms: It includes increasing the
number of judges, modernizing court
infrastructure, and implementing e-courts
and technology to speed up hearings.
 Alternate Dispute Resolution (ADR): ADR
mechanisms like arbitration, mediation, and
conciliation are being promoted to resolve
disputes outside of the traditional court
system.
 E-Courts and Technology: The E-Courts
Project has been an important initiative to
digitize court proceedings and allow online
hearings. This helps in streamlining case
management and reducing physical
backlogs.
 Fast Track Courts: Special courts or fast-
track courts have been set up to handle

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
54
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
specific types of cases like corruption,
crimes against women, and long-pending
cases to expedite the process.
Source: TH
Draft Advocates (Amendment) Bill, 2025
Syllabus: GS2/Governance
In News
 The Government of India is proposing
changes to the Advocates Act, 1961, to
strengthen the legal framework.
About the Bill
 The original Act, introduced in 1961,
regulates the legal profession, ensures
client protection, and maintains the
discipline of lawyers through the Bar
Council of India and State Bar Councils.
 Law firms are already regulated as
corporate entities, but foreign lawyers have
previously not been recognized under the
Advocates Act.
 The Department of Legal Affairs has
prepared the Advocates (Amendment) Bill,
2025, along with a tabular statement
comparing existing provisions with
proposed amendments.
 It would allow foreign law firms and foreign
lawyers to enter India.
Features
 BCI: The BCI would be responsible for
regulating law firms, including those
operating in multiple states.
 The central government can override the
BCI’s regulations if they don’t align with the
government’s rules.
 Framework for foreign law firms: The
proposed changes could pave the way for
foreign law firms to operate in India.
 This is seen as an effort to create a
regulatory framework for them.
 Nomination of Members: The central
government is proposed to have the power
to nominate up to three members to the Bar
Council of India, in addition to existing
members like the Attorney General and
Solicitor General.
 Section 49B proposes that the central
government can issue directions to the Bar
Council of India for carrying out provisions
of the Act and its rules.
 Strikes and Boycotts: It introduces Section
35A which prohibits lawyers from striking
or boycotting work if it disrupts court
operations.
 Advocates may participate in symbolic or
one-day strikes, as long as clients’ rights are
not affected.
 Transfer of Bar Council
Registration: Advocates will need to pay a
fee to transfer their registration from one
state bar council to another, with approval
from the BCI.
 Removal of Advocates for Serious
Convictions: Any advocate convicted of an
offense punishable by three or more years
of imprisonment will be removed from the
state roll, provided the conviction is
confirmed by the High Court or Supreme
Court.
 Expanded Definitions: The definition of a
law graduate is expanded to include those
who obtain a law degree (Bachelor’s in law)
from recognized legal education centers or
universities approved by the Bar Council of
India.
 The definition of “legal practitioner” is
expanded to include corporate lawyers and
those working with foreign law firms.
 Punishment: The punishment for practicing
law illegally (i.e., by someone not an
advocate) is increased from six months to
one year of imprisonment and/or a fine of
up to ₹2 lakh.
Importance and Need
 The government continues to reform the
legal profession to make it fair, transparent,
and accessible to all.
 The amendments are part of the
government’s ongoing reform agenda aimed
at aligning the legal profession and legal
education with global best practices,
improving professional standards, and
contributing to a just and equitable society.
Manipur Placed Under President’s Rule
Syllabus: GS2/ Polity and Governance

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
55
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Context
 The Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA) has
announced the imposition of President’s
Rule in Manipur, with the state assembly
placed under suspended animation.
Constitutional Provisions of Imposition
of President’s Rule
 Article 356 empowers the President of India
to impose President’s Rule in a state when
governance cannot be carried out as per
constitutional provisions.
 Grounds: If the President receives a report
from the state’s Governor or otherwise is
convinced or satisfied that the state’s
situation is such that the state government
cannot carry on the governance according
to the provisions of the Constitution.
 Under the President’s rule, the elected state
government is dismissed and its powers are
suspended.
 The Governor becomes the executive head
of the state and runs the administration on
behalf of the President.
 The proclamation remains valid for up to
two months but must be approved by both
Houses of Parliament to extend further.
 If approved, the Rule can last for six
months and be extended in increments of
six months, up to a maximum of three years.

Source: TH
Removal of Judges In india
Syllabus :GS 2/Governance
In News
 Rajya Sabha Chairman emphasized that only
Parliament has the constitutional authority
to remove a High Court judge
About Removal of judges
 A judge can be removed on the grounds
of ‘proved misbehaviour’ or ‘incapacity’ as
per Articles 124 and 217 of the Constitution.
 The Constitution does not define ‘proved
misbehaviour’ or ‘incapacity.’
 Supreme Court rulings clarify that wilful
misconduct, corruption, lack of integrity, or
offenses involving moral turpitude are
grounds for misbehaviour.
 Incapacity refers to a medical condition,
either physical or mental.
Procedure for Removal
 Procedure for Removal: A judge can be
removed only by an order of the President,
based on a motion passed by both Houses of
Parliament.
 The Judges Inquiry Act, 1968, outlines the
removal procedure.
 A motion may be introduced in either House
of Parliament.
 In the Lok Sabha, at least 100 members
must sign the notice.
 In the Rajya Sabha, at least 50 members
must sign the notice.
 The Speaker (Lok Sabha) or Chairman
(Rajya Sabha) may consult relevant
individuals and decide whether to admit the
motion.
 Motion Admission: The Speaker (Lok Sabha)
or Chairman (Rajya Sabha) decides whether
to admit the motion after due consideration
and consultation.
 Three-Member Committee: If the motion is
admitted, a three-member committee is
formed:
 A Supreme Court/High Court judge, A
distinguished jurist, and A member of the
judiciary.
 Investigation and Report: The committee
investigates the case.
 If the judge is cleared of misbehaviour or
incapacity, the motion is dropped.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
56
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 If guilty, the committee report is presented
in Parliament for further action.
 Parliament’s Role: If the committee finds
misbehaviour or incapacity, the motion is
debated in Parliament.
 A motion for removal must be passed by
both Houses of Parliament.
 The motion requires:
 A majority of the total membership of
each House.
 A special majority of at least two-thirds
of members present and voting in the
same session.
 Sending the Motion to the
President: Once adopted by both Houses,
the motion is sent to the President.
 The President will issue an order for the
judge’s removal.
Judicial Overreach: Involvement of CJI in
Executive Appointments
Syllabus: GS2/Polity
Context
 Recently, the Vice-President of India raised
significant concerns over judicial overreach,
specifically questioning the role of the Chief
Justice of India (CJI) in executive
appointments.
Understanding Judicial Overreach in India
 Judicial overreach refers to an extreme form
of judicial activism where arbitrary,
unreasonable, and frequent interventions
by the judiciary encroach upon the
legislature’s or executive’s domain.
 It occurs when the court oversteps its
constitutional role by making policy
decisions or laws, which is the prerogative
of the legislature.
 India’s democratic framework ensures a
system of checks and balances, delineating
distinct roles for the Legislature, Executive,
and Judiciary.
Judicial Activism vs. Judicial Overreach
 Former Chief Justices of India, including
Ranjan Gogoi and P. Sathasivam, have
emphasized the fine line between judicial
activism and overreach, cautioning against
excessive judicial intervention in
governance.
 Article 50 mandates separation of the
judiciary from the executive.
Instances of Judicial Overreach
General Cases:
 Madras High Court’s Directive on ‘Vande
Mataram’ (2017): Mandated the singing of
‘Vande Mataram’ in schools, government
offices, and private entities in Tamil Nadu,
seen as excessive interference in cultural
expression.
 Supreme Court’s National Anthem Mandate
in Cinema Halls: The directive to play the
national anthem and mandate standing was
seen as unnecessary interference in
executive policymaking.
 Madras High Court’s Aadhaar-Social Media
Linking Proposal (2019): The court
proposed linking Aadhaar with social media
accounts to curb cybercrimes.
 However, the suggestion sparked privacy
concerns and was criticized as judicial
overreach into policy-making.
Instances in Executive Appointments:
 Striking Down the National Judicial
Appointments Commission (NJAC)
(2015): The Supreme Court invalidated the
NJAC, reaffirming judicial primacy in
appointments, despite the commission
being introduced through the 99th
Constitutional Amendment Act (2014) to
replace the Collegium System.
Intervention in Bureaucratic Appointments:
Aspect Judicial Activism Judicial Overreach
Definition
A proactive role of the
judiciary in protecting
citizens’ rights and
ensuring justice.
Judiciary exceeding its
limits and interfering in
legislative or executive
functions.
Purpose
To uphold constitutional
values and correct
governmental failures.
To make decisions beyond
the judiciary’s mandate,
often resembling
policymaking.
Impact
Strengthens democracy
and promotes social
justice.
Weakens democratic
institutions and disrupts
the separation of powers.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
57
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Prakash Singh Case (2006): Directed states
on police reforms and officer appointments,
overriding executive discretion.
 Alok Verma’s Reinstatement as CBI Director
(2018): The Supreme Court overturned the
government’s decision to remove him,
demonstrating judicial control over
executive appointments.
International Comparison
 USA: Judges are appointed by the President
and confirmed by the Senate, ensuring
executive oversight.
 UK: Parliamentary supremacy limits judicial
interference.
 France & Germany: Judiciary has a limited
role in executive appointments and policy
decisions.
Implications of Judicial Overreach
 Erosion of Democratic
Principles: Encroachment into legislative or
executive functions undermines the
separation of powers (Article 50), a
fundamental aspect of democracy.
 Constitutional Disruptions: Judicial
overreach distorts the balance of power
essential for democratic governance.
 It may transform the judiciary into a quasi-
legislative or quasi-executive entity,
affecting its independence.
 Policy Implementation Issues: Judicially
mandated policies may lack thorough
deliberation, resulting in ineffective
governance.
 The executive, responsible for governance,
faces limitations in implementing policies
efficiently.
 Strained Inter-Branch Relations: Overreach
fosters mistrust among government
branches, disrupting cooperative
governance and leading to conflicts
between the judiciary and executive.
Committee Recommendations
 Law Commission Reports: Emphasized the
need for a transparent judicial appointment
process.
 Punchhi Commission (2010): Suggested a
balanced approach between the judiciary
and the executive.
Way Forward
 Judicial Accountability Bill: Establish
mechanisms for judicial accountability.
 Reforming the Collegium System: Introduce
transparency and executive consultation.
 Encouraging Self-Restraint: Judiciary should
avoid making policy decisions.
Conclusion
 Judicial overreach remains a contentious
issue in India, affecting governance and the
balance of power between the three
branches of government.
 While judicial activism has played a vital
role in upholding constitutional rights,
excessive intervention risks undermining
the democratic process.
 Ensuring judicial restraint and adherence to
constitutional boundaries is crucial for
maintaining the integrity of governance in
India.
Status of Devolution to Panchayats in State 2024
Syllabus: GS2/Polity and Governance
Context
 The Union Ministry of Panchayati Raj has
released the report titled ‘Status of
Devolution to Panchayats in States – An
Indicative Evidence-Based Ranking’ (2024).
About
 The devolution index is an approach in
assessing the implementation of 73rd and
74th Amendments and is prepared by the
Indian Institute of Public Administration.
 It evaluates the current state of power and
resource devolution to Panchayati Raj
Institutions across all States and Union
Territories.
 States/UTs were ranked as per the six key
dimensions of framework, functions,
finances, functionaries, capacity
enhancement, and accountability.
Need for the Assessment

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
58
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 The mandatory constitutional provisions—
such as regular Panchayat elections by state
election commissions, reservations for
SCs/STs and women, and the constitution of
state finance commissions—have been
implemented.
 The devolution of functions, finances, and
functionaries to Panchayats has been
inconsistent across States.
 The effective local governance cannot be
achieved through these transfer
mechanisms alone.
 It necessitates ‘capacity enhancement’
measures and ‘accountability’ to ensure
fairness and transparency in Panchayat
operations.
Major Findings
 Karnataka tops the overall Devolution Index
(DI) ranking of the Panchayat Raj system
among States, while Kerala and Tamil Nadu
are in the second and third spot.
 Devolution has increased from 39.9% to
43.9% between the period 2013-14 to
2021-22.

 With the launch of the Rashtriya Gram
Swaraj Abhiyan (RGSA), the capacity
enhancement component of the Index
during this period has increased from 44%
to 54.6%.
 During this period, the component of
the Index pertaining to functionaries has
seen a substantial jump of more than 10%
(from 39.6% to 50.9%).
 In the framework criterion, Kerala ranks
first followed by Maharashtra, Karnataka,
and Haryana.
 In the functional criterion, Tamil Nadu tops
the list followed by Karnataka, Odisha, and
Rajasthan.
 In the finances criterion, Karnataka has
secured the top place followed by Kerala,
Tamil Nadu, and Rajasthan.
 In the functionaries criterion, Gujarat ranks
first followed by Tamil Nadu and Kerala.
 In the capacity building criterion, Telangana
has secured the first spot followed by Tamil
Nadu and Gujarat.
Challenges Identified in Report
 Legal and Institutional Gaps: Some states
have not conducted regular panchayat
elections.
 Limited Role in Policy Implementation:
Panchayats have a nominal role in major
centrally sponsored schemes (MGNREGA,
PMAY, NHM, etc.).
 Disparities Among States: Some states
perform significantly better due to strong
governance structures and legal provisions,
while others struggle due to poor
implementation and political unwillingness.
 Low Public Participation: Gram Sabhas,
which are essential for participatory
governance, are often poorly attended and
lack effectiveness.
Recommendations and Suggestions
 Strengthening the Legal Framework: Ensure
regular and timely elections for panchayats.
 Empower State Election Commissions
(SECs) to function independently without
state government interference.
 Financial Empowerment: Establish a
Consolidated Fund for Local Government to
provide direct and assured funding to
panchayats.
 Implement recommendations of the 16th
Finance Commission to ensure panchayats
receive an adequate share of GST revenues.
 Enhancing Functional
Autonomy: Decentralize key service
delivery functions to ensure panchayats
play a leading role in rural development.
 Promoting Accountability &
Transparency: Strengthen Gram Sabha
participation by making them more
accessible and effective.
The Immigration and Foreigners Bill, 2025

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
59
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Syllabus: GS2/Governance
Context
 The government has developed a draft
legislation, The Immigration and Foreigners
Bill, 2025, to regulate foreigners coming to
India.
About
Matters related to foreigners and immigration are
currently governed by:
 The Foreigners Act, 1946, The Passport
(Entry into India) Act, 1920, The
Registration of Foreigners Act, 1939 and
The Immigration (Carriers’ Liability) Act,
2000.
 Three of these laws were enacted during
the pre-Constitution period, particularly
during the extraordinary times of World
Wars I and II.
 The necessity has been identified to repeal
these laws and enact a new comprehensive
legislation: The Immigration and Foreigners
Bill, 2025.
The purpose of the new legislation is to:
 Avoid multiplicity and overlapping of laws.
 Regulate matters related to foreigners,
including: Requirement of visas,
Registration and other travel-related
documentation (passports, etc.).
 Streamline the procedures for persons
entering and exiting India.
Provisions
 It obligates the mandatory registration of
foreigners upon their arrival and places
restrictions on movement, name changes,
and stays in protected/restricted areas.
 The burden of proof is on individuals to
establish that they are not foreigners.
 Entering India without valid
passport/visa: Up to 5 years in prison and a
fine of up to Rs 5 lakh.
 Entry, stay, or exit with forged documents: 2-
7 years in prison and a fine of Rs 1-10 lakh.
 Overstaying, violating visa conditions, or
accessing restricted areas: Up to 3 years in
prison, a fine up to Rs 3 lakh, or both.
 Reporting requirements: Educational
institutions, universities, hospitals, and
nursing homes must report foreigners to
the registration officer.
Carrier accountability:
 Carriers transporting foreigners without
valid documents will have to pay a fine up
to Rs 5 lakh and failure to pay penalty may
lead to the potential seizure of transport.
 If any foreigner’s entry has been refused, he
shall be handed over to the transport
carrier by the Immigration Officer, who is
responsible for the individual’s removal
from India without delay.
 It empowers immigration officers to arrest
such individuals without a warrant.
Government authority:
 The bill also grants the central government
increased authority to regulate the
movement of foreigners, including the
power to restrict entry, prevent departure,
and prohibit access to specific areas.
 The foreigners are required to exit at their
own expense and provide biometric data.
Obscenity in Online Content
Syllabus: GS2/ Polity and Governance
Context
 The recent debate over “India’s Got Latent”
show has brought attention to the evolving
interpretation of obscenity laws in the
digital era.
What is Obscenity?
 Obscenity refers to content or acts that
are offensive to public morality and
decency.
 Legally, it includes material that is vulgar, or
repugnant to accepted social norms.
Factors causing rise in Obscenity
 Rapid Growth of Digital Platforms: The
proliferation of social media platforms has
made it easier to share content globally,
leading to greater exposure to varied forms
of expression, some of which cross moral
and legal boundaries.
 Monetization of Controversial Content: Some
creators exploit controversy or shock value

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
60
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
to gain attention, views, and revenue,
leading to the production and dissemination
of obscene material.
Implications of rising Obscenity in India
 Impact on Social Morality: The growing
presence of obscene content in digital
media influences public morality, especially
among impressionable audiences such as
children and young adults.
 Cybercrime and Exploitation: The rise in
online obscenity fuels exploitation, driving
cyberbullying, harassment, and trafficking.
Judiciary’s View on what constitutes as obscene
Hicklin Test:
 The test was most famously used by the
Supreme Court to ban DH Lawrence’s
Lady Chatterley’s Lover in the case
of Ranjit D Udeshi vs State Of Maharashtra
(1964).
 The test was established in English Law
after the case of Regina vs Hicklin (1868).
Community Standards Test:
 The Indian Supreme Court referred to the
“community standards” test in Aveek
Sarkar v. State of West Bengal (2014).
 The courts now apply the contemporary
community standards test to judge
obscenity, moving away from the rigid
Hicklin test.
Legal Framework Governing Obscenity in Online
Content
Information Technology (IT) Act, 2000:
 Section 67 penalizes the publication or
transmission of obscene material in
electronic form.
 The offense is punishable with
imprisonment and a fine, with stricter
penalties for repeated violations.
Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita (BNS), 2023: S
 ection 294 (previously Section 292 of IPC,
1860) prohibits the sale, distribution,
advertisement, or commercial exploitation
of obscene materials, including books,
paintings, and digital content.
 It extends to electronic content, reinforcing
legal accountability in the digital space.
Appointment of Chief Election Commissioner
Syllabus: GS2/Polity and Governance
Context
 President Droupadi Murmu appointed
Gyanesh Kumar as the chief election
commissioner of India under the Chief
Election Commissioner and Other Election
Commissioner Act, 2023.
About
 This 2023 Act replaces the Election
Commission (Conditions of Service of
Election Commissioners and Transaction of
Business) Act, 1991, introducing significant
changes to enhance the autonomy and
functioning of the Election Commission of
India (ECI).
The CEC name was recommended by a three-
member committee comprising:
 Prime Minister of India (Chairperson),
 Union Home Minister (Cabinet Minister
nominated by the PM).
 Leader of Opposition in Lok Sabha.
Background
 In 2023, while examining the appointment
of the CEC and ECs, the Supreme Court
declared that their appointment should not
be done solely by the Executive.
 The Court directed that the appointment
should be done by the President on the
recommendation of a Selection Committee,
until Parliament made a law.
 The Selection Committee will consist of: The
Prime Minister, The Leader of Opposition in
Lok Sabha, and The Chief Justice of India.
Article 324 of Constitution
 Article 324 of the Constitution states that
the Election Commission will comprise the
Chief Election Commissioner (CEC) and
such number of Election Commissioners
(ECs), as the President may decide.
 The Election Commission of India (ECI) is
responsible for managing the preparation of
electoral rolls and conducting elections

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
61
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
to Parliament, State Legislatures, and the
offices of the President and Vice-President.
 The Constitution specifies that the
President will appoint the CEC and ECs,
subject to the provisions of an Act of
Parliament.
Key Features of the CEs and ECs Appointment Act,
2023
 Election Commission: The Election
Commission will consist of a Chief Election
Commissioner (CEC) and other Election
Commissioners (ECs). The President will
periodically fix the number of ECs.
 Appointment of the Commission: The
Commission will be appointed by the
President, upon the recommendation of the
Selection Committee.
 The Selection Committee will comprise the
Prime Minister, Cabinet Minister, and
Leader of Opposition in Lok Sabha (or
leader of the single largest opposition
party).
 A Search Committee headed by the Cabinet
Secretary will suggest five names to the
Selection Committee.
 The Selection Committee may consider any
person other than those suggested by the
Search Committee.
 Term and reappointment: Members of the
Election Commission will hold office for six
years, or until they attain the age of 65
years, whichever is earlier.
 Members of the Commission cannot be re-
appointed.
 If an EC is appointed as a CEC, the overall
period of the term may not be more than six
years.
 Salary and pension: The salary, allowances,
and other conditions of service of the CEC
and ECs will be equivalent to that of the
Cabinet Secretary.
 Removal: The CEC may be removed in the
same manner and on the same grounds as a
Supreme Court Judge.
 ECs may be removed only upon the
recommendation of the CEC.
Concerns
 Executive Control Over Appointments: The
selection committee now includes the PM, a
Union Minister, and Leader of Opposition,
reducing judicial oversight. The Selection
Committee selects names from a panel of
five people suggested by the Search
Committee.
 The Selection Committee may go beyond
the names suggested by the Search
Committee.
 Election Commission’s Independence: A
government-dominated appointment
process may lead to bias in election
management which eventually erodes trust
in free and fair elections.
 Weaker Protection for Election
Commissioners: CEC can only be removed
via impeachment, but ECs lack such
safeguards. This may lead to political
pressure on ECs, affecting decision-making.
Suggestions made by various Commissions/Courts
for composition of the Selection Committee

Concluding Remarks
 The CEC and EC Appointment Act 2023
shows reform in the selection process for
the ECI, but it also raises concerns about the
potential hijacking of the process of
appointment of CEC & EC in the hands of the
executive.
 The independence of the Election
Commission is paramount to guarantee
impartiality and integrity in the execution of
electoral processes.
‘Rarest of rare’ Doctrine

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
62
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Syllabus: GS2/Polity and Governance
Context
 The recent two separate murder
convictions reignited the questions about
the judiciary’s approach to the ‘rarest of
rare’ doctrine.
About
 1972 – Jagmohan Singh vs. State of U.P.: The
Supreme Court upheld the constitutionality
of the death penalty.
 1980 – Bachan Singh vs. State of Punjab: The
Court introduced the ‘rarest of rare’
doctrine, stating the death penalty should
be imposed only in exceptional cases.
 The definition of ‘rarest of rare’ was not
clearly defined, leading to confusion.
 1983 – Machhi Singh vs. State of Punjab: The
Supreme Court clarified the ‘rarest of rare’
doctrine and identified five categories of
crimes where the death penalty may be
justified:
 Manner of committing the
murder: Extremely brutal and dastardly
murders.
 Motive of the murder: Committed for a
motive showing total depravity.
 Socially abhorrent nature of the
crime: When a murder targets a minority
community and raises social wrath.
 Magnitude of the crime.
 Personality of the offender: When the victim
is particularly vulnerable, such as a child,
woman, or elderly person.
Conclusion
 The application of the death penalty in India
remains complex and controversial.
 While the Supreme Court has given a
certain framework, the unclear, universally
agreed-upon definition for what qualifies as
 ‘rarest of rare’ continues to leave room for
judicial discretion.
Source: TH
SC stays Lokpal Order Giving Itself Jurisdiction over
HC Judges
Syllabus: GS2/Polity and Governance
Context
 The Supreme Court stayed a Lokpal order
bringing High Court judges under its
jurisdiction terming the interpretation
“very disturbing”.
About
Suo Motu Cognisance:
 Supreme Court’s Special Bench took suo
motu cognisance of the Lokpal’s recent
order, which impacted judicial
independence.
 Lokpal’s order declared High Court judges
as ‘public servants’ under the Lokpal and
Lokayuktas Act of 2013, allowing its
jurisdiction over them.
 Lokpal’s Argument: Lokpal’s argument
stemmed from High Courts being
established by pre-constitutional British
Acts, whereas the Supreme Court was
formed by the Constitution.
 Exclusion of Supreme Court Judges: Earlier,
on January 3, Lokpal had ruled that it had
no authority over Supreme Court judges.
 Lokpal’s Jurisdiction: The Lokpal based its
decision on Section 14(1) of the 2013 Act,
which includes judges of High Courts
created by Acts of Parliament.
 Supreme Court’s Stance: The Court
emphasized that all judges are appointed
under the Constitution, underscoring
judicial independence.
Lokpal and Lokayuktas
 The Lokpal and Lokayuktas Act, 2013 came
into effect in 2014.
 Purpose: Establish Lokpal at the Centre and
Lokayuktas in states for investigating
corruption in public servants.
Concept:
 The concept was inspired by the
Scandinavian Countries Ombudsman
system.
 The first Lokayukta was constituted
in Maharashtra in 1971.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
63
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Appointment Process: Members of Lokpal
(and Lokayuktas) appointed by the
President (Governor), based on
recommendations from a Selection
Committee.
 Selection Committee: Includes the PM (CM),
Speaker of the Lower House, Leaders of
Opposition, CJI (or a nominated judge), and
an eminent jurist nominated by the
President.
Composition of Lokpal:
 One Chairperson (CJI/former SC
judge/qualified non-judicial member), with
up to 8 members.
 50% judicial members, and the non-judicial
members need 25 years’ experience in
relevant fields.
 Removal of Members: Members can be
removed by the President after an inquiry
by the Supreme Court, which may be
initiated based on the President’s reference,
a citizen’s petition, or a petition signed by
100 MPs.
 Jurisdiction of Lokpal: Can inquire into
offences under the Prevention of Corruption
Act, 1988, committed by the PM (with
safeguards), Union Ministers, MPs, officers
(Group A-D), and certain private entities.
PM’s Inquiry:
 Inquiry against the PM must be in-camera,
approved by a 2/3 majority of the Lokpal,
and cannot involve certain sensitive areas
like national security.
 The PM cannot be investigated related to
international relations, external and
internal security, public order, atomic
energy and space.
 Inquiry and Investigation: Lokpal’s inquiry
wing must act within 60 days, and
investigations to be completed within 6
months.
 Jurisdiction of Lokayuktas: Covers the CM,
Ministers, MLAs, state government
employees, and certain private entities
(including religious institutions).
Penalties:
 Penalizes false complaints with
imprisonment up to 1 year and a fine of up
to ₹1 lakh.
 Increases penalties for public servants
committing corruption (from 5 to 7 years)
and criminal misconduct (from 7 to 10
years).
Challenges
 Limited Jurisdiction: The jurisdiction is
often limited to certain categories of public
servants or specific areas of governance,
which restrict their ability to address all
forms of corruption comprehensively.
 Lack of Independence: They often face
political interference or pressure from the
government, which hinder their autonomy.
 Whistleblower Protection: Whistleblowers
and complainants who report corruption
may face threats, harassment, or retaliation,
which discourages them from coming
forward with information.
 Political Will: Ultimately, the effectiveness
depends on the political will of the
government to combat corruption and
strengthen accountability mechanisms.
Way Ahead
 Over the years, there have been calls for
strengthening Lokpal and Lokayukts and
expanding their jurisdiction to cover more
public officials and institutions.
 By implementing the required measures,
India can significantly enhance the
effectiveness and credibility of Lokpal and
Lokayuktas in combating corruption and
promoting good governance.
I&B Ministry Advisory on ‘Obscene Content’
Syllabus: GS2/Governance
In News
 The Information & Broadcasting Ministry
issued an advisory following complaints
regarding the spread of “obscene,
pornographic, or vulgar content” on OTT
platforms and social media
 Over-the-Top (OTT) refers to media
services that provide access to films,
television shows, and other video content
directly over the internet, bypassing

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
64
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
traditional cable, satellite, or broadcast
television providers.
Major Highlights of recent advisory
 The Information & Broadcasting Ministry
has directed OTT platforms to follow
the Code of Ethics under the IT Rules,
2021, including strict adherence to age-
based classification.
 The advisory referenced the Indecent
Representation of Women Act, 1986,
Bharatiya Nyay Sanhita (BNS), 2023, POCSO
Act, and the IT Act, 2000, noting that
publishing obscene or pornographic content
is punishable under these laws.
 Under the IT Rules, 2021, a three-level
grievance redressal mechanism governs
OTT platforms and digital news publishers:
Level-I:
 Self-Regulation by Publishers
 Platforms appoint a Grievance Officer to
resolve complaints within 15 days.
 Ensure compliance with the Code of Ethics
and content classification.
Level-II:
 Self-Regulation by Self-Regulatory Bodies
(SRBs)
 SRBs oversee publisher decisions, handle
appeals, and ensure ethical compliance.
 Must be registered with the Ministry of
Information & Broadcasting (MIB).
Level-III:
 Oversight by Ministry of Broadcasting
 The Ministry can issue advisories, warnings,
or take action for non-compliance.
 A Grievance Appellate Committee (GAC)
may review unresolved complaints.
Challenges in OTT Regulation
 Balancing Freedom & Regulation: Excessive
rules may lead to self-censorship, affecting
creativity.
 Article 19 of the Constitution guarantees
freedom of speech but allows restrictions
for decency and morality.
 Subjectivity in Grievance Redressal: Varying
interpretations of offensive content may
cause inconsistent rulings.
 Jurisdiction Issues: Global platforms face
challenges in adapting to Indian laws.
 Censorship Concerns: There is a growing
fear of government overreach, ambiguity in
content restrictions and political bias in
content moderation on OTT platforms.
 AI Moderation Challenges: Automated
moderation may misinterpret cultural
nuances, causing unjustified takedowns.
Laws Governing Obscenity in Online Content
 Section 294 of the Bhartiya Nyaya Sanhita
(BNS), 2023: It Penalizes the sale, import,
export, advertisement, or profit from
obscene material, including electronic
content.
 The material must be lascivious or
excessively sexual.
 Section 67 of the Information Technology
(IT) Act, 2000: It penalizes the publication
or transmission of obscene material in
electronic form, with a more stringent
punishment (up to 3 years imprisonment
and a fine of up to Rs. 5 lakh for first-time
offenders).
 Indecent Representation of Women Act,
1986: Restricts content that portrays
women indecently.
 IT Rules, 2021: the Information Technology
(Intermediary Guidelines and Digital Media
Ethics Code) Rules, 2021, include:
 Code of Ethics for OTT platforms, Provisions
for age-based classification and access
control mechanisms for “A” rated content to
prevent child access,
 Platforms must not transmit illegal content
and should exercise caution and discretion.
 POCSO Act: Protects children from sexual
content and exploitation.
Supreme Court’s Observations
 Ranjit D. Udeshi v. State of Maharashtra
(1964): The Supreme Court applied the
Hicklin Test, defining obscenity as material
that corrupts and depraves susceptible
minds, including children and those with
impure thoughts.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
65
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Aveek Sarkar v. State of West Bengal (2014):
The SC adopted the “community standards”
test, quashing proceedings against
magazines for a nude image of Boris Becker.
 In March 2024, the Supreme Court quashed
obscenity proceedings against the makers
of College Romance, ruling that profanity
alone does not amount to obscenity.
 The judgment reinforced that for content to
be deemed obscene, it must actively arouse
sexual thoughts.
Ragging Deaths in India
Syllabus: GS2/ Governance
Context
 Ragging remains a deeply entrenched issue
in India’s higher education institutions,
despite Supreme Court guidelines and
University Grants Commission (UGC)
regulations aiming to curb it.
What is Ragging?
 Ragging is any act of physical or
psychological abuse usually by senior
students toward juniors under the pretext
of initiation or camaraderie.
 It ranges from verbal abuse and forced
tasks to extreme physical torture and sexual
exploitation.
Menace of Ragging in Education institutions
 According to records accessed through the
Right to Information (RTI) Act, 78 deaths
have been attributed to ragging from 2012
to 2023.
 The UGC’s dedicated helpline has logged
over 8,000 complaints in the past decade,
with cases rising by 208% between 2012
and 2022.
Government Steps to Curb Ragging
 Supreme Court Guidelines: In 2009, the
Supreme Court of India ordered the
implementation of a ragging prevention
program. The program included the
following steps:
 Anti-ragging helpline: A toll-free helpline or
call center to be set up.
 Regulations: Directed the University Grants
Commission (UGC) to frame regulations to
curb ragging in higher education
institutions.
 Anti-ragging committee: Mandated the UGC
to constitute an Anti-Ragging Committee
and an Anti-Ragging Squad.
 In a landmark verdict, the Vishwa Jagriti
Mission v. Central Government & Others,
2001, the Supreme Court made ragging a
punishable offense and mandated strict
institutional measures.
 Role of NGOs: Organizations like Society
Against Violence in Education
(SAVE) actively track cases and push for
legal action against institutions.
 UGC Anti-Ragging Regulations (2009): UGC
established a 24×7 anti-ragging helpline
and mandated annual affidavits from
students and parents against ragging.
 It allowed UGC to withdraw funding from
non-compliant institutions.
 Raghavan Committee in 2007 was
constituted by the Supreme Court of India
to address the menace of ragging in
educational institutions.
 The committee recommended treating
ragging as a punishable criminal offense
under the Indian Penal Code (IPC).
Reasons for Persisting Ragging
 Lack of Stringent Implementation: The
Supreme Court issued anti-ragging
guidelines 15 years ago, but they have
largely remained on paper.
 UGC regulations mandate action against
colleges that fail to prevent ragging, but the
regulatory body has not invoked these
provisions since the helpline’s
establishment in 2009.
 Unaccountable System: Victims often
struggle with an ad hoc, non-transparent
process where complaints are not
adequately addressed.
 Institutional Inaction: Despite the mandate
for Anti-Ragging Squads and surprise
inspections, the UGC does not maintain any
record of actions taken.
 Low Compliance: UGC guidelines require
students to submit anti-ragging affidavits
annually, yet RTI data shows that

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
66
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
only 4.49% of students have done so in the
past decade.
 Failure in Legal Enforcement: Institutions
are required to file an FIR within 24 hours
of a ragging complaint, but UGC does not
track compliance with this directive.
Way Ahead
 Strict Enforcement of Guidelines: Authorities
must ensure full implementation of
Supreme Court and UGC regulations,
holding institutions accountable for lapses.
 Technology-Based Solutions: Expanded
CCTV surveillance in campuses to deter
ragging incidents.
 Secure online portals and ID-based
dashboards to enable anonymous reporting
by victims.
 Legal Clarity: There is need for amendments
in laws to ensure strict penalization of
offenders, including faculty or management
complicit in ignoring complaints.
Three-language Policy Under NEP 2020
Syllabus: GS2/Polity and Governance
Context
 The Centre has withheld funds to Tamil
Nadu under the Samagra Shiksha
scheme due to the state’s refusal to
implement the National Education Policy
(NEP) 2020) and its three-language formula.
 Tamil Nadu follows a two-language policy
(Tamil and English) and has consistently
opposed the introduction of Hindi, viewing
it as a threat to its linguistic identity.
What is the Three Language Formula?
 NEP 1968 made Hindi compulsory across
the nation, with specific language
requirements for states.
 Hindi-speaking states were to teach Hindi,
English, and a modern Indian language
(preferably a South Indian language).
 Non-Hindi-speaking states were expected to
teach local language, Hindi, and English.
 NEP 2020 retains the three-language
formula, introduced in the NEP of 1968.
 States, regions, and students can choose the
three languages, as long as at least two are
native to India.
 In addition to the state language,
children must learn one other Indian
language (not necessarily Hindi).
 Emphasizes bilingual teaching, focusing on
the home language/mother tongue and
English.
 Sanskrit is given special emphasis as an
optional choice in the three-language
formula.
Significance of the Three-Language Formula
 Enhances Multilingual
Proficiency: Encourages students to learn
multiple languages, improving cognitive
skills and communication.
 National Integration and Cultural
Exchange: Helps bridge the north-south
linguistic divide by promoting Hindi in non-
Hindi states and regional languages in
Hindi-speaking states.
 Increased Employment and Mobility
Opportunities: Knowledge of multiple
languages expands career prospects and
makes migration for jobs and higher
education easier across different states.
 Strengthens Regional Languages: Ensure
that regional languages continue to be
actively used and preserved.
What are the Concerns?
 Perceived Imposition of Hindi: Non-Hindi-
speaking states, especially Tamil Nadu,
West Bengal, and Karnataka, oppose it as an
attempt to impose Hindi.
 Practical Implementation Challenges: Many
schools lack qualified teachers for teaching
additional languages.
 Burden on Students: Learning an additional
language may increase the academic load,
particularly for students who struggle with
language acquisition.
 Potential Neglect of Foreign
Languages: Some argue that instead of a
third Indian language, students should be
encouraged to learn global languages like
French, German, or Mandarin to improve
international opportunities.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
67
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Way Ahead
 Constructive dialogue and a practical
compromise between the Centre and State
is the way forward.
 Education was transferred to the
concurrent list during the Emergency,
making it a shared responsibility.
 Disagreements over the third language
should not hinder funding for Samagra
Shiksha, a key education program.
PM SHRI scheme
Aim:
 The scheme aims to turn existing
government schools into model schools.

The scheme is for existing elementary,
secondary, and senior secondary schools run
by the central government and state and
local governments around the country.
Funding: It is a Centrally sponsored scheme for the
period of five years from 2022-23 to 2026-27 for
transforming nearly 14,500 schools across the
country.
Samagra Siksha Abhiyan (SSA)
 The scheme extends from pre-school to
class XII and aims to ensure inclusive and
equitable quality education at all levels of
school education.
 The Scheme subsumes the three erstwhile
Centrally Sponsored Schemes of Sarva
Shiksha Abhiyan (SSA), Rashtriya
Madhyamik Shiksha Abhiyan
(RMSA) and Teacher Education (TE).
The major objectives of the Scheme are:
 Support States and UTs in implementing the
recommendations of the National Education
Policy 2020 (NEP 2020);
 Support States in implementation of Right
of Children to Free and Compulsory
Education (RTE) Act, 2009;
 Emphasis on Foundational Literacy and
Numeracy;
 Strengthening and up-gradation of State
Councils for Educational Research and
Training (SCERTs)/State Institutes of
Education and District Institutes for
Education and Training (DIET) as nodal
agency for teacher training;
 Promoting vocational education.
 Under the Scheme, financial assistance is
provided to all the States and UTs for
undertaking above activities.
Deregulation Commission & State’s Role in
Governance
Syllabus: GS2/Governance
Context
 In a significant move aimed at promoting
ease of doing business and reducing
bureaucratic red tape, the Prime Minister of
India announced the establishment of
a Deregulation Commission.
Understanding Deregulation and Its Need in India
 Deregulation refers to the process of
reducing or eliminating government-
imposed restrictions on industries to
promote free-market competition and
efficiency.
 In India, bureaucratic red tape, excessive
licensing requirements, and sectoral
restrictions have often deterred businesses,
particularly startups and MSMEs, from
reaching their full potential.
Key Highlights of the Announcement
 Prime Minister Modi highlighted the
government’s efforts to eliminate hundreds
of archaic compliances through the Jan
Vishwas 2.0 initiative, and emphasized
the need for less government interference in
society.
 Focus areas include banking, energy,
telecom, retail, and manufacturing.
 The Deregulation Commission aims to
identify and eliminate unnecessary
government regulations.
 It aims to work alongside existing
regulatory bodies such as RBI, SEBI, TRAI,
and CERC, along with accelerating private
investment, reducing red tape, and
enhancing economic competitiveness.
Key Reasons for Establishing a Deregulation
Commission
Reducing Bureaucratic Red Tape:

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
68
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 India ranks 63rd in the Ease of Doing
Business Index (2020) by the World Bank.
 A Deregulation Commission would focus on
reducing excessive paperwork, streamlining
approval processes, and eliminating
redundant laws.
 Enhancing Economic Growth: Sectors such
as manufacturing, infrastructure, and digital
economy require faster clearances and
simplified compliance mechanisms.
 Encouraging Entrepreneurship and
Innovation: Startups and MSMEs often
struggle with regulatory bottlenecks,
including multiple approvals, high tax
burdens, and stringent labor laws.
 Revisiting Outdated Laws: Several colonial-
era laws still exist in India’s legal
framework. A Deregulation Commission
could recommend amendments or repeals
of such archaic laws to align with modern
governance needs.
 Boosting FDI: India has witnessed
increasing FDI inflows, but restrictive
policies in sectors like retail, insurance, and
e-commerce still pose challenges.
Strengthening Federalism and State Autonomy:
 Regulations vary across states, leading to
inconsistencies in business environments.
 A central body could work with state
governments to create uniform policies,
ensuring a level playing field for businesses
across India.
Increased Competition & Efficiency:
 Lower prices and better services for
consumers.
 Private sector participation has enhanced
productivity.
Evolution of Deregulation in India
 India’s economic liberalization initiated
reforms to reduce state control over
industries, encourage foreign direct
investment (FDI), and promote private
sector participation.
Regulatory Commissions Overseeing Deregulation
Regulato
ry
Sector Role
Past
Regulations
Commiss
ion
RBI
Banking &
Finance
Monitors
financial
institutio
ns and
monetary
policy.
Reduced its
stake in public
sector banks;
Increased FDI
limits in the
insurance
sector;
Deregulation
of interest
rates;
TRAI
Telecommunica
tions
Ensures
fair
competiti
on and
consumer
protectio
n.
1994: National
Telecom
Policy allowed
private
players.
1999: Revenu
e-sharing
model
replaced
license fees.
2016: Entry of
Reliance Jio
led to a price
war,
benefiting
consumers.
CERC Energy
Oversees
electricity
tariffs
and open
access.
Increased
private
investment in
power
generation.

Open access to
electricity
transmission,
allowing
consumers to
choose their
suppliers.

Renewable
energy
promotion
with solar and
wind power
auctions.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
69
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
PNGRB Oil & Gas
Ensures
transpare
ncy in
petroleu
m pricing.
2010: Deregul
ation of petrol
prices.
2014: Diesel
price
deregulated.
2016: Introdu
ction of daily
fuel price
revision.
Negative Impact of Deregulation
 Market Failures: Unchecked deregulation
can lead to monopolies and economic crises
(e.g., the 2008 financial crisis).
 Job Losses in PSUs: Privatization led to
layoffs in public sector enterprises.
 Regulatory Capture: Private entities may
influence policies in their favor, harming
consumer interests.
 Some industries saw the rise of dominant
players (e.g., Jio in telecom).
 Rural Disparities: Wealth concentration in
the hands of a few can widen social
inequalities. Benefits of deregulation are
unevenly distributed, with rural areas
lagging.
 Environmental Concerns: Rapid industrial
growth has increased pollution and
resource depletion.
Way Forward
 Ensuring Consumer Protection: Regulations
that protect consumer rights and fair
competition must not be diluted.
 Preventing Corporate
Malpractices: Oversight is necessary to
prevent monopolies and unethical practices.
 Balancing Public Welfare and Business
Interests: Sectors like healthcare and
education require careful deregulation to
avoid profiteering.
Internet Shutdowns in India
Syllabus: GS2/Polity and Governance
Context
 According to a report by advocacy body
‘Access Now’, the number of Internet
shutdowns are highest in 2024 globally.
About
 Global trend: 296 Internet
shutdowns happened globally in 2024, and
India’s cumulative 84 curbs accounted for
28% of these.
 India had the second highest number of
Internet shutdowns in 2024; Myanmar had
one more disruption than India.
 India’s total shutdowns in 2024 were fewer
compared to the previous year.
 Shutdowns affected 16 States and Union
Territories in India.
 Most Shutdowns: Manipur (21 shutdowns),
Haryana (12), and Jammu & Kashmir (12).
 Reasons for shutdowns: 41 related to
protests, 23 due to communal violence.

Legal Provisions Relating to Internet Shutdown
Grounds:
 Indian States and Union Territories can
impose an internet shutdown only in case of
a “public emergency” or in the interest of
“public safety”, according to the Indian
Telegraph Act.
 However, the law does not define what
qualifies as an emergency or safety issue.
 Till the year 2017, shutdowns were
imposed largely under Section 144 of the
Code of Criminal Procedure (CrPC).
 Section 144 of CrPC gave the police and the
District Magistrate the powers in order to
prevent unlawful gathering of people and
also to direct any person to abstain from a
certain activity.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
70
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 In 2017, the law was amended and the
Government promulgated the Temporary
Suspension of Telecom Services (Public
Emergency or Public Safety) Rule 2017.
 These rules outline the procedures and
conditions under which internet services
can be temporarily suspended.
 They require the review of orders by an
advisory board within 5 days to ensure the
legitimacy of the shutdown.
Arguments in Favour of Internet Shutdown by the
Government
 National Security: The government suspend
internet services as a temporary and
targeted measure to prevent the spread of
misinformation, coordinate unlawful
activities, or address security threats.
 Temporary and Targeted Measures: These
measures are not meant to infringe on long-
term access but rather to address specific
and immediate concerns.
 Preventing Unrest and Violence: Suspending
online communication helps prevent the
organization of protests, riots, or other
forms of civil unrest.
 Counteracting Fake News and
Disinformation: During times of crisis or
conflict, false information circulating online
can exacerbate tensions and contribute to
misinformation.
Arguments Against the Internet Shutdown by the
Government
 Impact on Freedom of Expression: Internet
shutdowns infringe upon the freedom of
expression guaranteed by the Indian
Constitution.
 Global Image and Investment: Frequent
internet shutdowns impact India’s global
image, raising concerns among investors
and international partners.
 Human Rights Concerns: Internet
shutdowns raise human rights concerns,
including the right to access information,
freedom of speech, and the right to peaceful
assembly.
 Economic Disruptions: India has a rapidly
growing digital economy, and internet
shutdowns can lead to significant economic
losses.
 Educational Challenges: With the increasing
use of online platforms for education,
internet shutdowns severely affect
students’ access to learning resources.
 Lack of Transparency: The government
needs to provide clear justifications for such
actions and communicate transparently
about the duration and reasons for the
shutdown.
Conclusion
 In a democracy, governments need to
provide a rationale for disrupting the
internet services in a periodic manner.
 Indiscriminate shutdowns have high social
and economic costs and are often
ineffective.
 For better internet governance the Indian
civil society needs to push for a transparent
and accountable system.
Supreme Court Emphasized Segregation of Waste at
Source
Anuradha Bhasin v. Union of India Case:
 In 2020 the Supreme Court by ruling on
Jammu and Kashmir Internet
shutdown held that indefinite internet
shutdowns by the State is not
permissible under Indian Constitution.
 The apex Court further stated
that imposition of Section144 can not be
used as a mechanism to avoid genuine
protest which is permitted under the
Constitution.
Section 144 has very specific parameters, only if
those parameters are satisfied then only a
Magistrate can pass the orders.
Key Highlights of the orders:
 Usage of the Internet is
the Fundamental Right under Article
19 of the Indian Constitution.
Internet shutdowns can be
of temporary period but not for
indefinite period.
 Government to publish all orders
imposing restrictions under Section
144.
 The Court had also said that any order
with regard to Internet Shutdowns will
come under Judicial Scrutiny.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
71
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Syllabus: GS2/ Governance, GS3/ Environment
Context
 The Supreme Court emphasized that waste
segregation at source is crucial for
environmental health and must begin at the
household level.
 Waste segregation refers to the systematic
separation of different types of waste at the
point of generation to facilitate proper
disposal, recycling, and treatment.
Importance of Waste Segregation
 Reducing Landfill Burden: Proper
segregation minimizes the amount of waste
sent to landfills, thereby reducing land
pollution and methane emissions.
 Enhancing Recycling: Effective separation
allows organic waste to be composted and
non-biodegradable materials to be recycled,
promoting a circular economy.
 Preventing Pollution: Mixed waste leads to
toxic leachate and harmful emissions,
contaminating soil, water, and air.
Segregation helps in safe disposal and
treatment of hazardous materials.
 Waste-to-Energy Efficiency: Segregated
waste ensures better efficiency of waste-to-
energy plants, as contaminants in mixed
waste reduce energy output and cause
operational issues.
Challenges in Implementing Waste Segregation
 Lack of Public Awareness: Many households
do not follow waste segregation due to
limited awareness and behavioral inertia.
 Inadequate Infrastructure: Many urban and
rural areas lack proper collection and
processing facilities, leading to mixed waste
dumping.
 Weak Enforcement of Rules: Despite the
Solid Waste Management Rules, 2016,
enforcement at municipal levels remains
weak due to limited accountability and
resources.
 Resistance from Waste Handlers: Informal
waste pickers and sanitation workers lack
incentives and training to handle
segregated waste efficiently.
Government initiatives
Solid Waste Management Rules, 2016:
 Mandates segregation of waste at source
into biodegradable, non-biodegradable, and
domestic hazardous waste.
 Promotes waste processing through
composting, bio-methanation, and waste-to-
energy technologies.
 Encourages bulk waste generators (housing
societies, hotels, etc.) to process their own
waste.
Swachh Bharat Mission (SBM):
 SBM-Urban focuses on 100% door-to-door
waste collection and encourages source
segregation.
 SBM-Rural promotes biodegradable waste
composting and bio-gas plants in villages.
 Waste-to-Energy Projects: The government
is encouraging waste-to-energy plants to
convert non-recyclable waste into
electricity.
 Extended Producer Responsibility
(EPR): Under EPR rules, manufacturers and
producers must take responsibility for
managing post-consumer waste (e.g., plastic
waste, e-waste).
Successful examples in waste Management
 Indore, consistently ranked India’s cleanest
city under Swachh Survekshan, has
demonstrated that strict enforcement
like 100% Source Segregation, Processing
Infrastructure etc. can transform urban
waste management.
 Ambikapur, Chhattisgarh, has adopted
a ‘Zero Waste’ model, where Women-led
self-help groups (SHGs) manage solid waste
collection and processing.
 Pune’s SWaCH (Solid Waste Collection and
Handling) model has successfully integrated
waste pickers into formal waste collection,
ensuring livelihood security.
Way Forward
 Strict Enforcement Norms: Authorities must
impose penalties for non-segregation and
incentivize compliance.
 Strengthening Infrastructure: Investment in
decentralized waste processing units at
community levels can improve efficiency.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
72
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Technology-Driven Solutions: Adoption of
smart waste management systems, AI-
based sorting, and RFID tracking can
streamline waste processing.
 Integrating informal waste pickers into
municipal frameworks can enhance
segregation and recycling.

Delimitation Debate: Why Are Southern States
Wary?
Syllabus: GS2/ Polity & Governance
Context
 The Union Home Minister has assured that
no parliamentary constituencies in
southern states will be reduced as a result
of the proposed delimitation exercise in
response to concerns raised by the Tamil
Nadu Chief Minister.
Understanding Delimitation
 Delimitation is the process of redrawing the
boundaries of parliamentary and legislative
assembly constituencies to reflect changes
in population. It aims to:
 Ensure fair representation based on
demographic shifts.
 Adjust the number of seats allocated to
different states.
 Determine reservations for Scheduled
Castes (SC) and Scheduled Tribes (ST).
 This system was designed to balance
population growth with political
representation and uphold the democratic
principle of “one citizen, one vote, one
value.”
Constitutional Provisions:
 Article 82: After every Census, Parliament
enacts a Delimitation Act to redefine
constituency boundaries.
 Article 170: The total number of seats in
state assemblies is adjusted according to
the Delimitation Act after each Census.
Who Conducts Delimitation?
 The Delimitation Commission is an
independent body established through a
Parliamentary Act, is responsible for
overseeing the process.
 The authority, and its decisions cannot be
challenged in court. The Election
Commission of India (ECI) provides
technical assistance for the exercise.
However, the Supreme Court has ruled
in 2024 that delimitation orders can be
reviewed if they violate constitutional
values.
Composition: Chairperson: A retired Supreme Court
judge
Members: The Chief Election Commissioner (CEC)
or a commissioner appointed by the CEC.
State Election Commissioners of the respective
states
History of Delimitation in India
Parliamentary Authority:
 The power of delimitation (deciding the
number and boundaries of constituencies)
is vested in the Parliament.
 This power has been exercised four times
through the Delimitation Commission Acts
of 1952, 1962, 1972, and 2002.
 42nd Amendment Act (1976): Freezes the
allocation of Lok Sabha seats to states and
the division of territorial constituencies
based on the 1971 Census.
 This freeze was intended to protect states
that successfully implemented population
control measures from losing their
representation in Parliament.
84th Amendment Act (2001):
 Allowed readjustment and rationalization of
territorial constituencies based on the 1991
Census.
 However, it did not permit an increase or
decrease in the number of seats allotted to
each state in the Lok Sabha and State
Legislative Assemblies.
 The main objective was to maintain
uniformity in population representation
without disturbing the total number of
seats.
87th Amendment Act (2003):
 Changed the basis of delimitation from the
1991 Census to the 2001 Census.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
73
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Like the 84th Amendment, it did not alter
the number of seats allocated to each state
in Parliament and State Assemblies.
 It was primarily aimed at ensuring fairer
representation based on more recent
population data.
Why Is Delimitation Being Revisited?
 The next delimitation exercise is expected
to be based on the 2021 Census (delayed
due to the pandemic). This has raised
concerns among South Indian states, as
their population growth has been lower
compared to the North Indian states.
 If delimitation follows the historical
patterns (1951, 1961, 1971 and 2002), the
number of Lok Sabha seats could increase
from 543 to 753 based on the population
ratio of 20 lakh people per constituency.
Why Are Southern States Worried About
Delimitation?
 Northern states (Uttar Pradesh, Bihar,
Rajasthan, Madhya Pradesh, etc.) have
experienced higher population growth,
which could result in them gaining more
seats at the expense of the South.
 Southern states (Tamil Nadu, Kerala,
Karnataka, Andhra Pradesh, and Telangana)
fear a loss of representation despite better
governance and population control
measures.
What’s Next?
 Potential Increase in Total Seats: Instead of
reducing seats from any state, the total
number of Lok Sabha seats may be
increased to accommodate growing
population disparities.
 2026 Review: The next delimitation can
happen only after the first Census post-
2026, likely to be the 2031 Census.
 Women’s Reservation Act: The
implementation of 33% women’s
reservation may also impact seat
adjustments.
Concerns Raised By PwDs Over DPDP rules
Syllabus: GS2/ Governance
Context
 The disability rights activists have raised
concerns over certain provisions in the
draft Rules of the Digital Personal Data
Protection Act, 2023.
Background
 The draft Digital Personal Data Protection
Rules aim to safeguard citizens’ rights for
the protection of their personal data.
 However, Section 9(1) has raised concerns
among disability rights activists as it treats
persons with disabilities (PwDs) the same as
children in requiring guardian consent for
data processing.
Key Provisions of the rules
The DPDP Act defines:
 Data Fiduciaries as entities processing
personal data.
 Data Principals as individuals whose data is
collected.
 For PwDs, Section 2(j)(ii) includes a “lawful
guardian” within the meaning of Data
Principal, effectively transferring decision-
making power from the PwD to their
guardian in specific cases.
 Section 9(1): It mandates that for PwDs
with legal guardians, consent for data
processing must be obtained from the
guardian.
Guardianship Laws for PwD
 The National Trust Act (NT Act),
1999: Provides full guardianship for
individuals diagnosed with autism, cerebral
palsy, intellectual disabilities, or severe
multiple disabilities.
 The Rights of Persons with Disabilities
(RPWD) Act, 2016: Advocates for “limited
guardianship,” ensuring PwDs retain
decision-making power with support.
 The Act aligns with the United Nations
Convention on the Rights of Persons with
Disabilities (UNCRPD).
Concerns with the Draft Rules
 Denial of Digital Autonomy: Section
9(1) assumes that PwDs with legal
guardians do not make independent digital
decisions.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
74
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Gender and Disability Intersectionality: PwD
women will face additional hurdles, such as
requiring guardian consent for accessing
essential services for purchasing products
online.
 Data Privacy Risks: Platforms may collect
disability-related data even when a
guardian is not involved, raising concerns
over unnecessary data collection and
potential misuse.
Way Forward
 Provide Clear Guidelines: Introduce specific
illustrations and procedural clarifications in
the draft rules to ensure practical
implementation.
 Enhance Digital Accessibility: Strengthen
mandates for accessible digital
infrastructure to reduce systemic barriers
faced by PwDs.
 Promote Digital Literacy: Develop targeted
programs to empower PwDs with the skills
needed for independent online navigation.
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS
International Organization of Aids to Marine
Navigation (IALA)
Syllabus: GS2/International Organisations
Context
 India is elected to the Vice Presidency of the
International Organization of Aids to Marine
Navigation (IALA) in Singapore.
About
 It was the first General Assembly of
IALA and also marks its transition from a
non-governmental organization (NGO) to
an inter-governmental organization (IGO).
 This underscores India’s strong leadership
and contributions to maritime affairs,
reaffirming its commitment to sustainable
and secure marine navigation.
International Organization of Aids to Marine
Navigation (IALA)
 IALA was established in 1957 as an NGO.
 New IGO Status: Expands IALA’s role in
harmonizing global maritime navigation
systems, promoting safety, and addressing
emerging challenges in safety and
environmental protection.
 India’s Hosting Role: India will host the IALA
Council meeting in December 2025 and the
IALA Conference & General Assembly in
September 2027 in Mumbai.
 Significance for India: India’s election
highlights its commitment to maritime
safety, navigational aids, and international
cooperation in the maritime sector.
INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS
India-EFTA Desk
Syllabus: GS2/IR/GS3/Economy
Context
 India and the European Free Trade
Association (EFTA) have taken a significant
step towards deeper economic
collaboration with the inauguration of the
India-EFTA Desk.
About
 This initiative follows the recently
concluded India-EFTA Trade and Economic
Partnership Agreement (TEPA), making
EFTA the first European bloc to formalize a
trade pact with India.
 India has received an investment
commitment of $100 billion in 15 years
from the EFTA, allowing several products
such as Swiss watches, chocolates and cut
and polished diamonds at lower or zero
duties.
 India-EFTA Desk will serve as the bridge
between businesses on both
sides, promoting ease of doing business.
 It will support EFTA businesses looking to
invest, expand, or establish operations in
India.
 It will drive investment in renewable
energy, life sciences, engineering, and
digital transformation.
Significance for India
 EFTA has a strategic importance to India’s
development goals.
 Norway’s expertise in green shipping,
Switzerland’s advancements in rail
networks, Iceland’s leadership in

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
75
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
geothermal energy, and Liechtenstein’s
high-value manufacturing.
 The research collaborations between IITs
and the Arctic University of Norway, will
demonstrate TEPA’s broader scope beyond
trade.
About European Free Trade Association (EFTA)
 The European Free Trade Association
(EFTA) is the intergovernmental
organisation of Iceland, Liechtenstein,
Norway and Switzerland.
 It was set up in 1960 by its then seven
Member States for the promotion of free
trade and economic integration between its
members.
 Trade with India: India-EFTA two-way trade
was about $24 billion in 2023-24 against
$18.65 billion in 2022-23.
 Switzerland is the largest trading partner
and investor in India followed by Norway in
the bloc.
India-EFTA Trade and Economic Partnership
Agreement
 Market Access: The EFTA states has imports
and exports of goods and services close to
$1.3 trillion in 2021, making them the 10th
largest merchandise traders and eighth
largest services traders worldwide.
 It would provide Indian businesses with
improved access to the markets of EFTA
member countries.
 Diversification of Trade Partners: Reducing
dependency on a few key trading partners
can help mitigate risks associated with
economic fluctuations in specific regions.
 Tariff Reductions: The trade agreements
typically involve the reduction or
elimination of tariffs on goods traded
between the participating countries.
 This can make Indian goods more
competitive in EFTA markets, potentially
boosting exports.
 Technology and Innovation Exchange: EFTA
companies are world leaders in
pharmaceuticals, biotechnology, machinery
manufacturing, R&D-driven technology
products, geothermal-related technologies,
marine technology, energy-related services,
financial services, banking and insurance.
 Collaboration in research, technology
transfer, and innovation can be enhanced
through a trade agreement.
 Potential for Increased Foreign Direct
Investment (FDI): It can attract foreign
direct investment by creating a more
favorable and predictable business
environment.
 Mutually Beneficial Trade: EFTA has a track
record of negotiating mutually beneficial
trade agreements, which to date cover an
extensive network of 29 free trade
agreements (FTAs) with 40 partner
countries.
Concerns
 Divergent Regulatory
Standards: Harmonizing standards related
to product quality, safety, and
environmental regulations is crucial for
smooth trade, and differences may lead to
additional compliance costs for businesses.
 Intellectual Property Rights (IPR): Both
parties need to agree on the standards and
enforcement mechanisms for patents,
copyrights, trademarks, and other
intellectual property issues.
 Services and Investment Barriers: Concerns
may arise if there are obstacles to the free
flow of services or restrictions on foreign
investment in certain sectors.
 Labor and Environmental
Standards: Ensuring that the trade deal
includes provisions for maintaining or
improving labor rights and environmental
protections is essential.
Way Ahead
 The potential benefits of a TEPA between
India and EFTA states are significant.
 This is not merely a transactional
arrangement to improve market access, but
the basis for a long-term relationship
grounded with a vision for mutual growth.
 The EFTA desk embodies this commitment
by fostering connections that benefit
economies and societies of all parties, not

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
76
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
just economically but socially and
environmentally as well.
India- France Cooperation on IMEC Project
Syllabus: GS2/International Relations
Context
 India and France announced that they
would continue to work closely to
implement the India-Middle East-Europe
Corridor (IMEC) project.
India-Middle East-Europe Economic Corridor
(IMEC)
 Participants: During the Delhi G20 Summit,
India, USA, UAE, Saudi Arabia, France,
Germany, Italy and the European Union
signed a Memorandum of Understanding
(MoU) to establish the India-Middle East-
Europe Economic Corridor.
 Objective: The corridor will encourage and
provide impetus to economic development
through enhanced connectivity and
economic integration between Asia, West
Asia, the Middle East and Europe.
Components
 The India-Middle East-Europe Economic
Corridor will consist of two separate
corridors,
 The East corridor connecting India to West
Asia/Middle East and
 The Northern corridor connecting West
Asia/Middle East to Europe.
 The project would involve the building of
a railway line across the Arabian Peninsula
through the United Arab Emirates and Saudi
Arabia and develop shipping connectivity to
India and Europe on either end of this
corridor.
 The corridor could be further developed to
transport energy through pipelines and
data through an optical fiber link.
Ports Which are Part of IMEC
 India: Ports in Mundra (Gujarat), Kandla
(Gujarat), and Jawaharlal Nehru Port Trust
(Navi Mumbai).
 Europe: Piraeus in Greece, Messina in
Southern Italy, and Marseille in France.
 Middle East: Ports include Fujairah, Jebel
Ali, and Abu Dhabi in the UAE, as well as
Dammam and Ras Al Khair ports in Saudi
Arabia.
 Israel: Haifa port.
 Railway Line: The railway line will link
Fujairah port in the UAE to Haifa port in
Israel, passing through Saudi Arabia
(Ghuwaifat and Haradh) and Jordan.
India-France Partnership in IMEC
 Access to European Markets: France’s
strategic location provides India with a
crucial gateway to European markets,
facilitating trade and investment flows.
 Technological Collaboration: France’s
expertise in infrastructure development,
logistics, and digital technologies is
invaluable for the successful
implementation of the IMEC.
 Countering China’s China’s Belt and Road
Initiative (BRI): India and France, both wary
of the BRI’s implications, can leverage the
IMEC to offer an alternative model of
regional connectivity.
Hurdle before IMEC
 Vulnerability of the Strait of Hormuz: Almost
the entire trade of the IMEC architecture
flows through the Strait of Hormuz and with
Iran’s proximity and control over the strait,
the risk of disruptions remain very high.
 Financial Viability: Securing adequate
funding for such a large-scale project is
essential. A clear and robust financial model
is needed to attract investors.
 Geopolitical Sensitivities: The project
involves multiple stakeholders with diverse
interests. Navigating these complexities and
ensuring consensus will be crucial.
Way Ahead
 India and France share converging interests
in promoting stability and connectivity in
the Indo-Pacific region, making them natural
partners in this endeavor.
 The geopolitical concerns need to be
managed by striking a delicate balance in
accommodating the geopolitical interests of
the participating nations and addressing
potential political sensitivities.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
77
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Concerns Related To China’s Dam Project
Syllabus: GS2/International Relations; Effect of
Policies on India’s Interests
Context
 China’s plan to construct the world’s
largest hydropower dam on the
Brahmaputra River, known as the Yarlung
Tsangpo in Tibet, has raised significant
concerns among downstream
countries, particularly India and Bangladesh.

Implications of China’s Mega-Dam Project
Environmental and Ecological Concerns:
 Altered Water Flow and Sediment
Reduction: River Brahmaputra carries vast
amounts of sediment that fertilize
downstream agricultural lands.
 Chinese dams trap these
sediments, reducing soil fertility and
affecting farming communities in India and
Bangladesh.
 Increased Risk of Flash Floods: Sudden
releases of water from Chinese reservoirs
could lead to devastating floods in Assam
and Arunachal Pradesh.
 There have been instances in the past
where unannounced water discharges led
to loss of lives and property.
 Biodiversity Loss and Habitat
Destruction: River ecosystems, including
aquatic species such as the Gangetic
dolphin, are under threat due to fluctuating
water levels and disrupted breeding cycles.
 Glacial Melt and Climate Change Effects: The
Tibetan Plateau, often referred to as
the “Third Pole”, is home to the largest
volume of ice outside the Arctic and
Antarctic. It plays a critical role in the
Earth’s cryosphere and influences global
climate patterns.
 Seismic Risks: The dam’s location in a
seismically active and ecologically fragile
Himalayan region raises concerns about
potential earthquakes and environmental
degradation.
 Such a massive infrastructure project could
increase the risk of landslides and other
geological disasters.
Geopolitical Ramifications:
 India’s Vulnerability: India, which relies on
the Brahmaputra for agriculture and
drinking water, fears that China could use
its control over the river as a strategic
weapon, either by restricting water flow or
causing artificial floods.
 Legal and Diplomatic
Challenges: International laws governing
transboundary rivers, such as the UN
Convention on the Law of the Non-
navigational Uses of International
Watercourses (1997), emphasize equitable
and reasonable utilization of shared water
resources.
 However, China is not a signatory to this
convention, allowing it to exercise
unchecked control over these rivers.
 China and India have the Expert Level
Mechanism (ELM) since 2006 for
hydrological data sharing, but lack a
comprehensive treaty.
 Conflict with Southeast Asian
Nations: Countries like Vietnam, Cambodia,
and Thailand, which depend on the Mekong
River, have raised similar concerns over
reduced water availability due to China’s
upstream damming.
 Economic and Social Impact: Large dam
projects often lead to forced relocation of
local communities.
 Altered river flows can disrupt irrigation
patterns and reduce fish stocks, threatening
food security in India and Bangladesh.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
78
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
India’s Response and Possible Strategies
 Developing Its Own Water
Infrastructure: India has been ramping up
dam and hydropower projects in Arunachal
Pradesh, like the proposed Siang Upper
Multipurpose Project (SUMP) to ensure
water security and energy generation.
 Strengthening Diplomacy: India has been
engaging with Bangladesh and other
regional stakeholders to form a united front
on transboundary water management.
 Enhancing Satellite Monitoring and Early
Warning Systems: Improved satellite
surveillance of Chinese dam activities and
better flood prediction models can help
mitigate risks.
 Exploring Legal Avenues: India could push
for regional agreements on water-sharing
and seek international arbitration in cases
of water disputes.
Freeze on USAID by United States
Syllabus: GS2/ International Relation, Foreign
Affairs
Context
 US President Donald Trump has taken steps
to close the United States Agency for
International Development (USAID).
What is USAID?
 The United States Agency for International
Development (USAID) is an independent
agency of the U.S. government, established
in 1961 by President John F. Kennedy.
 It was created to consolidate various
foreign assistance programs under one
agency to administer civilian foreign aid
and development assistance.
 USAID receives funding allocated in the U.S.
federal budget.
 The top recipient countries of USAID
include: Ukraine, Ethiopia, Jordan, Somalia
etc.
Objectives and Areas of Work
 It operates in over 100 countries, providing
financial aid and technical assistance in key
sectors such as:
 Economic development, Health and
education, Food security and humanitarian
assistance, Climate change mitigation and
Democracy and governance.
 USAID collaborates with governments,
NGOs, businesses, and international
organizations, offering grants and
assistance for development projects. Some
notable initiatives include:
 President’s Emergency Plan for AIDS Relief
(PEPFAR), addressing HIV/AIDS treatment
and prevention.
 Feed the Future, tackling hunger and food
security issues.
 Power Africa, expanding electricity access
across Africa.
 Water for the World Act, improving water,
sanitation, and hygiene services.
Implications of freeze on USAID
 Impact on U.S. Global Influence: Foreign aid
has been instrumental in Washington’s
efforts to build alliances and counter
geopolitical rivals like China and Russia in
developing nations.
 The freeze may reduce U.S. influence in
strategic regions.
 Rise of Alternative Development
Partners: Countries such as China, through
initiatives like the Belt and Road Initiative
(BRI), could step in to fill the aid vacuum,
increasing their strategic leverage.
 Humanitarian Setbacks: Several vulnerable
nations will struggle to meet development
goals due to funding cuts, affecting
education, healthcare, and infrastructure
programs.
USAID’s Role in India
 USAID’s engagement with India began
in 1951 under the India Emergency Food
Aid Act signed by President Harry Truman.
 The funding freeze is unlikely to have a
major impact on India, given its reduced
dependence on USAID assistance.
 However, it may affect select ongoing
projects in health and sanitation.
In 2024, USAID allocated $79.3 million for
India’s healthcare sector.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
79
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Concluding remarks
 The freeze on USAID funding by the U.S.
government has wide-ranging implications
for global development efforts.
 While India is relatively insulated from its
effects, many developing nations reliant on
U.S. aid may face significant challenges.
 The move underscores the need for nations
to explore alternative strategies for
ensuring sustained development assistance
and economic stability.
U.S.-India TRUST Initiative
Syllabus :GS 2/IR
In News
 India and the US have launched
the “Transforming Relationship Utilizing
Strategic Technology” (TRUST) initiative.
About TRUST Initiative
 It builds on national programs like the
US Critical Minerals and Materials (CMM)
program and India’s National Critical
Minerals Mission to boost exploration,
recycling, and R&D in critical minerals.
 It focuses on cooperation in the recovery
and processing of critical minerals,
including lithium and rare earth elements
(REEs).
 It aims to reduce barriers to technology
transfer, address export controls, and
enhance high-tech commerce between the
two countries, particularly in critical
minerals and advanced materials.
 Importance: It will promote collaboration
among governments, academia, and the
private sector to drive innovation in sectors
like defense, AI, semiconductors, quantum
computing, biotechnology, energy, and
space.
 It aims to counter China’s dominance in
critical minerals supply chains.
Source :IE
India-US 123 Agreement
Syllabus: GS2/IR
Context
 India-US 123 Agreement of 2007 could
finally achieve its full potential.
About
 India and the United States affirmed their
commitment to furthering a bilateral
Energy Security Partnership.
 The announcement signals their
commitment to “fully realise” the US-India
123 Civil Nuclear Agreement, alongside a
pledge to move forward on plans to work
together to build American-designed
nuclear reactors in India.
123 Agreement of 2007
 Also known as the U.S.-India Civil Nuclear
Agreement, it aims to facilitate civilian
nuclear cooperation between the two
countries.
Key Features:
 Nuclear Trade: It allows the U.S. to supply
India with nuclear fuel, technology, and
reactors for civilian energy purposes.
 Non-Proliferation Commitment: India, in
exchange, agrees to separate its civilian and
military nuclear programs and place its
civilian reactors under International Atomic
Energy Agency (IAEA) safeguards.
 No Restrictions on Military Programs: Unlike
the Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty (NPT),
the agreement does not require India to
forgo nuclear weapons development, as
India is not a signatory to the NPT.
 Energy and Economic Cooperation: The
agreement aims to enhance energy security,
support India’s growing energy demands,
and promote economic cooperation
between the two nations.
Indian Ocean: Strategic Significance & India’s Role
Syllabus: GS2/ IR
In Context
 External Affairs Minister S. Jaishankar
emphasized the need for a “coordinated
flotilla” to promote stability and
cooperation in the Indian Ocean Region
(IOR).
 His remarks highlight the
growing geopolitical competition and
security challenges in the region,

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
80
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
necessitating multilateral maritime
collaboration.
About the Indian Ocean
Geographic Overview:
 Third Largest Ocean: Spans 9,600 km from
the Bay of Bengal to Antarctica and 7,800
km from South Africa to Western Australia.
 Coastline: 70,000 km, including major
economies like India, Australia, and African
nations.
 Population & Coastal Influence: Home
to 35% of the world’s population and 40% of
the global coastline.
Historical & Civilizational Significance:
 Named after India, reflecting its historical
and cultural influence on maritime trade.
 Served as a key trade route since the first
millennium, connecting India with Arab
lands, Southeast Asia, and Africa.
 The Silk Route & Spice Trade flourished via
the Indian Ocean, linking Europe, Asia, and
Africa.
Strategic Importance:
 A critical global trade route, facilitating 70%
of the world’s container traffic.
 80% of India’s external trade and 90% of its
energy imports pass through the Indian
Ocean.
 Key oil supply routes from West Asia to
India, China, Japan, and Europe traverse the
region.
 Control of Maritime Chokepoints:
India’s central position in IOR provides
strategic leverage over:
 Strait of Hormuz (Iran-Oman) – Vital for oil
shipments.
 Bab el-Mandeb (Yemen-Djibouti) – Entry to
the Red Sea & Suez Canal.
 Strait of Malacca (Indonesia-Malaysia) – Key
trade passage for East Asia.
Challenges in the Indian Ocean Region (IOR)
 Maritime Security Threats: Frequent pirate
attacks & trafficking, particularly
near Somalia and the Gulf of Aden.
 Economic & Environmental
Issues: Overfishing and deep-sea mining
threaten marine ecosystems.
 Climate Change & Rising Sea Levels: Small
island nations face coastal erosion and
submersion risks.
 Humanitarian Crises & Disasters: Natural
disasters like cyclones, tsunamis, and oil
spills require coordinated disaster response.
 Geopolitical Rivalries: Growing influence of
the U.S., China, UK, and France fuels power
struggles in the region.
India’s Policy Shift in the Indian Ocean
Strengthening Regional Ties:
 India is actively engaging with IOR
nations through:
 Indian Ocean Conference (IOC) – A key
diplomatic platform initiated by India.
 Indian Ocean Rim Association (IORA) –
Multilateral cooperation on economic and
maritime security.
 Indian Ocean Naval Symposium (IONS) –
Enhancing naval interoperability and
intelligence sharing.
 Colombo Security Conclave – Focuses
on maritime security &
counterterrorism with Sri Lanka, Maldives,
and Mauritius.
SAGAR (Security and Growth for All in the Region):
 Launched in 2015 under PM Modi, this
initiative aims to:
 Strengthen India’s leadership in IOR.
 Ensure free and open sea lanes for secure
global trade.
 Promote sustainable maritime development.
Enhancing Blue-Water Capabilities:
 Naval Expansion: India is modernizing its
navy by inducting indigenous aircraft
carriers and advanced submarines.
 Maritime Surveillance: Deployment of P-8I
Poseidon aircraft, and satellite-based
tracking systems.
 Quad Cooperation: India, U.S., Japan, and
Australia collaborate on maritime security,

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
81
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
anti-submarine warfare, and intelligence
sharing.
India-U.S. Partnership on Underwater Domain
Awareness (UDA) Technologies
Syllabus: GS2/ IR
In News
 India and the United States strengthen
cooperation in Underwater Domain
Awareness (UDA) with the launch of
the Autonomous Systems Industry Alliance
(ASIA) during the PM Modi visit to the US.
About
 Underwater Domain Awareness
(UDA) refers to the capability of a nation or
an organization to monitor, detect, and
assess activities occurring beneath the
surface of water bodies like oceans and
seas.
 It plays a crucial role in maritime security,
resource management, environmental
protection, and disaster response.
 This collaboration marks a historic first—
India is the only country with which the U.S.
defense industry has offered to work on
such sensitive technologies.
Significance of India-U.S. UDA Cooperation
Geopolitical and Strategic Importance:
 Strengthening Maritime Domain Awareness
(MDA) and Underwater Domain Awareness
(UDA) is crucial for India’s national
security, particularly due to:
 China’s growing naval presence in the
Indian Ocean Region (IOR).
 The need for enhanced submarine detection
and tracking capabilities.
 Increased cooperation within the Quad
(India, U.S., Australia, Japan) to counter
common threats.
Defense Technology Collaboration:
 The U.S. has offered several cutting-edge
underwater surveillance and anti-
submarine warfare (ASW) technologies,
including:
 Sea Picket: An autonomous sonar
surveillance system by Thayer Mahan.
 Wave Glider: Unmanned Surface Vehicle
(USV) by Boeing’s Liquid Robotics, with
plans for co-production with Sagar Defence
Engineering (60 units).
 Low-Frequency Active Towed
Sonar: Discussions underway between L3
Harris and Bharat Electronics Limited
(BEL).
Impact on India’s Defense Capabilities:
 India’s anti-submarine warfare (ASW)
capabilities will be significantly
strengthened, complementing existing
assets such as:
 12 P-8I Poseidon Maritime Patrol Aircraft
already in service.
 24 MH-60R Multi-Role Helicopters (being
inducted).
 15 MQ-9B Sea Guardian UAVs, part of a 31-
unit contract with deliveries starting from
2029.
Technology Transfer, Make-in-India, and Economic
Impact:
 First-of-its-kind co-production and
technology transfer in sensitive underwater
systems.
 Strengthens India’s defense manufacturing
ecosystem under Make in India &
Atmanirbhar Bharat.
Challenges and Considerations
 Technology Transfer and Data Security:
Concerns over sharing sensitive UDA data
and sovereign control over surveillance
systems.
 Financial and Operational Challenges: High
cost of procurement, deployment, and
maintenance of advanced underwater
systems.
 Technology Dependence: Advanced sonar
and AI systems require high-end research
and funding.
 Legal and Diplomatic
Complexities: Underwater domain
awareness in disputed waters can create
tensions with neighboring nations.
 Environmental Impact: Use of sonar
technologies can impact marine biodiversity
and aquatic ecosystems.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
82
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Conclusion
 Underwater Domain Awareness (UDA) is a
critical component of maritime security,
economic sustainability, and environmental
conservation.
 Given the growing Chinese presence in the
Indian Ocean, India’s focus on UDA, in
collaboration with the U.S. and Quad
partners, will significantly enhance its
maritime defense capabilities and strategic
positioning.
India, Qatar Elevate Ties To ‘Strategic Partnership’
Syllabus: GS2/IR
Context
 India and Qatar have signed an agreement
to elevate their ties to the level of a strategic
partnership.
 Both countries commemorated the 50 years
of establishment of diplomatic relations in
2023.
Key Outcomes
 Both countries are exploring the option of
concluding a Free Trade Agreement (FTA).
 Two sides also signed a double taxation
avoidance treaty and also planned
on doubling their trade to $28 billion within
five years.
 Both sides discussed the Israel-Palestinian
conflict in Gaza Strip.
 India currently has strategic partnerships
with four other members of the Gulf
Cooperation Council – the United Arab
Emirates (UAE), Saudi Arabia, Oman, and
Kuwait.
Significance of the Visit:
 Arab States Summit: The visit of the Qatari
Emir has drawn attention as it is being held
just two days prior to the five Arab states
summit in Riyadh.
 The summit will take up the new proposals
from the United States.
 US Proposal on Gaza Crisis: President
Trump’s proposed that the Palestinians of
the region should be shifted out to
neighbouring countries like Egypt and
Jordan.
 India supports a two-state solution in
bringing an end to the Israel-Palestinian
crisis and has welcomed the ceasefire that
was announced recently.

Brief on India-Qatar Relations
Economic and Trade Relations:
 Qatar is the largest provider of liquefied
natural gas (LNG) and liquefied petroleum
gas (LPG) to India, supplying 10.91 million
metric tonnes of LNG and 4.92 million
metric tonnes of LPG in FY 2023-24.
 The current annual trade is worth $14.08
billion.
 Defence: India participates in the biennial
Doha International Maritime Defence
Exhibition and Conference (DIMDEX).
 Exercise Zair-Al-Bahr is a joint naval
exercise between the Indian Navy and the
Qatar Emiri Naval Force (QENF).
 The India-Qatar Defence Cooperation
Agreement was signed in 2008 and
extended for five years in 2018.
 The agreement is managed through
the Joint Defence Cooperation Committee
(JDCC).
Labor and Diaspora:
 India has a large expatriate community in
Qatar, numbering over 700,000.
 The Indian diaspora in Qatar plays a crucial
role in the country’s development,

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
83
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
particularly in construction and other
sectors.
 Regional Cooperation: Gulf Cooperation
Council (GCC) is a political and economic
alliance of six Middle Eastern countries—
Saudi Arabia, Kuwait, the United Arab
Emirates, Qatar, Bahrain, and Oman. It was
established in 1981.
 India engages regularly with GCC and aims
to deepen its relationship with the GCC.
Challenges/Concerns
 The Hamas–Israel conflict and shipping
attacks in the Red Sea affect India’s energy
security and economic growth.
 India remains cautious in Middle Eastern
politics, balancing relations with the Gulf,
Iran, and Israel.
 If the conflict escalates, this balancing act
could become more challenging.
 Delay in Connectivity Projects: The conflict
has delayed a senior-officials meeting for
the I2U2 group since 2023.
 India urges economic initiatives like I2U2
and IMEC to progress despite the conflict.
 FTAs with GCC: Delays in finalizing
the India–GCC Free Trade Agreement
(FTA) due to changes in the GCC’s trade
negotiator.
 Reaching an agreement that satisfies all GCC
states remains a key challenge.
Way Forward
 Growing security challenges are increasing
the need for India to be a key strategic
partner of Gulf states.
 India aims to expand its regional presence
and influence.
 Stronger alignment in political, economic,
and security interests is shaping a new
framework for India-Gulf relations.
 If maintained, this framework will boost
trust and enable more ambitious
cooperation.
India and Argentina Strengthen Cooperation in
Lithium Exploration
Syllabus: GS2/IR, GS3/Economy
Context
 India and Argentina discussed expanding
mining cooperation, focusing on lithium
exploration.
About
 Argentina’s Lithium Reserves: Argentina,
part of the ‘Lithium Triangle,’ is key for
India’s access to minerals needed for EV
batteries and renewable energy storage.
 Ongoing Efforts: Discussions included
lithium exploration by Khanij Bidesh India
Ltd. (KABIL) & Greenko and increasing
Indian company participation in Argentina’s
mining projects.
Lithium Triangle
 The “Lithium Triangle” refers to a region in
South America that contains some of the
world’s largest lithium reserves.
 This triangular-shaped region
encompasses parts of Argentina, Bolivia, and
Chile; they possess 58% of the world’s
known lithium reserves.
About Lithium
 Lithium is a silvery-white metal and is highly
reactive.
 Applications: Lithium has various industrial
applications, most notably in rechargeable
lithium-ion batteries.
 These batteries are widely used in electronic
devices such as smartphones, laptops, and
electric vehicles.
 Global Production: The majority of the world’s
lithium production comes from countries
like Australia, Chile, and Argentina.
 These countries have significant lithium
reserves and are major players in the global
lithium market.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
84
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in

 India has been increasing its diplomatic
outreach to the LTCs for accessing the
mineral.
Source: PIB
India, China Worked hard to Protect G-20
Syllabus: GS 2/IR
In News
 The External Affairs Minister of India
emphasized that India and China worked
hard to preserve the G-20 as an institution
amid global polarization.
About
 India and China discussed bilateral
developments, particularly the situation on
the Line of Actual Control (LAC).
 The two leaders reviewed bilateral
relations, discussing the resumption of the
Kailash Mansarovar pilgrimage, trans-
border river talks, flight connectivity, and
facilitating travel.
Inception of the G20
 It was founded in 1999 after the Asian
financial crisis (1997-1998) as an informal
forum for Finance Ministers and Central
Bank Governors.
 Initially focused on macroeconomic issues,
but has expanded to include trade, climate
change, health, agriculture, energy, and anti-
corruption.
 Membership: Comprises 19 countries:
Argentina, Australia, Brazil, Canada, China,
France, Germany, India, Indonesia, Italy,
Japan, South Korea, Mexico, Russia, Saudi
Arabia, South Africa, Turkey, UK, and US.
 Also includes two regional bodies: the
European Union (EU) and African Union
(AU).
 Presidency: The G20 does not have a
permanent secretariat.
 The G20 Presidency rotates annually, and
each country within a regional group takes
a turn hosting the Presidency.
Do you know ?
 The G20 brings together the countries with
the largest economies in the world. The
member states meet annually to discuss
economic, political and social initiatives.
 Before the African Union (AU) joined, the
G20 accounted for approximately 85% of
global GDP, 75% of global trade, and two-
thirds of the world’s population.
Role of India in G20
 The G20 Leaders’ Summit in 2023,
showcased India’s capacity as G20
president to create a platform for global
discussions and reach a consensus through
the Leaders’ Declaration.
 India placed inclusivity at the forefront,
ensuring public concerns were heard
through 11 Engagement Groups
representing diverse segments like youth,
women, private sector, and civil society.
 India’s G20 presidency
advocated for Sustainable Development
Goal 1 (SDG 1) – “no poverty” – aligning with
global development goals.
 India represents the Global South in
G20, advocating for developing nations and
addressing their challenges.
Importance
 India’s economic strength and diverse
representation enable it to contribute to
policies benefiting emerging economies.
 The G20 forum helps India attract foreign
investments,spurring job creation,

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
85
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
technological advancement, and
infrastructure development.
 India’s G20 leadership reflects its
commitment to inclusivity and economic
strength, aiming for tangible outcomes like
increased investments, job opportunities,
income growth, and poverty reduction.
Challenges
 India faces challenges in navigating
relations between major powers like the US,
China, and Russia.
 India’s rapid industrialization and
development pose challenges in balancing
economic growth with climate goals.
 The divide between developed and
developing countries remains a challenge.
Conclusion and Way Forward
 India’s G20 participation elevates its global
profile and strengthens its leadership in
international affairs.
 Despite challenges, India’s G20 role offers
significant opportunities to drive global
change, promote growth, and represent
developing nations.
 India’s global ascent, under G20 leadership,
extends benefits to ordinary citizens,
farmers, factory workers, and the urban
middle class, ensuring equitable global
prosperity.
India-Japan Economy and Investment Forum
Syllabus: GS2/IR
Context
 India-Japan Economy and Investment
Forum was held recently.
About
 Concerns Over Trade Surplus: Union
Minister Piyush Goyal expressed concerns
over Japan’s growing trade surplus with
India.
 Stagnant Exports: India’s exports to Japan
have remained stagnant for the past 15
years.
 Many Japanese investments in India source
products from countries like Korea, Japan,
Taiwan, and China, using India mainly as a
market for their goods.
 Rising Japanese Exports: Japanese exports to
India have consistently increased,
worsening the trade imbalance.
 Focus on Addressing Imbalance: The Union
Minister highlighted the need to address
this growing disparity in trade between the
two countries.
 He urged Japanese companies to produce
goods and services in India that can be
exported to Japan, aiming to balance the
trade relationship.
Brief on India and Japan Relations
 Historical and Cultural Ties: Both countries
share spiritual and cultural traditions, such
as the influence of Hinduism on Japan’s
Seven Lucky Gods and historical
connections like the 752 AD consecration of
Lord Buddha’s statue by Indian monk
Bodhisena at Todaiji Temple in Japan.
 Establishment of Relations: After WWII,
India opted for a separate Peace Treaty with
Japan, signed in 1952, marking the start of
formal diplomatic relations.
 Strategic Synergy: Both nations align on key
regional initiatives, such as India’s Act-East
Policy, Indo-Pacific vision (SAGAR), and
Japan’s Free and Open Indo-Pacific Vision.
Trade and Investment:
 Japan is a key ally in India’s economic
growth, with FDI from Japan exceeding $43
billion from 2000 to 2024, making it India’s
fifth-largest source of foreign investment.
 In 2023-24, the country’s export to Japan
was $5.15 billion and imports were $17.7
billion. The trade gap was $12.55 billion.
Collaboration on Global Initiatives:
 Japan and India cooperate in initiatives like
the International Solar Alliance (ISA),
Coalition for Disaster Resilient
Infrastructure (CDRI), and Leadership
Group for Industry Transition (LeadIT).
 Both countries work together in
multilateral frameworks like the Japan-
Australia-India-U.S. Quad and the India-
Japan-Australia Supply Chain Resilience
Initiative (SCRI).
 Integral Defense Partnership: India-Japan
defense cooperation is a key pillar of

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
86
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
bilateral ties, focused on Indo-Pacific peace,
security, and stability.
Key Agreements:
 Joint Declaration on Security Cooperation
(2008).
 Memorandum of Defense Cooperation
(2014).
 Agreements on Defense Equipment &
Technology (2015) and Protection of
Classified Military Information (2015).
 Reciprocal Provision of Supplies and
Services Agreement (2020).
Exercises and Joint Activities:
 Maritime Exercise Malabar.
 First Bilateral Fighter Exercise, Veer
Guardian, in Japan (2023).
 First-ever Army-to-Army Exercise Dharma
Guardian held in Japan ( 2023).
 Exercise Shinnyu Maitri between IAF and
JASDF.
 JIMEX joint Naval Exercise between two
nations.
Connectivity Projects in India:
 The first High Speed Rail (HSR) corridor is
being implemented from Mumbai to
Ahmedabad with technical and financial
assistance from Japan.
 Presently, six Metro Rail projects
(Ahmedabad, Bangalore, Chennai, Delhi,
Kolkata, Mumbai) are being implemented
with technical and financial support from
Japan.
Space Collaboration:
 ISRO and JAXA collaborate in X-ray
astronomy, satellite navigation, lunar
exploration, and the Asia Pacific Regional
Space Agency Forum (APRSAF).
 In 2016, they signed a Memorandum of
Cooperation (MoC) for peaceful space
exploration and use.
Challenges
 Trade Imbalance: There is a significant trade
imbalance, with Japan exporting more to
India than India exports to Japan, creating a
need for better reciprocal trade.
 Geopolitical Tensions: Regional security
issues, such as China’s influence in the Indo-
Pacific, pose challenges for India-Japan
relations, requiring careful diplomatic
balancing.
 Cultural and Language Barriers: Despite
strong ties, differences in language, culture,
and business practices pose challenges to
deeper integration.
 Limited People-to-People Exchanges: The
scale of people-to-people interactions is still
limited, impacting deeper mutual
understanding.
 Infrastructure Constraints: Despite
improvements, some areas in India still lack
the infrastructure necessary to support
large-scale Japanese investments
effectively.
 Different Economic Priorities: India’s focus
on rapid economic growth may sometimes
contrast with Japan’s emphasis on
sustainable development and technology.
Way Ahead
 Enhance Trade and Investment: Focus on
reducing the trade imbalance by increasing
Indian exports to Japan and encouraging
Japanese investment in India’s
manufacturing and technology sectors.
 Boost People-to-People
Connections: Increase cultural exchanges,
tourism, and educational collaborations to
deepen mutual understanding.
 Technology and Innovation
Partnership: Leverage Japan’s expertise in
technology and India’s growing digital
sector to collaborate in AI, robotics,
renewable energy, and space exploration.
 Address Environmental Concerns: Increase
cooperation on environmental
sustainability, climate change, and disaster
resilience to support both countries’ green
energy goals.
3 Years of India and UAE-CEPA
Syllabus: GS2/IR/GS3/Economy
Context

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
87
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 The India-United Arab Emirates (UAE)
Comprehensive Economic Partnership
Agreement (CEPA) has completed three
years of its signing in 2025.
About Comprehensive Economic Partnership
Agreement (CEPA)
 It is India’s first deep and full-fledged Free
Trade Agreement (FTA) in the last decade.
 It represents a strategic economic
collaboration between two major trade
partners and is expected to significantly
enhance bilateral trade and investment
flows.
 Signed in February 2022, CEPA covers a
wide range of sectors, including:
 Trade in Goods & Services
 Pharmaceuticals
 Intellectual Property Rights (IPR)
 Investment & Digital Trade
Significance of India-UAE CEPA
 Boosting Bilateral Trade: Aims to increase
trade in goods to USD 100 billion and trade
in services to USD 15 billion over the next
five years.
 Strengthens economic ties with one of
India’s largest trade partners in the Gulf
region.
 Job Creation & Economic Growth: Expected
to generate over 1 million job opportunities
for the Indian workforce through trade
liberalization and improved market access.
 Preferential Market Access for Indian
Goods: Enhances market access for India’s
labour-intensive exports. Provides zero-
duty market access for 90% of India’s
exports to the UAE, improving India’s global
competitiveness.
 Strengthening UAE-India Trade Links in the
Gulf Region: Expands Indian exporters’
access to UAE’s neighbouring markets,
particularly the Gulf Cooperation Council
(GCC) states, Africa, and Europe.
Brief overview of the UAE and India relations
 Political : India and the United Arab
Emirates (UAE) established diplomatic
relations in 1972.
 Multilateral Cooperation: India and the UAE
are currently part of several plurilateral
platforms such as I2U2 (India-Israel-UAE-
USA) and UFI (UAE-France-India) Trilateral,
etc. UAE was also invited as a Guest Country
to the G-20 Summit.
 Economic & Commercial: India UAE trade,
valued at US$ 180 million per annum in the
1970s, is today US$ 85 billion making
UAE, India’s third largest trading partner for
the year 2022-23 after China and US.
 UAE is the second largest export destination
of India (after the US) with an amount of
nearly US$ 31.61 billion for the year 2022-
23.
 Defence cooperation: It is steered through a
Joint Defence Cooperation Committee
(JDCC) at the Ministry level, with the
signing of Agreement on Defence
Cooperation in 2003, which came into effect
in 2004.
 Nuclear Cooperation: India and the United
Arab Emirates (UAE) signed
a Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) for
civil nuclear cooperation in 2024.
 In 2015, both countries had agreed to
cooperate in “peaceful use of nuclear
energy”, the agreement is part of the UAE’s
policy of expanding investments into the
nuclear energy sector.
 Space Cooperation: Indian Space Research
Organisation (ISRO) and the UAE Space
Agency signed an MoU regarding
cooperation in the exploration and use of
outer space for peaceful purposes in 2016.
 Indian Community: Indian expatriate
community of approximately 3.5 million is
the largest ethnic community in UAE
constituting roughly about 35% of the
country’s population.
 NRI Remittances: The annual remittances
made by the Indian community is 18% of
the total remittances to India [2020-21
data].
Challenges
 Trade Imbalances: India has a trade deficit
with the UAE, primarily due to high oil
imports from the UAE, which makes the
economic relationship uneven despite
growing non-oil trade.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
88
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Geopolitical Tensions in the Region: Political
instability in the Middle East and the Gulf
region affect bilateral relations, especially
with India’s strategic interests in the region.
 Labor and Migration Issues: India is one of
the largest sources of migrant labor in the
UAE, and issues related to the welfare and
rights of Indian workers have been a point
of concern.
 Foreign Policy of UAE: India’s relations with
countries like Iran and Pakistan sometimes
complicate its relations with the UAE, which
maintains different strategic priorities in
the region.
Way Ahead
 Strengthen Economic and Trade
Ties: Continue to focus on diversifying trade
beyond oil, aiming for the USD 100 billion
target for non-oil trade by 2030.
 Joint Strategic and Security
Cooperation: Enhance collaboration in
counter-terrorism, regional security, and
defense, focusing on the shared goal of a
stable and peaceful Middle East.
 Address Labor and Migrant Issues: Work
towards improving the welfare and rights of
Indian migrant workers in the UAE through
better labor policies and protection
mechanisms.
India’s ‘Look East’ Policy Has Transformed Into ‘Act
East’
Syllabus: GS2/ IR
In News
 Recently, the Vice-President of India
highlighted the transformation of
India’s “Look East” policy into “Act East” by
Prime Minister Narendra Modi.
Historical Context and Evolution
 Look East Policy (Post-Cold War
Era): Introduced by Prime Minister P.V.
Narasimha Rao in 1992, the Look East
Policy sought to rectify India’s historical
neglect of Southeast Asia, despite deep
cultural and historical ties.
 Initially focused on Southeast Asia, the
policy later expanded to East Asia and
Oceania.
Primary Objectives:
 Enhance trade and economic development.
 Strengthen strategic and cultural
connections with ASEAN nations.
 Draw inspiration from the economic
success stories of East Asia.
Initial Outcomes:
 Reduction of trade barriers to facilitate
commerce.
 Increased inbound tourism from Southeast
Asia.
Act East Policy (Post-2014):
 The Act East Policy was a direct evolution of
the Look East Policy, emphasizing stronger
action and outcomes. In 2011, U.S. Secretary
of State Hillary Clinton urged India to play a
more active role in the Asia-Pacific,
prompting a shift in approach.
 In 2014, External Affairs Minister Sushma
Swaraj formally declared India was ready to
“Act East,” a commitment reinforced by
Prime Minister Modi.
Key Advancements:
 Greater emphasis on concrete action and
outcomes.
 Integration of Northeast India as a critical
hub for regional engagement.
 Recognition of the Indo-Pacific as a strategic
and economic priority.
At the 2014 East Asia Summit, PM Modi introduced
the 3Cs approach:
 Commerce – Expanding trade and economic
ties.
 Culture – Strengthening historical and
cultural linkages.
 Connectivity – Building infrastructure and
digital networks for seamless integration.
Objectives and Achievements of Act East Policy
 Strategic Expansion: Extended focus beyond
ASEAN to the broader Indo-Pacific region.
 Strengthened regional groupings
like BIMSTEC, Asia Cooperation Dialogue,
and the Indian Ocean Rim Association
(IORA).

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
89
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Enhanced defense diplomacy: Sale
of BrahMos missiles to the Philippines.
 Military logistics pact with Vietnam.
Economic and Trade Ties:
 Reduction in trade barriers.
 Greater economic integration with
Southeast Asia via Free Trade Agreements
(FTAs).
 Increased foreign investment flows from the
region into India.
 India has elevated relations to strategic
partnerships with Indonesia, Vietnam,
Malaysia, Japan, South Korea, Australia,
Singapore, and ASEAN.
 India has invited ASEAN countries to join
the International Solar Alliance,
emphasizing regional integration and
effective project implementation.
Cultural and Soft Power Diplomacy:
 Promotion of shared cultural heritage,
including Ramayana and Mahabharata
traditions and Buddhist linkages.
 Hosting of cultural events such as
the Ramayana Festival with Southeast Asian
participation.
 India aims to revive and
strengthen Buddhist and Hindu cultural
links to enhance people-to-people
connections and regional cooperation.
Connectivity:
 Improved infrastructure development in
Northeast India to serve as a gateway to
Southeast Asia.
 Major projects include:
 India-Myanmar-Thailand Trilateral Highway.
 Kaladan Multi-Modal Transit Transport
Project.
 Rhi-Tiddim Road Project and Border
Haats to strengthen connectivity.
Challenges and Areas of Improvement
 Strategic and Economic
Challenges:Environmental impact of
urbanization and industrialization in
Northeast India.
 China’s Belt and Road Initiative (BRI)
presents strong competition by offering
attractive financial incentives to Southeast
Asian nations.
 China’s BCIM-EC (Bangladesh, China,
India, Myanmar Economic Corridor) poses
competitive challenges in connectivity and
infrastructure.
 Myanmar’s political transition is becoming
increasingly challenging for India.
 Despite its strategic geographical proximity
to ASEAN nations, the Northeast is not yet
fully integrated into India’s Bharatmala and
Sagarmala projects.
 Soft Power and Cultural Challenges: China’s
claim over Buddhist heritage challenges
India’s narrative.
 Limited linguistic engagement: Few Indian
universities offer courses in Khmer, Bahasa
Indonesia, Thai, or Burmese.
 Connectivity Bottlenecks:Delays in
infrastructure projects like the Kaladan
Multi-Modal Transit Transport Project.
 Underdeveloped transport and trade
facilities in Northeast India.
Conclusion and Way Forward
 The road to greater Act East Policy will
require infrastructure development,
investment, and addressing security issues
to ensure mutual growth and progress.
 India’s North-East must play a central role
in strengthening ASEAN-India ties,
benefiting from the region’s proximity to
South East Asia.
 India’s connectivity efforts must address
infrastructure gaps and ensure seamless
integration for improved trade and
interaction.
 As Southeast Asia becomes increasingly
vulnerable to climate change and non-
traditional security threats, India’s role in
regional disaster management, climate
diplomacy, and maritime domain awareness
is set to grow.
 India should also work to expand its
network of strategic partnerships by
engaging more proactively with middle
powers in the Indo-Pacific.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
90
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
SOCIAL JUSTICE
World Day of Social Justice
Syllabus: GS2/Social Justice
Context
 World Day of Social Justice is observed
annually on February 20th by the United
Nations.
About
 Established by UNGA: It was established by
the United Nations General Assembly
(UNGA) during the 62nd session on
November 26, 2007.
 Focus: On addressing poverty, exclusion,
unemployment, and promoting solidarity,
equality, and opportunity.
 Role of ILO: The International Labour
Organization (ILO) promotes social justice
through the Declaration on Social Justice for
a Fair Globalization (2008) and the Decent
Work Agenda.
 Aligned with UN Initiatives: Aligned with the
UN’s mission, including the Social
Protection Floor launched in 2009, ensuring
basic social guarantees for all.
Evolution of Social Justice in India
 World Day of Social Justice (2009): India has
observed this day since 2009, symbolizing
its commitment to social justice.
 Independence Movement Influence: Social
justice in India has roots in the struggle for
independence, which laid the groundwork
for equality, dignity, and justice.
 Constitutional Foundation: The Indian
Constitution is the cornerstone of social
justice, ensuring equality, dignity, and
justice for all, especially marginalized
communities.
Key Constitutional Provisions:
Preamble: Ensures social, economic, and political
justice, guarantees equality, and promotes
fraternity for national unity.
Fundamental Rights (Part III):
 Article 23: Prohibits human trafficking and
forced labor.
 Article 24: Bans child labor in hazardous
occupations.
Directive Principles of State Policy (Part IV):
 Article 37: Highlights the importance of
DPSPs in governance.
 Article 38: Directs the State to reduce
inequalities.
 Article 39: Promotes equal livelihood, fair
wages, and protection from exploitation.
 Article 39A: Guarantees free legal aid.
 Article 46: Focuses on education and
economic upliftment for SCs, STs, and
weaker sections.
Ministry of Social Justice & Empowerment:
 In 1985-86, the Ministry of Welfare was
bifurcated into the Department of Women &
Child Development and the Department of
Welfare, incorporating divisions from the
Ministries of Home Affairs and Law.
 It was later renamed the Ministry of Social
Justice & Empowerment in May 1998.
 Key focus Areas: education, economic
support, rehabilitation, and empowerment.
 Targeted Community Welfare: Focuses on
uplifting SCs, OBCs, senior citizens, victims
of substance abuse, transgender persons,
DNTs, and EWS through policies and
initiatives promoting equity and inclusion.
 Union Budget 2025-26: Allocation of Rs
13,611 crores for MoSJE, reflecting a 6%
increase for welfare schemes aimed at
empowering marginalized communities.
Key Initiatives by the Government of India
 Pradhan Mantri Anusuchit Jaati Abhyuday
Yojana (PM-AJAY): It merges 3 schemes for
skill development, income generation, and
infrastructure in SC-dominated villages.
 Three Components: Adarsh Gram
development, Grants-in-Aid for socio-
economic projects and Hostel construction
in higher education institutions.
Scheme for Residential Education for Students in
High Schools (SRESHTA):
 Provides financial assistance for SC students
in classes 9-12 in high-quality residential
schools.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
91
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Supports CBSE/State Board-affiliated
private schools and NGOs/VOs running
residential/non-residential schools and
hostels.
 Aims to bridge service gaps and promote
socio-economic upliftment of SC
communities.
Purple Fests (Festival of Inclusion):
 Organized by DEPwD, Ministry of Social
Justice & Empowerment since 2023.
 In 2024, over 10,000 Divyangjan and their
escorts participated.
Nasha Mukt Bharat Abhiyan (NMBA, 2020):
 Aims to make India drug-free by targeting
272 high-risk districts.
 Follows a three-pronged approach: supply
reduction (NCB), demand reduction
(MoSJ&E), and treatment (Health Dept).
 Reached 13.57 crore people, including 4.42
crore youth and 2.71 crore women, with
participation from 3.85 lakh educational
institutions.
PM-DAKSH Yojana (2021):
 Aims to enhance skill levels of marginalized
communities (SCs, OBCs, EBCs, DNTs, Safai
Karamcharis) for economic empowerment.
 Provides free short-term and long-term
training with a ₹450.25 crore budget (2021-
26).
 Ensures at least 70% placement in
wage/self-employment, targeting
individuals aged 18-45.
SMILE Scheme:
 Focuses on the rehabilitation of transgender
individuals and people engaged in begging.
 Aims to create a “Begging-free India”
through surveys, awareness campaigns,
shelter homes, skills training, alternative
livelihoods, and SHG formation.
 Active in 81 cities, with plans to expand to
50 more cities.
NAMASTE Scheme (2023-24):
 A joint initiative by MoSJ&E and MoHUA to
ensure safety, dignity, and livelihood for
sanitation workers in urban India.
 Integrates the Self-Employment Scheme for
Rehabilitation of Manual Scavengers
(SRMS) and expands coverage to waste
pickers from FY 2024-25.
WELFARE SCHEMES
Jal Jeevan Mission (JJM) Extended Till 2028
Syllabus: GS2/ Welfare Schemes
In News
 Union Finance Minister Nirmala Sitharaman
announced an extension of the Jal Jeevan
Mission (JJM) till 2028, with an outlay of Rs
67,000 crore in the Union Budget 2025-26.
 However, the scheme saw a massive cut in
allocation at the revised estimate (RE) stage
during the current fiscal year 2024-25.
About
 The Jal Jeevan Mission (JJM), launched
in 2019, aimed to provide Functional
Household Tap Connections (FHTC),
ensuring 55 litres per capita per day of safe
drinking water to all rural
households by 2024.
 However, due to implementation challenges,
the deadline has now been extended
to 2028.
 The focus now shifts towards quality
infrastructure, sustainable operation, and
community-led management under the
principle of “Jan Bhagidari” (people’s
participation).
Key Features of JJM
Objectives & Implementation Strategy:
 Universal Piped Water Access:
Ensuring every rural household receives tap
water by 2028.
 Community Involvement: Village Water &
Sanitation Committees (VWSCs) or Pani
Samitis play a key role, with 50% mandatory
participation from women.
 State Participation: States/UTs sign
agreements to ensure sustainability and
service quality.
Administrative Framework:
 Nodal Ministry: Department of Drinking
Water and Sanitation, Ministry of Jal Shakti.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
92
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Background: JJM subsumed the National
Rural Drinking Water Programme (NRDWP).
Funding Pattern:
 90:10 for Himalayan and North-Eastern
States.
 100% Central Funding for Union Territories.
 50:50 for other States.
Current Progress & Budgetary Allocations
Achievements Since 2019:
 80% of rural households now have piped
water access, up from 15% in 2019.
 Over 12 crore families have gained access to
drinking water.
 States with 100% Coverage: Arunachal
Pradesh, Goa, Haryana, Himachal Pradesh,
Gujarat, Punjab, Telangana, and Mizoram.
 UTs with 100% Coverage: Andaman &
Nicobar Islands, Dadra & Nagar Haveli &
Daman & Diu, and Puducherry.
Challenges in Implementation
Infrastructure & Connectivity Issues:
 Initial “Low-Hanging Fruit” Approach:
Coverage was quickly expanded in regions
with existing infrastructure, but expanding
to remote villages has proven difficult.
 Reservoir-to-Village Pipelines: Many villages
require water transportation from distant
reservoirs, increasing costs and logistical
complexity.
Cost Overruns Due to External Factors:
 COVID-19 Impact: Disruptions in supply
chains and labor availability.
 Russia-Ukraine War: Equipment and
material costs surged, straining budgets.
Implementation Bottlenecks:
 Underutilization of Funds: Despite budget
allocations, ₹50,000 crore remained
unspent in 2024-25, highlighting execution
inefficiencies.
Road Ahead
 Strengthening Last-Mile
Connectivity: Prioritizing infrastructure
expansion in remote areas.
 Upgrading reservoir pumping systems and
ensuring adequate groundwater sources.
 Improving Budget
Utilization: Enhancing state-level execution
capacity to ensure timely use of allocated
funds.
 Flexible funding mechanisms to
accommodate price fluctuations.
 Ensuring Transparency &
Accountability: Implementing independent
verification mechanisms to validate actual
water supply in rural households.
 Leveraging technology (IoT-based
monitoring, GIS mapping) for real-time
tracking.
 State & Centre Coordination: Ensuring states
fulfill their funding responsibilities to avoid
delays.
 Stronger agreements between the Centre
and states for smooth implementation.
 Community Engagement & Women’s
Participation: Expanding “Jan Bhagidari”
(people’s participation) to ensure local
ownership of water management.
 Increasing women’s leadership roles in Pani
Samitis.
Guru-Shishya Parampara Scheme
Syllabus :GS2/Welfare Schemes
In News
Recently, progress of the Guru-Shishya Parampara
Scheme was highlighted.
About Guru-Shishya Parampara Scheme
 It is being implemented by The Ministry of
Culture implements the “Financial
Assistance for Promotion of Guru-Shishya
Parampara (Repertory Grant)”
 It provides financial assistance to cultural
organizations engaged in performing arts
(music, dance, theatre, folk art, etc.) for
training artists (shishyas) under the
guidance of a Guru.
 Eligibility: Cultural organizations across the
country are eligible to apply, provided they
follow the Guru-Shishya Parampara.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
93
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Target Group: The scheme supports
shishyas aged 3 years and above in dance,
music, theatre, and traditional art forms.
 Financial Assistance: The scheme offers
financial support of Rs. 15,000 per month
for each Guru/Director. A maximum of 18
Shishyas in theatre and 10 Shishyas in
music and dance can receive assistance
under each Guru.
 Objective: The goal is to ensure regular
training of shishyas by their respective
Gurus, following the traditional Guru-
Shishya Parampara.
Source :PIB
NAMASTE Scheme
Syllabus: GS2/ Welfare Scheme
In Context
 The distribution of PPE kits and Ayushman
health cards under the NAMASTE scheme is
a crucial step towards ensuring dignity,
safety, and social empowerment of Safai
Mitras.
About NAMASTE Scheme
 Objectives: Eradicate manual scavenging by
promoting mechanized sanitation.
 Enhance the safety and dignity of sewer &
septic tank workers.
 Formalize the workforce and provide skill
development opportunities.
 Implemented By: Ministry of Social Justice
and Empowerment (MoSJE) & Ministry of
Housing and Urban Affairs (MoHUA)
 Implementation Timeline: FY 2023-24 to
2025-26 (3 years).
 Target Group: Initially focused on sewer and
septic tank workers (SSWs).
 Wastepickers were added in 2024 to further
expand coverage.
Source: PIB
GS III
AGRICULTURE
e-NAM to be Upgraded to Address Logistical
Challenges
Syllabus: GS3/Agriculture; Role of Technology in
Agriculture
Context
 The Union Agriculture Minister has
announced plans to upgrade the National
Agricultural Market (e-NAM) to e-NAM
2.0 to resolve logistical hurdles in inter-
state and inter-mandi trade.
About e-NAM (2016)
 e-NAM is a pan-India electronic trading
platform that connects Agricultural Produce
Market Committee (APMC) mandis to create
a unified national market for agricultural
commodities.
 Implemented by the Small Farmers
Agribusiness Consortium (SFAC) under
the Ministry of Agriculture & Farmers’
Welfare (MoA&FW).
 Provides digital services to traders,
farmers, Farmer Producer Organizations
(FPOs), and Mandis.As of December 31,
2024, 1.79 crore farmers and 2.63 lakh
traders have registered on the platform.
Key Challenges in e-NAM
 Despite integrating 1,361 mandis across 23
states and 4 Union Territories, and
facilitating ₹2.79 lakh crore worth of trade,
several challenges remain:
 Logistical Issues: Inefficient transportation
causes high transit time and limits
distribution efficiency.Inadequate
 Warehousing & Storage: Lack of proper
storage facilities leads to post-harvest
losses.
 Limited Digital Literacy & Internet
Access: Many farmers struggle with online
platforms.
 Interstate Trade Barriers: Variations in state
APMC laws hinder smooth trade.Different
state tax and compliance norms create
complexity.
Key Features of e-NAM 2.0
 Integrated Logistics and Transportation
Support: Unified Logistics Interface Platform
(ULIP) integration for real-time tracking of
produce.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
94
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Optimized freight options to reduce transit
times and improve delivery efficiency.
 Expanded Warehousing and Cold Storage
Infrastructure: The Agricultural
Infrastructure Fund (AIF) will
offer subsidized loans to promote private
investment in storage facilities.
 AI-Driven Price Discovery & Quality
Assessment: AI and Machine Learning
(ML) to suggest fair market prices.
 Automated quality testing to minimize
disputes over product grading.
 Faster Digital Payments & Financial Support:
Direct bank transfers and e-wallets for quick
settlements.
 Fintech partnerships to provide micro-
loans based on transaction history.
 Simplified Interstate Trade: Introduction of
a unified digital pass to ease regulatory
compliance.
 Standardized tax & compliance
framework to facilitate free movement of
produce.
 Mobile Accessibility & Vernacular Support:
Voice-based commands and local language
options on the e-NAM app.
 Digital literacy campaigns to help farmers
navigate the platform.
Expected Impact of e-NAM Upgrades
 Increased Farmer Participation: Easier
access and better incentives will attract
more farmers.
 Higher Price Realization: Direct market
access will reduce middlemen, ensuring fair
prices.
 Reduced Wastage: Improved storage and
transport infrastructure will cut post-
harvest losses.
 Investment in Logistics Sectors: Investments
in supply chain solutions will drive
economic growth.
9 Years of Pradhan Mantri Fasal Bima Yojana
(PMFBY)
Syllabus: GS2/Government Policy & Interventions;
GS3/Agriculture
Context
 The Pradhan Mantri Fasal Bima Yojana
(PMFBY) recently celebrated its ninth
anniversary, marking nearly a decade of
empowering Indian farmers with
comprehensive crop insurance.
About PMFBY
 Launch: 2016 by the Ministry of Agriculture
& Farmers Welfare.
 Coverage: All farmers, including
sharecroppers and tenant farmers, growing
notified crops in designated areas.
Crops Covered:
 Food Crops (Cereals, Millets & Pulses)
 Oilseeds
 Annual Commercial & Horticultural Crops
Risks Covered
 Yield Losses (Standing Crops): Losses due to
non-preventable risks like drought, flood,
pests, and diseases.
 Prevented Sowing: Compensation when
farmers cannot sow due to adverse weather
conditions.
 Post-Harvest Losses: Coverage for crop
losses within 14 days of harvesting due to
natural calamities.
 Localized Calamities: Damage due to
hailstorms, landslides, cloudbursts, etc.
Implementation & Coverage Growth (2016–2024)
 Farmer Enrollment: Over 40 crore farmer
applications registered.
 Land Coverage: More than 30 crore hectares
of farmland insured.
Affordable Premium & High Claims Settled:
 Farmers paid over ₹29,000 crore as
premiums.
 Over ₹1.50 lakh crore in claims disbursed,
proving it to be a pro-farmer initiative.
 Customized Insurance Plans: State-specific
schemes and cluster-based models enhance
efficiency.
 Inclusive Growth: More than 70% of
beneficiaries are small and marginal
farmers.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
95
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Climate Risk Mitigation: Addresses
challenges like erratic monsoons, droughts,
floods, and unseasonal rains.
Technological Advancements
 AI & Geo tagging: Enhance accuracy in crop
loss assessment by enabling precise damage
verification and yield estimation.
 CCE-Agri App & YES-TECH: Mobile-based
tools to record Crop Cutting Experiments
(CCEs) and estimate yields.
 National Crop Insurance Portal
(NCIP): Centralized platform for real-time
monitoring and claims processing.
 Digital Claim Settlement: Faster payouts
through mobile apps and online platforms.
Major Challenges
 Delays in Claim Settlement: Bureaucratic
hurdles and disputes between insurance
companies and state governments slow
payouts.
 State Withdrawals & Implementation
Issues: States like Bihar, West Bengal,
Gujarat, and Andhra Pradesh withdrew due
to financial concerns over premium
subsidies.
 Low Awareness & Farmer
Participation: Many farmers, especially in
remote areas, remain unaware of the
scheme’s benefits.
 Data & Technology Gaps: Lack of real-time
weather data and delays in crop loss
assessment impact claim processing.
Recent Reforms & Future Prospects
PMFBY 2.0 – Restructured Guidelines (2020-21):
 Voluntary Enrollment: Since 2020,
participation has been made voluntary.
 State Flexibility: States can customize
insurance products to meet regional
agricultural needs.
Alignment with Climate Resilience Policies:
 Linked with National Adaptation Fund for
Climate Change (NAFCC) to promote
climate-resilient farming.
Restructured Weather-Based Crop Insurance
Scheme (RWBCIS):
 A weather index-based insurance scheme
introduced alongside PMFBY.
 Difference from PMFBY: RWBCIS calculates
claims based on weather parameters rather
than actual yield loss.
Way Forward
 Digitization: Expanding technology use for
faster claim settlements.
 State Re-Engagement: Encouraging states
that have withdrawn to rejoin.
 Private Sector Involvement: Incentivizing
private insurers to offer region-specific
solutions.
 Disaster Risk Reduction: Strengthening
proactive risk mitigation strategies.
Extension of PM-AASHA Scheme Until 2025-26
Syllabus: GS3/ Agriculture
Context
 The Union Government has approved the
continuation of the Pradhan Mantri
Annadata Aay Sanrakshan Abhiyan (PM-
AASHA) Scheme during the 15th Finance
Commission Cycle up to 2025-26.
PM-AASHA Scheme
 The scheme was launched in 2018 as an
umbrella scheme to ensure Minimum
Support Price (MSP) to farmers, particularly
for pulses, oilseeds, and copra.
 It aims to ensure remunerative prices for
farmers and price stability in the
agricultural sector.
Components of PM-AASHA
Price Support Scheme (PSS):
 The government procures pulses, oilseeds,
and copra at MSP.
 The Central Nodal Agencies (CNAs) conduct
procurement in collaboration with state
agencies.
 Only produce meeting Fair Average Quality
(FAQ) standards is procured.
Price Deficiency Payment Scheme (PDPS):
 It directs compensation payments to pre-
registered farmers for the difference
between MSP and the market price.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
96
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 There is no physical procurement of
produce.
 It applies to oilseeds and requires
transactions through a transparent auction
process in notified market yards.
Private Procurement & Stockist Scheme (PPSS)
(Pilot Basis):
 It allows states to involve private stockists
for oilseed procurement.
 It is implemented in selected Agricultural
Produce Market Committees (APMCs) or
districts.
Key Changes in the scheme
 In 2024 the Government converged
the Price Support Scheme (PSS) & Price
Stabilization Fund (PSF) schemes in PM
AASHA to serve the farmers and consumers
more efficiently.
 It will help in protecting consumers from
extreme volatility in prices of agri-
horticultural commodities by maintaining
strategic buffer stock of pulses and onion
for calibrated release; to discourage
hoarding, unscrupulous speculation; and for
supplies to consumers at affordable prices.
 The Market Intervention Scheme (MIS) was
made a component of the integrated scheme
of PM-AASHA.
 The scheme is for perishable agricultural
and horticultural commodities like onions,
potatoes, and tomatoes.
 It is implemented when prices fall by at
least 10% from the previous normal season.
Significance of the Scheme
 Ensures price support to farmers, reducing
distress sales.
 Enhances procurement efficiency through
market-based interventions.
 Increases farmer participation in
transparent marketing systems.
 Prevents extreme price
fluctuations, protecting both producers and
consumers.
Concerns
 Limited implementation: PDPS and PPSS
have seen low adoption by states.
 Procurement constraints: MSP coverage is
not uniform across all crops and regions.
 Awareness and accessibility issues: Many
farmers lack awareness or face bureaucratic
hurdles in registration.
 Budgetary concerns: Ensuring adequate
funding for procurement operations
remains a challenge.
Concluding remarks
 The extension of PM-AASHA till 2025-
26 reaffirms the government’s commitment
to farmers’ income security and agriculture
market reforms.
 Strengthening its implementation and
addressing challenges can enhance its
impact in ensuring remunerative prices for
farmers.

Decade of Soil Health Cards
Syllabus: GS3/ Agriculture
Context
 The Soil Health Card Scheme, introduced on
February 19, 2015, in Rajasthan, has
completed a decade in operation.
Soil Health Cards Scheme
 Objective: Soil health card provides
information to farmers on nutrient status of
their soil along with recommendations on
appropriate dosage of nutrients to be
applied for improving soil health and its
fertility.
 The scheme assists State Governments to
issue soil health cards to all farmers in the
country.
 The Soil Health Card contains status of the
soil with respect to 12 parameters that
determine soil health:
 Macro-nutrients: Nitrogen (N), Phosphorus
(P), Potassium (K), Sulfur (S).
 Micro-nutrients: Zinc (Zn), Iron (Fe),
Copper (Cu), Manganese (Mn), Boron (Bo).
 Other Indicators: pH level (Acidity or
Basicity of soil), Electrical Conductivity
(Indicates the presence of salts in soil),
Organic Carbon (OC).

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
97
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Soil Health Card scheme has been merged
in Rashtriya Krishi Vikas Yojana (RKVY)
scheme as one of its components under the
name ‘Soil Health & Fertility’ from the
year 2022-23.

CLIMATE CHANGE
Global Sea Ice Cover Has Dipped to Record Low
Syllabus: GS3/ Climate Change
Context
 According to the US National Snow and Ice
Data Center (NSIDC) the combined sea ice
extent in the Arctic and Antarctic has
reached a record low of 15.76 million sq km
in February 2025.
What is Sea ice?
 Sea ice refers to the free-floating ice in the
polar regions. While it generally expands
during the winter and melts in the
summers, some sea ice remains year-
round.
 Sea ice is different from icebergs, glaciers,
ice sheets, and ice shelves, which form on
land.
 Sea ice plays a crucial role in cooling the
planet by trapping existing heat in the
ocean, and thus precluding it from warming
the air above.

Reasons for the Decline in Global Sea Ice Cover
 Rising Global Temperatures: The Arctic and
Antarctic regions are warming at an
accelerated pace, with the Arctic
experiencing warming four times faster
than the global average.
 Ongoing ocean warming is setting the
backdrop for sea ice decline, as warmer
waters delay freezing and accelerate
melting.
 The ice-albedo feedback effect worsens the
situation—as ice melts, darker ocean water
absorbs more solar radiation, leading to
further warming and ice loss.
 Wind Patterns and Storms: In the Arctic,
storms have broken apart ice around
the Barents Sea (near Norway and Russia)
and the Bering Sea (between Alaska and
Russia).
 Antarctic sea ice is surrounded by the ocean
instead of continents, making it more
mobile and thinner.
Implications of Low Sea Ice Cover
 Climate Change: Less sea ice cover means
that more ocean water is exposed to the
Sun, leading to greater heat absorption and
a rise in temperatures.
 Disruption of Ocean Currents: The influx of
freshwater from melting ice is slowing
down the circulation of water in the world’s
oceans.
 Rising Sea Levels: While melting sea ice does
not directly raise sea levels, its loss exposes
glaciers and ice sheets to warmer waters,
speeding up their melting.
 Disruption of Marine Ecosystems: The loss
of sea ice affects marine food chains,
particularly species such as krill, seals, and

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
98
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
polar bears, which depend on ice for
survival.
Way Ahead
 Countries must adhere to Paris Agreement
targets and work towards limiting global
average temperature to 1.5°C.
 Satellite observations and scientific
expeditions must be expanded to better
understand polar ice changes.
 International agreements on protecting
marine ecosystems and polar biodiversity
should be enhanced.
 Strict regulations on industrial activities,
fishing, and resource exploitation in the
polar regions are needed.
Concluding remarks
 The record low global sea ice cover is a
stark reminder of the accelerating impacts
of climate change.
 Immediate global action is essential to
mitigate its cascading effects on climate,
ocean currents, ecosystems, and human
livelihoods.
 Without urgent intervention, the loss of sea
ice could push the Earth closer to
irreversible climate tipping points.
DEFENCE
Trial of Very Short-Range Air Defence System
(VSHORADS)
Syllabus: GS3/Defence
Context
The Defence Research and Development
Organisation (DRDO) successfully conducted three
successive flight-trials of the Very Short-Range Air
Defence (VSHORAD) system.
About
 It targets high-speed, low-altitude drone
threats.
 The test confirmed the VSHORADS precision
in neutralising aerial threats.
 The VSHORAD is a portable air defence
system designed and developed
indigenously by Research Center Imarat in
collaboration with other DRDO
laboratories.
 The missile system has the capability to
meet the needs of all the three branches of
the armed forces — the Army, Navy and the
Air Force.
 It offers close air defence protection for
mobile formations, especially in the growing
threat of drones and loitering munitions.

India-Russia Defence Cooperations
Syllabus: GS2/IR/GS3/Defence
In News
 Recently, Russia’s state-owned defense
export company (Rosoboronexport)
proposed a partnership with India on
the Russian fifth-generation fighter aircraft
(FGFA), the Su-57E.
India-Russia Defence cooperations
 Defence cooperation is a key aspect of
the India-Russia strategic partnership,
guided by the Agreement on the
Programme for Military Technical
Cooperation.
 The India-Russia defense cooperation also
includes the supply and development of
military equipment and technology, as well
as agreements like the military technical
cooperation and a Navy-to-Navy
cooperation agreement.
Cooperation Frameworks
 Agreement for 2021-2031 signed during the
India-Russia 2+2 Dialogue in 2021
 It aims to strengthen military cooperation
in R&D, production, and after-sales support
of armaments and military equipment.
 IRIGC-MTC : India and Russia have a
structured approach for military
cooperation, led by the India-Russia Inter-
Governmental Commission on Military
Technical Cooperation (IRIGC-
MTC), established in 2000.
 Annual Defence Minister Meetings: The
Defence Ministers meet annually to review
ongoing projects and discuss military
cooperation.
 Bilateral Projects: It includes the supply of
S-400, licensed production of T-90 tanks
and Su-30 MKI, supply of MiG-29 and

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
99
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Kamov helicopters, INS Vikramaditya
(formerly Admiral Gorshkov), production of
Ak-203 rifles in India and BrahMos
missiles.
 Joint Exercises – “INDRA”: Tri-Service joint
exercises, including the Indra exercise, have
been held.
 India also participated in the International
Army Games and Ex Vostok in Russia.
 Exercise Aviaindra, a Biennial Air Force
level exercise between Indian and the
Russian Federation.
 India and Russia had previously signed a
joint development deal in 2010 for the fifth-
generation fighter aircraft (FGFA)program,
but India withdrew in 2018 due to issues
with technology transfer.
Latest Developments
 Su-57E in India: Russia’s state-owned
defense export company offered to localize
production of the Su-57E in India,
potentially starting as early as 2025, at the
Hindustan Aeronautics Limited (HAL) plant.
 It would provide advanced fifth-generation
technologies, including engines, Active
Electronically Scanned Array (AESA)
radars, optics, AI elements, software
communication, and air weapons.
 These technologies could benefit India’s
Advanced Medium Combat Aircraft (AMCA)
program.
 Additionally, Russia proposed long-term
cooperation with India in upgrading aircraft
capabilities, building on 60 years of
successful collaboration in aircraft
production.
 Russia is considering a logistics support
agreement similar to India’s Logistics
Exchange Memorandum of Agreement
(LEMOA) with the US.
 This would allow mutual use of military
bases for refuelling, repairs, and resupply.
 Russia recently authorized the signing of
the Reciprocal Exchange of Logistics
Agreement (RELOS), which will facilitate
military exchanges, exercises, training, port
calls, and humanitarian assistance
operations.
Importance
 India views Russia as a long-time ally,
particularly from the Cold War era, with
significant cooperation in defence, oil,
nuclear energy, and space exploration.
 India-Russia defence relations are
robust which highlight the compatibility of
their military hardware, which India largely
procures from Russia.
 The potential logistics agreement holds
strategic significance for India, especially in
the Arctic region, as it would enhance
India’s presence in this geopolitically
critical area with access to Russian military
facilities.
Issues and Concerns
 Reliance on import : India is trying to
develop into a defence manufacturing hub.
 But it lacks a strong industrial base for
military equipment.
 Russia -Ukraine War has raised concerns
about Russia’s ability to meet timelines for
spares and hardware.
 Western sanctions on Russia have raised
concerns about delays in military deliveries
 China Factor : The partnership has become
complicated due to Russia’s growing ties
with China, especially in light of the ongoing
war in Ukraine, which is seen as a challenge
for India.
Conclusion
 India-Russia military technical cooperation
has evolved over time from a buyer-seller
framework to one involving joint research
and development, co-development and joint
production of advanced defence technology
and systems.
 Therefore to maintain their partnership
,India and Russia must address emerging
issues.
 This collaboration will continue to play a
key role in shaping regional and global
security.
Army to Strengthen its Air Defence Amid Drones and
Security Threats
Syllabus: GS3/Defence

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
100
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Context
 The Indian Army is moving to strengthen
its air defence as evolving aerial threats,
including drones and low-flying aircraft,
challenge traditional defence systems.
About
 A contract for the indigenously developed
Quick Reaction Surface to Air Missile
(QRSAM) system is expected to be
concluded within 4-5 months.
 QRSAM, developed by DRDO, has a range of
30 km and is a priority for the Army.
 The Akash SAM has three regiments in
service, and two regiments of the Akash-
NG have been contracted, with enhanced
prototypes expected for trials in 45 days.
 The rise in drone usage, especially in the
Ukraine war, is challenging air defence
quantification and quality of threats.
Drones
 Drones, also known as unmanned aerial
vehicles (UAVs), are aircraft that are
operated without a human pilot onboard.
 They come in various sizes and are used for
a wide range of applications, from military
to civilian purposes.
Military Applications:
 Surveillance and Reconnaissance: Drones
are widely used for gathering intelligence,
surveillance, and reconnaissance (ISR)
without putting human pilots at risk.
 Targeted Strikes: Larger military drones,
such as the MQ-9 Reaper, can carry missiles
or bombs and conduct airstrikes on enemy
targets.
 Real-time Intelligence: Advanced sensors
provide live battlefield data.
 Psychological Warfare: Persistent UAV
presence creates fear and deterrence.
 Logistics and Resupply: Drones can deliver
supplies to troops in remote or difficult-to-
access locations.
 Law Enforcement: Assist in crowd
monitoring, surveillance, and rescue ops.
 Precision Strikes: Laser-guided missiles
ensure surgical hits, minimizing collateral
damage.
Need to Strengthen Aerial Defence
 Used by adversaries: India has faced
instances where drones were used to drop
weapons or conduct surveillance along its
borders.
 Drones have been used to infiltrate Indian
airspace, especially near critical
installations, military bases, and borders,
raising concerns about their potential to
carry out strikes.
 Enhanced warfare tactics: Drones ability to
carry loitering munitions, conduct
surveillance, and disrupt enemy operations
presents new challenges for air defence
systems.
 Surveillance concerns: Drones are also
increasingly being used for civilian
purposes, such as delivery services or
surveillance. However, their misuse for
espionage, smuggling, or disrupting public
events has raised security concerns.
India’s Efforts
 Air defence upgrades: India’s air defence
systems are being modernized to address
drone threats, with the introduction of
smart ammunition, counter-drone systems,
and new anti-aircraft guns.
 Efforts are underway to induct advanced
systems like the Quick Reaction Surface to
Air Missile (QRSAM) and smart
ammunition.
 Technological advancements: India is
developing counter-drone systems to
detect, track, and neutralize threats from
drones.
Do you know ?
 Countries like China, Russia, and
the U.S. have already inducted
fifth-generation jets, with China
developing advanced sixth-gen
jets.
 Pakistan is looking to acquire J-
35 fifth-generation jets from
China.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
101
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Regulation: Civil Aviation Requirements
(CAR) for drones, to control their use in the
civilian sector.
 The new Drone (Amendment) Rules 2023
for drone pilots, effective from the 27th of
September 2023.
 The move aims to further liberalise,
promote and facilitate drone operations
across the country and make India a global
drone hub by 2030.
 Indigenous technology: India’s Defence
Research and Development Organisation
(DRDO) and other agencies are working on
developing homegrown technologies to
address the emerging drone threat.
 This includes advanced radar systems, anti-
drone weapons, and missile systems
designed to counter UAVs.
Conclusion
 Drones are versatile and powerful tools
used across various sectors.
 Their growing role in both military and
civilian fields has revolutionized industries,
but it also presents new challenges,
especially in terms of regulation and
security.
India’s dilemma Over Fighter Jets
Syllabus :GS 3/Defence
In News
 Both the F-35 and SU-57 gained attention at
Aero India 2025 in Bengaluru, with the SU-
57 being the showstopper for its
maneuvers.
India’s evolving fighter jet landscape
 The Indian Air Force (IAF) has a sanctioned
strength of 42.5 fighter squadrons but
currently operates 31 squadrons, many
with aging aircraft.
 India is facing a two-front challenge with
China and Pakistan.
 To address this, India is exploring advanced
jets like the U.S. F-35 and Russian Su-57.
Partnerships
 U.S. President Donald Trump mentioned the
U.S. might provide F-35 stealth fighters to
India in the future.
 The F-35 is a single-seat, single-engine
strike fighter with three variant
 The F-35 costs around $100 million per
aircraft, with development and
maintenance costs exceeding $2 trillion
through 2088.
 India and Russia initially planned to co-
develop the FGFA (SU-57), but due to high
costs and limited technology transfer, India
pulled out.
 Swedish company Saab has shown interest
in participating in the Multi-Role Fighter
Aircraft (MRFA) programme, where the IAF
aims to procure 114 jets to strengthen its
depleting fleet.
New Approach
 India’s fleet, historically reliant on Russian
military hardware, began diversifying in the
early 2000s.
 India now plans to focus on its indigenous
Advanced Medium Combat Aircraft (AMCA).
 By 2040, the IAF plans to have 220 LCA-
Mk1s, 120 LCA-Mk2s, and the initial batch
of AMCA fighters.
 India aims to acquire 500+ fighter jets,
mainly focusing on LCA variants and the
AMCA.
 The AMCA prototype is expected by 2026-
2027, with induction by 2034.
 LCA-Mk1A deliveries were delayed, and
LCA-Mk2 is expected to fly by 2026.
Need
 India’s fighter jet landscape is undergoing
significant transformation as the country
seeks to modernize its air force and
enhance its defense capabilities.
 This evolution is driven by the need to
address current challenges and prepare for
future threats.
Concerns
 India still relies on U.S. and French-made
engines for its fighters and helicopters,
leading to dependency on foreign suppliers
for critical systems.
 despite its benefits, has created dependency
issues.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
102
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Adding advanced fighters like the F-35 will
come with challenges related to operational
flexibility, maintenance, and impact on
indigenous manufacturing efforts.
 Balancing relationships with defense
suppliers like the U.S. and Russia while
maintaining strategic autonomy is complex.
Conclusion and Way Forward
 India’s evolving fighter jet landscape
reflects its commitment to strengthening
national security and achieving self-reliance
in defense.
 By addressing current challenges and
strategically planning for the future, India
can build a formidable air force capable of
meeting emerging threats.
ENVIRONMENT
Retreating Himalayan Glaciers
Syllabus: GS3/Environment; Climate Change
Context
 A recent study has revealed that the eastern
Himalayas of Arunachal Pradesh have lost
110 glaciers over a span of 32 years (1988-
2020) and highlights the rapid retreat of
glaciers, which has significant implications
for the region’s hydrology and climate.
Key Findings of Study
 Glacial Lakes: The study found that the
glaciers, covering an area of 309.85 square
kilometers, retreated at a rate of 16.94
square kilometers per year.
 It exposed bedrock and created glacial
lakes, increasing the risk of Glacial Lake
Outburst Floods (GLOFs).
 The number of glaciers in the region
decreased from 756 to 646 during the study
period.
Causes of Glacial Retreat:
Rise in Temperature:
 The eastern Himalayas have been warming
at a rate surpassing the global average, with
temperature increases between 0.1°C and
0.8°C per decade.
 It is expected to continue, with potential
temperature rises of 5-6°C and precipitation
increases of 20-30% by the end of the
century.
 Over the past century, the region has seen
an increase in temperature by
approximately 1.6°C, with the eastern
Himalayas warming at a rate surpassing the
global average.
Implications:
 For the region’s freshwater supply, which
supports over 1.3 billion people living
downstream.
 The Himalayan glaciers, often referred to as
the ‘Third Pole’ due to their vast ice
reserves, play a crucial role in maintaining
the region’s hydrological balance and the
global sea level.
 The retreat of glaciers also affects the
region’s biodiversity and agricultural
practices.
 Additionally, the reduced glacial mass can
lead to changes in river flow patterns,
affecting hydropower generation and
irrigation systems.
Himalayan Glaciers in the India
 These are broadly divided into three river
basins, namely Indus, Ganga and
Brahmaputra.
 The higher altitudes (temperate
climates) receive heavy snowfall during
winters.
Indus River
 It originates in the Tibetan plateau near
Lake Mansarovar and Mount Kailash and
flows westward, south of Karakoram
Range and north of the Great Himalayas to
Mt. Naga Parbat where it turns sharply to
the south flowing through Pakistan into the
Arabian Sea near Karachi after travelling for
2,880 kilometres.
Ganga River
 It originates from the Gangotri
Glacier where it is known
as Bhagirathi which is joined by Alaknanda
at Devprayag and combined together it is
called Ganga.
Brahmaputra River (Yalu Zangbu or Tsang Po)

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
103
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 It rises in the glacier of the Kailash range,
just south of Lake Konggyu Tsho in Tibet.
 It ranks amongst the longest rivers of the
world. It traverses its first 1,625 kilometres
in Tibet, 918 kilometres in India and the
remaining 337 kilometres in Bangladesh
before it drains into the Bay of Bengal.
Importance of Snow Fields & Glaciers of the
Himalaya

Earth’s Radiation Balance: Albedo from snow.
 Attracting SW Monsoon: The difference in
temperature between the Himalayan snow-
fields and glaciers and the Indian Ocean
pulls the South-West monsoon towards the
Indian landmass during summer.

Key Indicator of Climate Change:
 Snow-fields and glaciers govern the climate
system of the Indian land mass at regional
and global scales.
 Sensitivity of snow-fields and glaciers to
variations in temperature makes them a key
indicator of climate change.
Mitigation and Adaptation Strategies
 Addressing glacier retreat requires a multi-
faceted approach, including reducing
greenhouse gas emissions, enhancing
climate resilience, and implementing
sustainable water management practices.
 International cooperation and local
community involvement are essential to
mitigate the impacts and adapt to the
changing environment.
Climate Crisis has Intensified Marine Heatwaves
Across the World
Syllabus :GS3/Environment
In News
In January 2025, marine heatwaves (MHWs) in
Western Australia led to the death of over 30,000
fish.
What are Marine Heatwaves?
 They are periods of extremely high
temperatures in the ocean.
 They occur when sea surface temperatures
rise 3-4°C above average for at least five
days.
 They can last from weeks to years.
 Climate change is the primary cause, with
90% of excess heat absorbed by oceans.
 They have become more frequent, intense,
and longer-lasting in recent decades.
Global Presence
 They are observed in several oceanic
regions: North Pacific, North Atlantic,
Mediterranean, Caribbean Sea, and parts of
the Indian Ocean.
 They can cause extreme weather events,
like tropical storms and hurricanes, and
disrupt the water cycle, increasing floods,
droughts, and wildfires.
Recent Trends in the Indian Ocean
 MHWs, once rare in the tropical Indian
Ocean, have become annual events.
 Western Indian Ocean and Bay of Bengal
experienced a significant rise in MHWs,
with 1.5 events per decade in the western
Indian Ocean and 0.5 events per decade in
the Bay of Bengal between 1982-2018.
Impacts
Monsoons: MHWs in the western Indian Ocean and
Bay of Bengal influence monsoon patterns, causing
drying in central India and increased rainfall in
southern India.
 These changes are linked to altered
atmospheric circulation driven by the
heatwaves.
Socio-economic: MHWs negatively affect coastal
communities, aquaculture, fisheries, and tourism.
 They can reduce productivity of important
species like lobster, snow crab, and scallops.
 Disruption of ecosystems can harm the
fishing industry and related livelihoods.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
104
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in

Biodiversity and Ecosystem Destruction: MHWs can
cause mass mortality of marine species, forcing
them to relocate or change behavior.
 Ecosystems, such as kelp forests and coral
reefs, are especially sensitive to MHWs.
 MHWs contribute to coral bleaching,
reducing coral reproductive ability and
making them more vulnerable to disease.
 Other threats, like ocean acidification and
overfishing, compound the damage caused
by MHWs.
Strategies to Combat MHWs
 Slow down ocean warming by reducing
fossil fuel emissions (aligning with Paris
Agreement goals).
 Invest in nature-based solutions and apply
the IUCN Global Standard for Nature-based
Solutions.
 Build research capacity to monitor MHWs,
understand their impacts, and predict
future events.
 Develop global research networks (e.g.,
Marine Heatwave International Group).
Way Ahead
 Governments should implement protective
measures, such as marine protected areas,
to safeguard vulnerable species.
 Enforce fishing regulations and catch
management to limit economic losses.
 Raise awareness among stakeholders,
including policymakers, researchers, and
the private sector.
India Achieves Historic Milestone of 100 GW Solar
Power Capacity
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
In News
 India has reached a significant milestone in
its renewable energy journey by surpassing
100 gigawatts (GW) of installed solar power
capacity.
Growth and Achievements
 India’s solar power capacity increased 35
times over the past decade, rising from 2.82
GW in 2014 to 100 GW in 2025.
 As of January 31, 2025, India’s total installed
solar capacity stands at 100.33 GW, with
84.10 GW under implementation and 47.49
GW under tendering.
 The rooftop solar sector saw remarkable
growth, with 4.59 GW of new capacity
installed in 2024, reflecting a 53% increase
compared to 2023.
 Rajasthan, Gujarat, Tamil Nadu,
Maharashtra, and Madhya Pradesh are
among the top-performing states
contributing significantly to utility-scale
solar installations.
 India’s solar manufacturing capacity surged
from 2 GW in 2014 to 60 GW in 2024,
positioning the country as a global leader in
solar module production, with an ambitious
target of 100 GW by 2030.
Significance of Solar Energy for India
 Energy Security: Solar energy helps reduce
dependence on fossil fuels and imports,
making India more self-reliant in power
generation.
 Environmental Benefits: Solar power is a
clean and sustainable energy source,
reducing greenhouse gas emissions and
combating climate change.
 Economic Growth: The solar industry has
created millions of jobs in installation,
maintenance, and manufacturing, boosting
employment opportunities.
 Cost-Effectiveness: The falling costs of solar
photovoltaic (PV) panels have made solar
power an affordable alternative to
conventional energy sources.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
105
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Rural Electrification: Solar power provides
an effective solution for electrifying remote
and off-grid areas, improving the quality of
life for millions of Indians.
Key Government Initiatives to Promote Solar Energy
 National Solar Mission (NSM): Launched in
2010, this mission aims to achieve 280 GW
of installed solar capacity by 2030.
 PM SuryaGhar Muft Bijli Yojana: A
transformative scheme making rooftop
solar a household reality, empowering
homes with clean energy.
 PM-KUSUM Scheme: Designed to support
farmers by promoting solar irrigation
pumps and grid-connected renewable
energy solutions.
 Solar Parks Scheme: Facilitates the
development of large-scale solar parks to
boost capacity expansion.
 Production-Linked Incentive (PLI)
Scheme: Encourages domestic
manufacturing of solar photovoltaic
modules, reducing reliance on imports.
 Net Metering Policy: Allows residential and
commercial consumers to generate their
own solar power and sell surplus electricity
to the grid.
 International Solar Alliance (ISA): A global
initiative led by India to promote solar
energy cooperation among solar-rich
countries.
Challenges and the Way Ahead
 Land Acquisition: Availability of land for
large-scale solar projects remains a
constraint.
 Grid Integration: Ensuring stability and
efficiency while integrating intermittent
solar energy into the power grid.
 Financial Constraints: Investment in
infrastructure and technological
advancements is needed to sustain long-
term growth.
 Storage Solutions: Development of cost-
effective energy storage solutions is crucial
for ensuring a stable power supply.

Heatwaves
Syllabus: GS3/Environment and Conservation
Context
 India is experiencing more frequent,
prolonged and severe heatwaves.
 These extreme temperatures pose
significant risk to public health,
infrastructure, and livelihoods, especially in
vulnerable regions.
About
 The World Bank estimates that India could
account for 34 million job losses due to heat-
stress-related productivity declines by 2030.
 54% of India’s land is experiencing high-to-
extreme-high water stress, according to the
World Resources Institute (WRI).
Heatwaves and Its Impacts:
 A heatwave is defined as a prolonged
period of unusually and excessively hot
weather, accompanied by high humidity.
 The India Meteorological Department
(IMD) has specified the following criteria:
 a heatwave need not be considered till
the maximum temperature of a station
reaches at least 40°C for plains and at least
30°C for hilly regions.
Impacts:
 Health Risks: Increased heat can cause
heatstroke, dehydration, and exacerbate
pre-existing conditions like heart disease.
 Agriculture: High temperatures can lead to
crop failures, reduce yields, and damage
livestock, threatening food security.
 Water scarcity: Heatwaves can worsen
droughts, leading to water shortages and
affecting drinking water supplies.
 Wildfires: Prolonged heat can increase the
likelihood of wildfires, damaging
ecosystems and property.
 Energy demand: High temperatures often
lead to higher energy consumption for
cooling, which can strain power grids.
Source: IE
Urban Environmental Protests: Chipko Legacy in
Cities

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
106
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Syllabus: GS3/Environment; Conservation
Context
 Recently, Pune in Maharashtra witnessed a
resurgence of debate between development
and environmental conservation after ‘Chalo
Chipko’ protest against the Pune Riverfront
Development Project, echoing the spirit of
the Chipko Movement of 1970s.
About the Chipko Movement
 It began in 1973 in the Chamoli district of
Uttarakhand (then part of Uttar Pradesh).
 It was led by villagers, particularly women,
who physically embraced trees to prevent
their felling by government-backed logging
operation.
 Prominent figures like Sunderlal Bahuguna
and Gaura Devi played a vital role in
mobilizing people and highlighting the link
between environmental conservation and
sustainable development.
Key Features
 Grassroots Activism: The movement was led
by local communities, especially rural
women, who understood the ecological
value of forests for their survival.
 Non-Violent Resistance: Inspired by
Gandhian principles, the protesters used
peaceful means such as tree-hugging and
sit-ins to prevent deforestation.
 Environmental Awareness: The movement
raised awareness about the importance of
forests in preventing soil erosion, sustaining
agriculture, and maintaining biodiversity.
 Policy Impact: The protests eventually led to
a government-imposed ban on commercial
deforestation in the Himalayan
 region in 1980.
Urban Environmental Protests: Chipko Legacy in
Cities
 Cities face unique environmental issues such
as air pollution, water scarcity, loss of green
spaces, and climate change-induced
disasters.
 In response, urban activists and citizens
have taken a stand to protect the
environment through protests, legal action,
and advocacy.

Contemporary Urban Environmental Protests
Inspired by Chipko:
Save Aarey Forest Movement (Mumbai,
Maharashtra):
 It emerged to protest against the felling of
over 2,700 trees in the Aarey Colony for a
metro car shed project.
 Activists and residents used Chipko-style
protests, hugging trees and forming human
chains to prevent deforestation.
Save Aravalli Campaign (Gurugram):
 Residents and environmentalists have been
protesting illegal mining and real estate
encroachments in the Aravalli hills,
emphasizing the range’s role in air
purification and as a barrier against
desertification.
Citizen-Led Protests Against Air Pollution (Delhi &
NCR):
 Delhi frequently ranks among the world’s
most polluted cities.
 Campaigns like Right to Clean Air and My
Right to Breathe have demanded policy
changes similar to how Chipko activists
fought for forest protection.
Save Lakes Movements (Bengaluru & Hyderabad):
Common Threads Between Chipko & Modern Urban
Protests
Aspect
Chipko
Movement
Urban
Environmental
Protests
Issue
Addressed
Deforestation &
loss of
biodiversity
Air pollution,
deforestation, land
use change
Mode of
Protest
Tree-hugging,
sit-ins, marches
Legal petitions,
protests, social
media campaigns
Key
Participants
Rural women,
villagers
Urban residents,
activists, students
Government
Response
Policy bans on
deforestation
Mixed—some
policy wins,
ongoing legal
battles

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
107
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Campaigns such as SaveBellandur Lake and
Save Ulsoor Lake aim to protect the city’s
rapidly disappearing water bodies from
pollution and encroachment.
 Citizen groups have staged protests, filed
public interest litigations (PILs), and
organized clean-up drives, echoing the
Chipko spirit of local community action.
Raahgiri Movement (Gurugram & Other Cities):
 It advocates for pedestrian-friendly and
vehicle-free streets to reduce urban
pollution and promote sustainable urban
mobility.
 Similar to Chipko, it is a community-led
initiative focusing on reclaiming public
spaces for people rather than vehicles.
Challenges & Future of Environmental Protests
 Government & Corporate Resistance: Large-
scale infrastructure projects often prioritize
economic gains over environmental
concerns.
 Public Apathy: Unlike the direct impact of
deforestation on rural communities, urban
environmental issues can feel distant to
many city dwellers.
 Legal Battles: Environmental protests
frequently lead to long and complex legal
battles, delaying solutions.
 However, with increasing climate
awareness and the rise of youth-led
movements like Fridays for Future India,
environmental activism is gaining
momentum.
Conclusion
 The legacy of the Chipko Movement extends
beyond its immediate achievements. It has
become a symbol of grassroots activism and
ecological consciousness, inspiring
environmental movements worldwide.
 The movement’s emphasis on nonviolent
resistance and community involvement
continues to resonate with contemporary
environmental activists.
Parambikulam Tiger Reserve
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
Context
 A faunal survey by the Forest Department at
the Parambikulam Tiger Reserve in
Palakkad has added 15 new species to the
protected area’s checklist.
About
 Location: Parambikulam Tiger Reserve is
nestled in the AnamalaiNelliyampathy
landscape of the Western Ghats Mountains
in Palakkad and Thrissur districts of Kerala.
 Tribes: The Tiger Reserve is the home of
four different tribes of indigenous peoples
including the Kadar, Malasar tribe, Muduvar
and Mala Malasar settled in six colonies.
Flora:
 The reserve supports diverse habitat types
viz., evergreen, semi-evergreen, moist
deciduous, dry deciduous and shola forests.
 Other unique habitats like montane and
marshy grasslands, locally known as ‘vayals’,
are also found.
 The sanctuary has a variety of trees
mainly teak, neem,
sandalwood and rosewood. The oldest ever
teak tree, Kannimara Teak exists here.
Fauna:
 It has a rich biodiversity of animal life
including mammals, birds, fishes etc.
Parambikulam is referred to as the “state
capital for the massive gaur“.
 Tomopterna parambikulamana
(Parambikulam Frog) and one species
of sucker fish, Garro surendranathanii, are
endemic to the reserve.
Key Findings of the Faunal Survey
 Avian Diversity: The survey recorded 206
bird species, adding 7 new species, i.e.
the Painted spurfowl, Rufus-bellied hawk-
eagle, Indian grey hornbill, Anamalai
Sholakili, Taiga flycatcher, Plain prinia and
Green leaf warbler.
 Butterfly Diversity: Five new butterfly
species were added, including the Long-
brand bushbrown, Shot silverline, Scarce
shot silverline, White-disc hedge blue and
Palni dart, increasing the total butterfly
count to 273.
 Odonate Diversity: Three new species of
odonates (dragonflies and damselflies)

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
108
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
were identified: Brown darner, Parakeet
darner, and Vestalis submontana.
Source: TH
Puducherry-Villupuram-Auroville-Cuddalore
(PVAC) Bioregion
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
Context
 A database on the biodiversity of the
Puducherry-Villupuram-Auroville-
Cuddalore (PVAC) region is being
developed, with significant contributions
from citizens.
What is a Bioregion?
 A bioregion is a geographical area defined
by ecological systems rather than political
boundaries.
 It represents a distinct environmental zone
with unique biodiversity and natural
resources.
About PVAC Bioregion
 The PVAC bioregion spans 2,500 sq
km across Tamil Nadu and
Puducherry, covering key ecological zones
such as wetlands, lagoons, and coastal
habitats.
 It is part of the Know Your Bioregion
initiative launched by Svarnim Puducherry,
a unit of the Sri Aurobindo Society, to
enhance ecological awareness and
conservation efforts.
 Major water bodies in the region
include Thengaithittu Lagoon and Nallavadu
Lagoon, which support rich biodiversity.
Ecological Significance
 The region harbors vulnerable species such
as the smooth-coated otter, intertidal
species like mudskippers, fish such
as mangrove red snapper, and other aquatic
life like mud crabs, Indian glassy fish, and
grey mullets—all indicators of a healthy
ecosystem.
 The Nallavadu Lagoon is a vital habitat for
migratory birds, including redshank,
common greenshank, gulls, and terns.
India’s 1st Vertical Bifacial Solar Plant
Syllabus: GS3/Environment and Conservation
Context
 Union Minister for Housing and Urban
Affairs inaugurated India’s first vertical bi-
facial solar plant installation at Okhla Vihar
Metro station.
About
 The inauguration was done in the 5th
International Conference on Green Metro
Systems – The Future of Urban Mobility
here.
 It was organised by the Delhi Metro Rail
Corporation (DMRC), under the banner of i-
Metro in association with the Confederation
of Indian Industry (CII) and Indian Green
Building Council (IGBC).
 The bi-facial panels can capture sunlight
from both sides.
 It will take advantage of the metro’s
elevated structure for solar energy
generation without occupying any
additional land.
 Significance: Transitioning from thermal to
renewable energy, utilising solar rooftops,
and implementing regenerative braking in
metros exemplify the shift toward a greener
future.
 The innovation can help metro rail
operations be more sustainable and
contribute to renewable energy goals.
Source: IE
Peatlands: A Vital Yet Underprotected Carbon
Reservoir
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
Context
 A recent study has cautioned that peatlands
are severely underprotected, and their
ongoing destruction could jeopardise
climate change goals.
What are Peatlands?
 Peatlands are unique wetland ecosystems
composed of partially decayed organic
matter accumulated over thousands of
years.
 In cool climates, peatland vegetation is
mostly made up of Sphagnum mosses,
sedges and shrubs and are the primary

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
109
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
builder of peat, whereas in warmer climates
graminoids and woody vegetation provide
most of the organic matter.

Distribution of Peatlands
 Peatlands occur in every climatic zone and
continent and cover 4.23 million km2,
which corresponds to 2.84% of the Earth’s
terrestrial surface.
 Countries with the most peatlands
include Canada, Russia, Indonesia, the
United States, Brazil, the Democratic
Republic of the Congo, China, Peru, Finland
and the Republic of the Congo.
 The first five contain 70 percent of global
peatlands.
 Peatlands on the Earth’s surface, hold 600
billion tonnes of carbon — surpassing the
carbon stored in all the world’s forest
biomass combined.
 However, merely 17 percent of peatlands
are safeguarded worldwide.
 Specifically, only 11 percent of boreal
peatlands are protected, compared to 27
percent of temperate and tropical peatlands.
Threats to Peatlands
 Agriculture and Forestry: Large-scale
commercial agriculture and logging
operations drain peatlands, causing carbon
release into the atmosphere.
 Mining: Peat extraction for fuel and
horticulture, along with infrastructure
projects, leads to the destruction of peat
ecosystems.
 Climate Change: Rising temperatures and
changing precipitation patterns exacerbate
peatland degradation, increasing the risk of
wildfires and carbon release.
Conservation Efforts
 Role of Indigenous
Communities: Around 27% of global
peatlands lie within indigenous territories,
where traditional practices have
contributed to their conservation.
 The Brazzaville Declaration on Peatlands is
an agreement adopted in 2018 in
Brazzaville, Republic of the Congo.
 It aimed at protecting and sustainably
managing peatlands in the Congo Basin,
which contains the world’s largest tropical
peatland complex.
 The Global Peatlands Initiative (GPI), led by
United Nations Environment
Programme (UNEP), aims to protect and
conserve peatlands.
 Ramsar sites, comprises roughly a fifth of
protected peatlands globally and nearly
two-fifths of protected peatlands in the
tropics.
Way Ahead
 Strengthening Legal Protections: Countries
should integrate peatland conservation into
domestic environmental laws and ensure
the enforcement of Ramsar site protections.
 Nationally Determined Contributions
(NDCs) under the Paris Agreement and
action plans under the Kunming-Montreal
Global Biodiversity Framework should
incorporate peatland conservation.
 Indigenous Stewardship
Support: Recognizing and supporting
indigenous-led conservation efforts can
significantly enhance peatland protection.
Concluding remarks
 Peatlands are invaluable carbon reservoirs
essential for climate stability. Despite their
ecological significance, they remain
critically underprotected.
 Strengthening conservation efforts through
legal frameworks, global commitments, and
sustainable management is imperative for
preserving these vital ecosystems.
Concern Over Moving African Cheetahs to India:
Study
Syllabus: GS3/Environment and Conservation
Context

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
110
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 A new study by the Centre for Wildlife
Studies (CWS), has expressed concern over
the translocation of the African cheetahs to
India.
About
 The study examines the ethical, ecological
and welfare challenges associated with the
translocation of African cheetahs to India.
 Project Cheetah Overview: 20 African
cheetahs (8 from Namibia in Sept 2022, and
12 from South Africa in Feb 2023) were
introduced into Kuno National Park,
Madhya Pradesh, India.
 Importation Plans: Plans to import 12
cheetahs annually until a viable population
is established.
Major Highlights
Challenges Faced by Cheetahs:
 The cheetahs have experienced significant
stress, with over 90 immobilisations and
frequent veterinary care.
 The mortality rate was 40%-50% in the first
phase of the project, far below the expected
survival rate of 85%.
 The project has raised concerns about the
physical and mental health of the cheetahs
due to their ongoing stress.
Challenges of the Project:
 Conservation Challenges: African cheetah
populations are already at risk, with only
around 6,500 mature individuals left in the
wild.
 Sustainability Issues: Reliance on
continuous imports from Africa is seen as
ecologically unsustainable and ethically
problematic.
Difference between Asiatic Cheetah and African
Cheetah
Suggestions
 Call for Justice-Informed Approach:
Researchers advocate for a more inclusive
and participatory conservation model,
considering diverse knowledge systems,
values, and local consent.
 Focus on Sustainable Coexistence:
Conservation efforts should aim at
maintaining sustainable spaces for both
humans and wildlife, rather than causing
division and distress.
Glacier Ice Algae Accelerate Greenland Ice Sheet
Melting
Syllabus: GS3/ Environment
Context
 A study highlights how dark-pigmented
microalgae accelerate Greenland Ice Sheet
melting by efficiently colonizing exposed ice
without additional nutrients.
Key Findings
Cheetah
 Cheetah (Acinonyx jubatus), is one of the
world’s most-recognizable cats, known
especially for its speed. In India, the cheetah
population used to be fairly widespread.
 The cheetah is believed to have disappeared
from the Indian landscape in 1947 when
Maharaja Ramanuj Pratap Singh Deo of Koriya
princely state hunted down and shot the last
three recorded Asiatic cheetahs in India.
 The cheetah was officially declared extinct by
the Indian government in 1952.
 Since the 1940s, the cheetah has gone extinct
in 14 other countries – Jordan, Iraq, Israel,
Morocco, Syria, Oman, Tunisia, Saudi Arabia,
Djibouti, Ghana, Nigeria, Kazakhstan, Pakistan
and Afghanistan.
Reason for Extinction
 Over-hunting was a major contributing factor.
 The decimation of its relatively narrow
prey base species and
 The loss of its grassland-forest habitat.
Asiatic Cheetah (Acinonyx
jubatus venaticus)
African Cheetah (Acinonyx
jubatus jubatus)
IUCN status: critically
endangered.
IUCN status: vulnerable.
Distribution: Less than 50
cheetahs are left in the wild.
Distribution: Around 6,500-
7,000 African cheetahs are
present in the wild.
Characteristics: Smaller and
paler than the African
cheetah.
Characteristics: They are
bigger in size as compared
to Asiatic Cheetah.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
111
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Ice Algae’s Role in Melting: Dark-pigmented
microalgae grow rapidly on exposed ice
surfaces.
 Their pigmentation reduces ice reflectivity,
increasing heat absorption and accelerating
melting.
 Efficient Nutrient Uptake: Ice algae store
phosphorus and sustain high carbon-to-
nutrient ratios, enabling survival in
nutrient-poor conditions.
 Significance: The study stresses the need to
integrate biological factors into climate
projections.
 Ice algae have also been found in the Alps,
Himalayas, and Alaska, suggesting that
similar biological processes may contribute
to glacier retreat globally.
Ice Algae
 Ice algae are single-celled, elongated,
brownish, and ellipse-
shaped microorganisms that thrive on ice
surfaces worldwide.
 Similar to plants, they perform
photosynthesis, releasing oxygen and
producing organic molecules.
Implications
 Accelerated Sea-Level Rise: The Greenland
Ice Sheet is the largest contributor to global
sea-level rise.
 Disruption of Ocean Circulation: The melting
ice releases large volumes of freshwater,
which disrupt thermohaline circulation
such as the Atlantic Meridional Overturning
Circulation, AMOC.
 Impact on Global Climate: Darkened ice
absorbs more heat, contributing to regional
warming and amplifying Arctic temperature
rise, which is already occurring at twice the
global average.
 Marine and Polar Ecosystems: The influx of
freshwater into the ocean alters salinity and
nutrient cycles, affecting marine food
chains.
Way Forward
 Improved Climate Models: Incorporating
biological factors can enhance the accuracy
of sea-level rise predictions.
 Mitigation Strategies: Addressing global
warming to slow ice melt and minimize
feedback loops.
 Further Research: Understanding ice algae
dynamics in different glacier regions to
assess their overall impact.

INDIAN ECONOMY AND ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT
Economic Survey 2024-25: India’s Workforce
Vulnerable to AI
Syllabus: GS3/Economy
Context
 The Economic Survey 2024-25 called for the
creation of “robust institutions,” which
could help transition workers to medium-
and high-skilled jobs, where AI can augment
their efforts rather than replace them.
Major Highlights
 The future of work revolves
around ‘Augmented Intelligence’, where the
workforce integrates both human and
machine capabilities.
 By leveraging its young, dynamic, and tech-
savvy population, India has the potential to
create a workforce that can utilize AI to
augment their work and productivity.
 Raising the Quality: India‘s employment
challenge is not of numbers, but also of
raising the overall quality of its workforce.
 Service-oriented Economy: India’s economy
is heavily service-oriented, with a
significant portion of its IT workforce
engaged in low-value-added services.
 These roles are particularly susceptible to
automation, and a large segment of the
population relies on these jobs for their
livelihoods.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
112
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 The challenge lies in ensuring that the
benefits of AI do not come at the expense of
the workforce, particularly those in
vulnerable positions.
Measures to be Taken
 The survey identifies three types of
institutions essential for this
transition: Enabling Institutions, Insuring
Institutions, and Stewarding Institutions.
 These entities will help upskill the
workforce, preparing them for medium- and
high-skill jobs where AI can enhance their
capabilities rather than replace them.
 Social Infrastructure encompassing
Enabling Institutions,
 Insuring Institutions and Stewarding
Institutions to help graduate workforce
towards medium-and high-skill jobs.
 India will therefore have to fast track the
creation of robust institutions through a
tripartite compact between the
government, private sector and academia.
Challenges
 Practicality and reliability are core issues
that need to be addressed by developers.
 AI also needs significant infrastructure for
scaling, which takes time to build.
 AI models have to target efficiency gains
without compromising on performance.
Suggestions
 Policymakers must balance innovation with
societal costs, as AI driven shifts in the
labour market could have lasting effects.
 The corporate sector also must act
responsibly, handling the introduction of AI
with sensitivity to India‘s needs.
 A collaborative effort between government,
private sector, and academia is essential.
The Way Ahead
 AI, currently in its early stages, provides
India with the opportunity to tackle
challenges, strengthen its foundations, and
mobilize a nationwide institutional
response.
 The country’s predominantly services-
driven economy, coupled with its young and
dynamic population, offers a fertile ground
for leveraging the benefits of emerging
technologies.
 As India stands on the brink of an AI
revolution, the Economic Survey urges
policymakers to strike a balance between
fostering innovation and addressing societal
costs.
Economic Survey 2024-25: Shift from Globalization
to Geo-Economic Fragmentation
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
In News
 The recent Economic Survey 2024-
25 highlights a major global economic
transition: the backsliding of
globalization and the rise of geo-economic
fragmentation.
 The past few decades saw increasing global
trade, investments, and economic
interdependence, the next era is expected to
witness trade restrictions, economic
realignments, and shifting supply chains.
In the Era of Globalization: 1980-2022
 The following developments were largely
driven by open markets, rapid technological
advancements, and cross-border
investments, leading to efficiency and
economic growth.
 Demographic and Urbanization Growth: The
world’s population grew from 4.4 billion in
1980 to 8 billion in 2022, with urbanization
rising from 39% to 57%, driving global
connectivity.
 Trade Expansion: Global trade as a share of
GDP rose from 39% in 1980 to 60% by 2012,
reflecting deeper market integration.
 Surge in FDI: Foreign Direct Investment
(FDI) inflows grew from $54 billion in 1980
to over $1.5 trillion in 2019.
 Overall Economic Growth: The world
economy expanded from $11 trillion in
1980 to over $100 trillion in 2022.
The Rise of Geo-Economic Fragmentation
 Geo-economic fragmentation refers to
a policy-driven reversal of global economic
integration, guided by strategic and

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
113
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
geopolitical considerations. This shift is
characterized by:
 Trade restrictions and tariffs impacting
cross-border commerce.
 Capital flow restrictions disrupting global
investment patterns.
 Reorganization of supply chains due to
shifting geopolitical alliances.
 Rising protectionism as countries prioritize
domestic economic resilience.
Factors Driving Fragmentation
 Geopolitical Tensions: The re-emergence
of Cold War-style economic blocs and
“friend-shoring.” For example: China’s
expansionism, Ukraine-Russia war, Middle
East disruptions.
 Conflicts and security concerns reshaping
trade relationships.
 Increased Trade Barriers: Trade-restrictive
measures have surged, with WTO
data showing that trade covered by new
restrictions rose from $337.1 billion in 2023
to $887.7 billion in 2024.
 Technological Decoupling: Nations are
imposing controls on semiconductors, AI,
and critical technologies, leading to
fragmented innovation ecosystems.
 Environmental and Social
Standards: Western nations imposing one-
size-fits-all labor and emission standards are
contributing to global economic divisions.
Impact of Geo-Economic Fragmentation
Trade Disruptions & Protectionism:
 Global trade growth has slowed down
significantly, reflecting a secular
stagnation in the world economy.
 Between 2020 and 2024, over 24,000 trade
and investment restrictions were imposed
globally.
 The IMF warns that today’s trade
fragmentation is far costlier than during the
Cold War, as goods trade-to-GDP ratios have
risen from 16% to 45%.
 Reduced knowledge diffusion due to limited
cross-border exchanges hampers
innovation and productivity.
FDI Relocation & Investment Realignment:
 Global FDI flows are now concentrated
among geopolitical allies.
 Emerging markets face greater vulnerability,
as they rely on FDI from advanced
economies.
 Friend-shoring and reshoring of investments
to allied nations create uneven economic
opportunities.
China’s Strategic Economic Dominance:
 China has gained a strategic upper hand in
global supply chains, leveraging
its manufacturing prowess and resource
control:
 Electric Vehicles (EVs): Disrupting
traditional players like Germany and Japan.
 Critical Minerals: Controls the global supply
of lithium, cobalt, nickel, graphite.
 Renewable Energy: Produces 80% of battery
components, 60% of wind turbines, and 80%
of solar PV components.
 Rare Earth Processing: Processes 70% of the
world’s rare earth minerals, vital
for batteries, electronics, and defense.
 Outsourcing Reset: The world’s prior
strategy of manufacturing dependence on
China is now under reconsideration.
India’s Response: Amplifying Deregulation &
Economic Freedom
As global markets become more restrictive, India
must turn inwards and strengthen domestic
economic engines. A pro-business regulatory
environment can:
 Lower business compliance costs, boosting
ease of doing business.
 Enable SMEs to drive employment and
innovation.
 Make India a global manufacturing hub by
attracting capital and technology.
 Improve resilience to external shocks by
strengthening internal supply chains.
Path Forward: Deregulation & Economic Reforms
 Accelerating Deregulation: Removing
unnecessary licensing, inspection, and
compliance burdens on businesses.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
114
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 State-Level Best Practices: Encouraging
states to adopt pro-growth policies from
top-performing regions.
 SME Empowerment: Supporting small and
medium enterprises to expand globally.
 Trade & Investment Policies: Despite global
fragmentation, India must proactively
engage in exports and foreign investments.
 Balancing Regulation with Freedom: Striking
the right balance to unleash entrepreneurial
potential and enhance competitiveness.
Conclusion: A New Global Economic Order
 The Economic Survey 2024-25 underscores
a critical shift: globalization is retreating,
and economic fragmentation is on the rise.
 Trade restrictions, shifting FDI flows, and
China’s strategic dominance are shaping
a new world order.
 In response, India must double down on
deregulation, empower SMEs, and create an
investment-friendly climate to position itself
as a leading economic powerhouse.
India’s Debt Market Challenges
Syllabus: GS3/Economy
Context
The Economic Survey 2024-25 highlighted
that India’s debt market remains undercapitalised,
and risky borrowers are unable to access it.
About the Debt Market
 Debt Market is the market where fixed
income securities of various types and
features are issued and traded.
 These are issued by the Central and State
Governments, Municipal Corporations, Govt.
bodies and commercial
entities, like Financial Institutions, Banks,
Public Sector Units, Public Ltd.
companies and also structured finance
instruments.
 Government bonds, also known
as Government Securities (G-Secs), are
issued by the Central and State
governments to finance their fiscal needs.
 Corporate bonds are issued by companies to
raise funds for their operations and
expansion projects.
Instruments Traded in Money Market:
 Treasury Bills, Certificates of Deposits
(CDs), Commercial Paper (CPs), Bills of
Exchange and other such instruments of
short-term maturities (i.e., not those
exceeding 1 year with regard to the original
maturity).
India’s Debt Market: Challenges and Constraints
Undercapitalisation and Limited Access:
 The Economic Survey 2024-25 reveals that
the corporate bond market in India is only
18% of the country’s GDP, compared to 80%
in South Korea and 36% in China.
 This undercapitalisation is a major hurdle
for smaller players and risky borrowers
who find it difficult to tap into the market.
Private Placements Dominance: Private placements
account for 99.1% of the total resources mobilised
through the bond market, deterring the
participation of retail investors.
Barriers to Public Issuance:
 Public issuance of corporate bonds has
declined from 12% of total issuances in
2014 to 2% in 2024.
 In FY24, the public placement of corporate
bonds stood at ₹19,000 crore, while private
placements amounted to around ₹8.38 lakh
crore.
Regulatory Challenges:
 Most of the borrowing in the bond market is
done by firms with the highest credit ratings
(AAA, AA+, and AA), leaving out many
smaller companies and non-banking
financial companies (NBFCs).
Liquidity In Debt Market:
 High entry costs, information asymmetry,
and the absence of a secondary market for
corporate bonds are major hurdles.
 These factors make it challenging for risky
borrowers to secure funding through
corporate bonds.
Debt Recovery Challenges:
 Inefficiencies in debt recovery frameworks,
including the Insolvency and Bankruptcy
Code (IBC) and Debt Recovery Tribunals
(DRTs), hinder creditor confidence.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
115
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 The introduction of out-of-court
restructuring frameworks, modeled after
systems in South Korea, could expedite
recoveries and reduce judicial burdens.
Opportunities for India’s Bond Market
Infrastructure and Green Bonds:
 The National Infrastructure Pipeline (NIP)
with $1.4 trillion capital aimed at
accelerating India’s infrastructure
development.
 India is pushing green finance with $10
billion worth of green bonds in 2024,
supporting climate-friendly projects.
Reforming FPI Norms to Boost Liquidity: Allocation
limits under the Voluntary Retention Route (VRR);
 Unified Market Operations for Seamless
Functioning: To reduce transaction costs,
and enhance investor confidence.
 Strengthening Debt Recovery
Mechanisms inspired by models in South
Korea and the Philippines.
Recommendations for Improvement
 Reducing entry costs, improving
information transparency, and establishing
a secondary market for corporate bonds
could enhance liquidity and accessibility.
 Additionally, relaxing regulations to allow
insurance and pension funds to invest in
lower-rated bonds could help small players
and risky borrowers access the market.
Budget 2025-26 :Key Highlights
Syllabus :GS3/Economy
In Context
 The Union Budget 2025-26 was framed
around the theme “Sabka Vikas,”
emphasizing balanced growth across all
regions of India.
 The term ‘budget’ has nowhere been
mentioned in the Constitution. It is
mentioned as ‘Annual financial
statement’ in Article 112.
About
 The Finance Minister quoted the
renowned Telugu poet Shri Gurajada Appa
Rao’s saying, “A country is not just its soil; a
country is its people,” to highlight the
importance of people-centric development.
Principles of Viksit Bharat:
 Eradicate poverty (Zero-poverty)
 Provide high-quality, universal school
education
 Ensure access to affordable, comprehensive
healthcare
 Achieve full employment with a skilled
workforce
 Involve 70% women in economic activities
 Strengthen agriculture to make India the
“food basket of the world
Budget Estimates 2025-26
 The total receipts other than borrowings
and the total expenditure are estimated at ₹
34.96 lakh crore and ₹ 50.65 lakh crore
respectively.
 The net tax receipts are estimated at ₹
28.37 lakh crore.
 The fiscal deficit is estimated to be 4.4 per
cent of GDP.
 The gross market borrowings are estimated
at ₹ 14.82 lakh crore.
 Capex Expenditure of ₹11.21 lakh crore
(3.1% of GDP) earmarked in FY2025-26.
Key Engines of Growth
Agriculture (1st Engine): Launch of Prime Minister
Dhan-Dhaanya Krishi Yojana to cover 100 districts.
 Mission for Aatmanirbharta in Pulses for
Tur, Urad, and Masoor pulses.
 Loan limit for Kisan Credit Cards raised
from ₹3 lakh to ₹5 lakh.
 Comprehensive program for vegetables,
fruits, high-yield seeds, and cotton
productivity.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
116
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in

MSMEs (2nd Engine): MSME investment & turnover
limits enhanced to 2.5 and 2 times.
 Credit cards for micro enterprises and a
loan scheme for 5 lakh women and
marginalized entrepreneurs.
 Development of a toy manufacturing hub
and National Manufacturing Mission.

Investment (3rd Engine): 50,000 Atal Tinkering
Labs to be set up in schools.
 Broadband for all secondary schools & PHCs
under BharatNet project.
 Establishment of National Centres of
Excellence for skilling.
 ₹1.5 lakh crore for 50-year interest-free
loans to states for capital expenditure.
 Urban Challenge Fund of ₹1 lakh crore to
support urban development.
 ₹20,000 crore for private sector-driven
R&D and innovation.
 National Geospatial Mission for urban
planning and Gyan Bharatam Mission for
manuscript conservation.
 Nuclear Energy Expansion: Rs.20,000 crore
for Small Modular Reactors (SMRs).

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
117
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in

Exports (4th Engine): Launch of Export Promotion
Mission and BharatTradeNet for trade
documentation.
 Support for domestic manufacturing and
integration with global supply chains.
 Infrastructure support for air cargo and
fisheries exports.

Reforms
Financial Sector : Increase in FDI limit in insurance
from 74% to 100%.
 Establishment of a High-Level Committee
for Regulatory Reforms.
 Introduction of the Investment Friendliness
Index of States.
 Decriminalization of 100+ provisions under
the Jan Vishwas Bill 2.0.
 Financial Stability and Development Council
(FSDC) to review regulations.

Taxation & Fiscal Policy: Fiscal deficit target of 4.4%
of GDP for FY 2025-26.
 Increased receipts and expenditure
estimates for 2025-26.
 Commitment to fiscal consolidation
with a clear roadmap.
Tax Proposals :
Personal Income Tax Reform: no tax for income up
to ₹12 lakh per annum.
 Standard deduction of ₹75,000 for income
up to ₹12.75 lakh.
 Estimated ₹1 lakh crore revenue loss due to
tax reforms.

TDS/TCS Rationalization: TDS limit on interest for
senior citizens increased from ₹50,000 to ₹1 lakh.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
118
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 TDS threshold on rent raised to ₹6 lakh
from ₹2.4 lakh.
 Extension of updated returns filing to 4
years for any assessment year.
Compliance Simplification:
 Increase in registration period for small
charitable trusts from 5 to 10 years.
 Senior citizens benefit from tax exemption
on National Savings Scheme withdrawals.
Promotion of Employment & Investment:
 Presumptive taxation regime for non-
residents providing services to electronics
manufacturing companies.
 Extension of the Sovereign Wealth Funds
and Pension Funds investment deadline to
2030.

Customs Tariff Reforms: Removal of seven tariffs,
simplification of cess, and reduction of Basic
Customs Duty (BCD) on critical minerals and
textiles.
 Reduction in BCD on lithium-ion battery
manufacturing capital goods and
shipbuilding materials.
 Duty adjustments to encourage domestic
manufacturing.
Export Promotion:
 Reduction of BCD on fish products and
leather to boost exports.
 Fully exempted BCD on lifesaving medicines
for cancer, rare diseases, and chronic
illnesses.

Aatmanirbharta in Pulses
Syllabus: GS3/Economy
Context
The Finance Minister has announced the launch of a
six-year ‘Mission for Aatmanirbharta (self-reliance)
in Pulses’.
About
Budget Allocation: Rs 1,000 crore.
Aim:
 To boost the output and help achieve self-
sufficiency in pulses, with special focus on
tur/arhar (pigeonpea), urad (black gram)
and masoor (red lentil).
 It will provide minimum support price
(MSP)-based procurement and post-harvest
warehousing solutions.
India’s Target:
 India has set a target to end India’s
dependence on imports to meet the
country’s pulses demand by 2029.
 Recently the Union Home Minister declared
a goal that India will stop importing pulses
by 2028-29.
Import of Pulses
 In 2023-24, imports went up 84% higher
year-on-year to 4.65 million tonnes, the
most in six years.
 In value terms, the country’s spending on
imports rose 93% to $3.75 billion.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
119
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 India largely imports from Canada,
Australia, Myanmar, Mozambique, Tanzania,
Sudan and Malawi.

Production of Pulses in India
 India is the largest producer (25% of global
production), consumer (27% of world
consumption) and importer (14%) of pulses
in the world.
 Pulses account for around 23% of the area
under food grains and contribute around 9-
10% of the total foodgrains production in
the country.
 Rabi pulses contribute more than 60 percent
of the total production.

 Gram is the most dominant pulse having a
share of around 40% in the total production
followed by Tur/Arhar at 15 to 20% and
Urad/Black Matpe and Moong at around 8-
10% each.
 Madhya Pradesh, Maharashtra and
Rajasthan are the top three pulses
producing states in the country.
 Domestic pulses production increased from
192.55 lt in 2013-14 to 273.02 lt in 2021-22
and 260.58 lt in 2022-23.
 This was mainly courtesy two crops: chana
and moong (green gram).
Challenges
 Low Productivity: Pulses have traditionally
been a neglected crop because of the
instability of its yields.
 Residual Crop: Pulses in India are
considered a residual crop and grown under
rain-fed conditions in marginal/less fertile
lands, with very little focus on pest and
nutrient management.
 With the advent of the Green
Revolution, which promoted rice and wheat
using external inputs and modern varieties
of seeds, pulses were pushed to the
marginal lands. This resulted in decline in
productivity and land degradation.
 Lack of Technological Advances: There has
been no technology breakthrough in any of
the pulses crops.
 Less Beneficial: Farmers perceive pulses as
having a lower cost benefit ratio vis-à-vis
other crops like wheat and rice.
 Penetration and adoption of high yielding
varieties (HYV) seeds are also low.
 Post Harvest Losses: There are post-harvest
losses during storage, due to excessive
moisture and attack by stored grain pests
especially the pulse beetle.
Measures Taken By the Government to Increase
Production
 National Food Security Mission: The
Department of Agriculture & Farmers
Welfare is implementing the National Food
Security Mission (NFSM)-Pulses with the
objectives of increasing production through
area expansion and productivity
enhancement in all the districts.
 Research and Development: The Indian
Council of Agricultural Research (ICAR) is
undertaking basic and strategic research on
these crops and applied research in
collaboration with State Agricultural
Universities for developing location-specific
high yielding varieties.
 PM-AASHA: Government implements an
umbrella scheme PM-AASHA comprising
Price Support Scheme (PSS), Price
Deficiency Payment Scheme (PDPS) and
Private Procurement Stockist Scheme
(PPSS) in order to ensure Minimum Support
Price (MSP) to farmers for their produce of
notified oilseeds, pulses and copra.
 Integrated scheme of Oilseeds, Pulses, Oil
Palm and Maize (ISOPOM) was launched in
14 major pulses growing states.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
120
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Rashtriya Krishi Vikas Yojna was launched
under which states can undertake Pulses
Development Programmes.
Way Ahead
 Model Pulses Villages: According to the
agriculture ministry’s plan to achieve self-
sufficiency, model pulses villages will be set
up from the current kharif or summer-sown
season.
 Use of Fallow Land: The ministry is also
working with states to bring fallow land for
cultivation of lentils.
 Hubs: It is set to create 150 hubs to
distribute high-yielding seeds.
 Alongside, the farm department will
collaborate with the department of
agricultural research to promote climate-
resilient varieties.
 The government has to ensure crop
diversification and incentivize farmers
sufficiently across varieties to stop imports.

Green Cardamom
Syllabus: GS3/Economy/Agriculture
Context
Researchers have identified six species that are
closely related to Elettaria cardamomum, better
known as green cardamom.
About
 Of the six, four were previously placed in a
separate genus, Alpinia, while the remaining
two have been newly identified and
described from Kerala’s Western Ghats
regions.
 Following the reclassification, the genus
Elettaria now has seven species, including
Elettaria cardamomum.
 E. ensal, E. floribunda, E. involucrata and E.
rufescens were earlier placed in the genus
Alpinia.
 The remaining two are new species,
Elettaria facifera and Elettaria tulipifera.
 Seed capsules of Elettaria
cardamomum provide the commercial green
cardamom.
 The genus name is based on this spice’s old
Malayalam name, ‘elletari’ as used by
Hendrik van Rheede in the 17th century.
About Cardamom
 Cardamom is one of the world’s most exotic
spices – along with Saffron and Vanilla.
 It belongs to the same botanical family as
ginger and turmeric (Zingiberaceae).
 It is also one of the world’s oldest spices –
cultivated for more than 4000 years.
 Evergreen forests of Western Ghats of South
India are considered as the centre origin of
cardamom.
 Guatemala is the world’s largest producer of
cardamom, India is the second largest
producer.
 Top Producing States: Kerala (56.71%),
Karnataka (35.91%) and Tamil Nadu
(7.31%).

Health Insurance Cover for 1 crore Gig Workers
Syllabus: GS3/Economy
Context
 The Union Finance Minister has announced
that gig workers would be eligible
for healthcare facilities under the Ayushman
Bharat-Pradhan Mantri Jan Arogya Yojana
(PMJAY) scheme.
About
 The total outlay for health in this year’s
budget has increased by over ₹9,000 crore.
 It will finance key programmes such as the
mission to increase infrastructure,
Ayushman Bharat, as well as allocation for
All India Institute of Medical Sciences-Delhi.
 The Jan Arogya Yojana provides a cover of
Rs 5 lakh per beneficiaryfamily per year for
secondary and tertiary care hospitalization
across public and private empanelled
hospitals in India.
 However, the details on whether the
families of gig workers will be covered or
not are yet to be provided.
Data on Health Insurance in India (NITI Aayog)

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
121
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Only around 10% of India’s population have
bought private health insurance, while
nearly 60% are estimated to be covered by
government-funded schemes.
 The remaining 30% – more than 400
million people – still lack any form of health
insurance.
Who are Gig Workers?
 Non-standard or gig work consists
of income-earning activities outside of
standard, long-term employer-employee
relationships.
 It relies heavily on temporary and part-time
positions filled by independent contractors
and freelancers rather than full-time
permanent employees.
 The term is borrowed from the music
world, where performers book “gigs” that
are single or short-term engagements at
various venues.
 The gig economy uses digital platforms to
connect freelancers with customers to
provide short-term services or asset-
sharing.
 Examples include ride-hailing apps, food
delivery apps, and holiday rental apps.
India and Gig Economy
 In 2020, 7.7 million workers were engaged
in the gig economy.
 The gig workforce is expected to expand to
23.5 million workers or 4.1% of total
workforce by 2029-30.
 At present about 47% of the gig work is in
medium skilled jobs, about 22% in high
skilled, and about 31% in low skilled jobs.
 Its contribution to India’s gross domestic
product (GDP) is estimated to be
substantial, with the potential to add 1.25%
to GDP by 2030, and create 90 million jobs in
the long term.
Reasons for a rise in Gig Workers
 Post Pandemic: The trend accelerated
during the 2020 COVID-19 pandemic, as
gig workers delivered necessities
to home-bound consumers, and those
whose jobs had been eliminated turned
to part-time and contract work for
income.
 Freedom to work from anywhere: These
types of positions facilitate independent
contracting work, with many of them
not requiring a freelancer to come into
an office.
 Rise of Technology and Internet: Rise of
fast internet and smartphones have
made it easier to work from anywhere
easily.
 Convenient for Small
Organisations: Employers who cannot
afford to hire full-time employees to do
all the work will often hire part-time or
temporary employees to take care of
busier times or specific projects.
 Benefits Employers: Employers do not
need to provide related benefits, such as
medical insurance, Provident Fund, and
year-end bonuses which make it a
better option for them to pay only for
work on a unit basis.
Challenges
 Work-life balance: For some workers, the
flexibility of working gigs can actually
disrupt the work-life balance, sleep
patterns, and activities of daily life.
 Can replace Full time employees: The
number of full-time employees required by
the company can be reduced as freelance
workers take over the work.
 No regular job benefits: Many employers
save money by avoiding paying benefits
such as health coverage and paid
vacation time.
 There is no formal employment
relationship with the platform company
and there are usually no employee
benefits in short-term contracts.
Steps Taken by Government of India for Gig Workers
 Code of Social Security, 2020: The
Government has formulated the Code on
Social Security, 2020 which envisages
framing of suitable social security schemes
for gig workers and platform workers on
matters relating to life and disability cover,
accident insurance, health and maternity
benefits, old age protection, etc.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
122
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 However, these provisions under the Code
have not come into force.
 e-Shram Portal: The Government has also
launched e-Shram portal in 2021 for
registration and creation of
a Comprehensive National Database of
Unorganized Workers including gig workers
and platform workers.
 It allows a person to register himself or
herself on the portal on a self-declaration
basis, which is spread across around 400
occupations.
Conclusion
 Not having the health coverage enjoyed by
many people who are in traditional full-time
employment, gig workers are particularly
vulnerable to medical expenses. These costs
can sometimes be catastrophic.
 As they often lack job security and
associated benefits of full-time employment,
government-backed coverage could provide
a crucial safety net.
100% FDI in Insurance Sector
Syllabus: GS3/Economy
In News
 Finance Minister Nirmala Sitharaman
announced the opening up of the insurance
sector to 100% foreign direct investment
(FDI), up from the previous limit of 74%, to
boost the sector.
Global Comparison:
Countries like Canada, Brazil, Australia, and China
allow 100% FDI in insurance, and aligning India
with global standards will make it more attractive
to foreign insurers.
The Indian insurance sector
 It has undergone significant transformation,
evolving from being dominated by Life
Insurance Corporation (LIC) to a more
diverse industry with various players
offering a wide range of products.
 The transformation has been driven by
Economic development, Technological
advancements, Demographic changes,
Increased consumer awareness, particularly
after the COVID-19 pandemic, regarding the
importance of financial security through
insurance.
 The insurance sector has played a
significant role in the economic
development of India.
Do you know ?
 In India, the concept of insurance has a
long-standing history, with references
found in ancient texts such as
the Manusmriti, Yagnavalkya’s
Dharmashastra, and Kautilya’s Arthashastra.
 These writings discuss the idea of pooling
resources to provide financial support
during calamities like fires, floods,
epidemics, and famines.
 Evidence of early insurance practices in
ancient India can be seen in the form of
marine trade loans and carriers’ contracts,
which helped mitigate risks associated with
trade and transportation.
Insurance Penetration in India
 Insurance penetration in India showed a
slight decline from 4% in FY23 to 3.7% in
FY24, despite a 7.7% growth in total
premiums, reaching Rs 11.2 lakh crore.
 Life insurance penetration decreased from
3% in FY23 to 2.8% in FY24.
 Non-life insurance penetration remained
stable at 1%.
 Overall insurance penetration in India
is 3.7%, which is below the global
average of 7%, presenting a significant gap
and growth opportunity.
 Factors for Low Penetration: Limited
awareness, economic constraints, and
cultural preferences for traditional financial
practices contribute to India’s low
insurance penetration.
Conditions for 100% FDI In India
 The enhanced FDI limit will apply to
companies that invest the entire premium
in India.
 The government also plans to review and
simplify current regulations associated with
foreign investments
 The Insurance Regulatory and Development
Authority of India (IRDAI) will continue to
regulate the sector to protect policyholders

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
123
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
and ensure compliance with Indian laws,
preventing foreign dominance.
Impact of 100% FDI on Insurance:
 India’s insurance sector has attracted Rs
82,847 crore in FDI since 2000, driving
growth and improving operations.
 The government expects the sector to grow
at 7.1% annually over the next five years,
driven by foreign investment and policy
changes.
 100% FDI could address the
insurance under-penetration in India,
accelerating the adoption of global best
practices and introducing innovative
products and services.
 It will ensure long-term capital, enhance
technology, strengthen distribution, and
increase competitiveness.
Benefits for Customers:
 Increased foreign investment will introduce
more players into the market, intensifying
competition.
 Customers can expect better products,
improved service, and competitive pricing,
leading to higher insurance penetration and
narrowing the protection gap.
 Greater foreign participation is expected
to boost customer service standards and
contribute to domestic economic growth by
investing premiums in India.
Challenges
 Foreign insurers may face challenges
navigating India’s complex distribution
landscape, as the private life insurance
sector is dominated by bank-led
distribution, while non-life insurance relies
on agency channels.
 Adaptation Challenges: Foreign insurers will
need to adapt their business models to
India-specific needs, such as the
bancassurance-heavy model in life
insurance and agency-led models for health
insurance.
 Many foreign players are already in joint
ventures (JVs), so restructuring may take
time.
Conclusion and Way Forward
 The insurance sector in India has played a
vital role towards the steadiness and
growth of the Indian economy.
 Insurance is a capital-intensive industry,
and a move to enhance capital access is
beneficial.
 This could attract global insurers seeking
greater control on the Indian operations
 The opening of the sector to 100% FDI
aligns with the goal of “Insurance for All” by
2047, requiring significant capital inflows.
 The government is also considering
revisions to FDI regulations, including
changes related to key management and
board composition, to create a more
favorable environment for foreign
investment and sector expansion.
 The Economic Survey suggests
insurers should target tier 2 and 3 cities, as
well as rural areas, where awareness and
accessibility are low, to increase
penetration and stimulate growth.
 The use of innovative distribution
models can help include underinsured
customers, particularly those already
covered by government schemes like
Pradhan Mantri Jeevan Jyoti Bima Yojana,
Pradhan Mantri Fasal Bima Yojana, and
Pradhan Mantri Jan Arogya Yojana.
Rupee Breaches 87-level Against Dollar
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
In News
The Indian Rupee (INR) has witnessed a sharp
depreciation, breaching the 87-mark against the US
Dollar, reflecting broader global economic shifts
and domestic financial concerns.
Key Factors Behind the Rupee Depreciation
 Strengthening US Dollar: The Dollar
Index surged 1.24% to 109.84, reflecting
increased investor confidence in the US
economy. Robust job data, expectations of
prolonged higher interest rates, and
rising US Treasury yields have made the
dollar more attractive.
 Escalating Trade War Fears: US
President Donald Trump’s tariffs on Canada,
Mexico, and China have heightened global
trade tensions.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
124
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Canada and Mexico, which export over $840
billion worth of goods to the US, have
announced retaliatory measures. China
faces a potential 10% tariff, which has
weakened the Yuan, indirectly impacting
the Indian Rupee.
 Foreign Institutional Investor (FII) Outflows:
FIIs have been aggressively selling Indian
assets since October 2024, withdrawing $11
billion in Q3 FY25, adding further pressure
on the currency.
 Widening Trade Deficit: India’s trade deficit
has reached $188 billion, up 18% from FY24,
reflecting the high import dependency,
especially on crude oil.
 RBI’s Intervention and Monetary Policy
Outlook: The Reserve Bank of India
(RBI) has been managing the currency
volatility through forex interventions,
selling $3.3 billion in reserves over the last
seven weeks.
 However, with inflation concerns mounting,
all eyes are on the upcoming RBI monetary
policy review later this week.
Implications of a Weak Rupee
The Downside:
 Rising Import Costs & Inflation: A weaker
rupee makes imports, particularly crude oil,
more expensive, increasing production
costs and leading to inflationary pressures.
 Higher Loan Servicing Costs: Companies
with foreign currency loans face a higher
debt burden, impacting balance sheets and
investment outlook.
 Capital Flight & FDI Concerns: A
depreciating rupee may trigger capital
outflows, discouraging foreign direct
investment (FDI) and leading to economic
volatility.
 Consumer Sentiment Impact: Reduced
purchasing power and costlier imports
could affect demand and economic growth.
The Upside:
 Boost for Exporters: A weaker rupee
enhances export competitiveness, benefiting
industries like IT, pharmaceuticals, and
textiles.
 Stronger Remittances: Indians abroad gain
from better exchange rates, leading to
higher inward remittances, which support
domestic consumption.
 Government’s Focus on Self-Reliance: India
can enhance its competitive
advantages rather than rely on exchange
rate adjustments to boost trade.
Conclusion
 The rupee depreciation reflects a mix of
global economic shifts, trade tensions, and
domestic policy challenges.
 While it poses risks, India’s long-term
economic resilience, export sector growth,
and government reforms could help
navigate the crisis.
 As the global trade war escalates, India’s
strategic economic measures will be pivotal
in determining how the rupee stabilizes in
the coming months
Shift to Debt-GDP Ratio from Fiscal Deficit as Fiscal
Anchor
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
The central government has announced a shift
towards the “debt-GDP ratio” as the fiscal anchor,
beginning from the 2026-27 financial year.
About
 The government has detailed three levels of
fiscal consolidation based on nominal GDP
growth assumptions:
 Mild: 10% growth rate
 Moderate: 10.5% growth rate
 High: 11% growth rate
 Debt-GDP ratio in India: For the central
government, the ratio is estimated to
be 57.1% in 2024-25 and 56.1% in 2025-26.
 The government aims to reduce the debt-
GDP ratio to 50±1 per cent by 2031.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
125
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in

Rationale Behind the Shift
 Enhanced Transparency and
Flexibility: Unlike rigid annual fiscal deficit
targets, the debt-GDP ratio provides a more
comprehensive and long-term perspective
of fiscal health.
 Alignment with Global Best Practices: Many
advanced economies prioritize debt
sustainability over annual deficit targets,
ensuring that fiscal policies remain
adaptable to changing economic conditions.
 Better Fiscal Management: This approach
allows governments to rebuild financial
buffers and allocate resources efficiently for
growth-enhancing expenditures.
 Disclosure of Off-Budget Borrowings: The
new approach aims to bring greater clarity
and transparency in government
borrowings, addressing past concerns about
fiscal opacity.
Challenges
 FRBM Act Compliance: The new framework
suggests a significant delay in achieving the
Fiscal Responsibility and Budget
Management (FRBM) Act target of 40%
debt-GDP ratio.
 Implementation Challenges: Maintaining
fiscal discipline while ensuring adequate
public expenditure for economic growth
remains a challenge.
 State Debt Burden: The total debt burden,
including states, remains a concern,
necessitating coordinated fiscal
consolidation.
Concluding remarks
 The shift to the debt-GDP ratio as a fiscal
anchor marks a significant change in India’s
fiscal policy framework.
 While it offers greater flexibility and long-
term sustainability, effective
implementation and adherence to fiscal
discipline will be crucial in achieving the
targeted fiscal consolidation.
NK Singh committee recommendation
Debt to GDP ratio:
 The Committee suggested using debt as the
primary target for fiscal policy. A debt to
GDP ratio of 60% should be targeted with
a 40% limit for the center and 20% limit for
the states by FY23.
 The fiscal deficit to GDP ratio of 2.5% by
FY23.
Fiscal Council:
The Committee proposed to create an autonomous
Fiscal Council with a Chairperson and two members
appointed by the center. The role of the Council
would include:
 1. Preparing multi-year fiscal forecasts,
 2. Recommending changes to the fiscal
strategy,
 3. Improving quality of fiscal data,
 4. Advising the government if conditions
exist to deviate from the fiscal target.

Deviations: The Committee suggested that grounds
in which the government can deviate from the
targets should be clearly specified, and the
government should not be allowed to notify other
circumstances.
Debt trajectory for individual states: The Committee
recommended that the Finance Commission should
be asked to recommend the debt trajectory for
individual states.
GREAT Scheme
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
In News
The Ministry of Textiles, in its 10th Empowered
Programme Committee meeting under the National
Technical Textiles Mission, approved key initiatives,
including funding for startups under the GREAT
scheme.
Key Features of the GREAT Scheme

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
126
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 It is an initiative under the National
Technical Textiles Mission (NTTM) by the
Ministry of Textiles.
 Provides funding of up to INR 50 lakhs per
startup.
 Focuses on critical areas like medical
textiles, industrial textiles, and protective
textiles.
 Encourages R&D, product development, and
commercialization of innovative textile
solutions.
States Demand for Increase Share in Central Taxes
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
Odisha has joined the growing demand for the
Finance Commission to raise States’ share in India’s
divisible tax pool to 50%, from about 41%
currently.
What is Tax devolution?
 Tax devolution refers to the distribution of
tax revenues between the central
government and the state governments.
 The central government collects taxes (like
income tax, GST, etc.) and a portion is
shared with the states based on the Finance
Commission’s recommendations.
Objective: To promote fiscal federalism, strengthen
the financial autonomy of state governments, and
empower them to meet the needs of their
respective populations.
Formula Used: States’ share is decided by a formula
meant to incentivize demographic performance and
each state’s effort to mobilize its own tax revenue.
 The formula also takes into account
geographic area, forest cover and the state’s
per capita income.
 The Centre also aids States through
additional grants for certain schemes that
are jointly funded by the Centre and the
States.
Constitutional Provisions Related to Centre State
Financial Relations
 Articles 202 to 206 deal with the financial
administration of states, including
provisions related to their budget,
expenditure, borrowing, and taxation
powers.
 Articles 268 to 272 outline the distribution
of revenues between the Union and the
states.
 Article 280 provides for the establishment
of a Finance Commission every five years
(or as specified by the President).
 Article 282 allows the Union government to
provide financial assistance to states for any
public purpose.
Current Share of the States
 Recommendations of the 14th FC: It hiked
the tax devolution to states to 42% from
32%, and also added a new provision of
revenue deficit grants to states facing any
resource gap.
 The 15th finance commission, under the
chairmanship of N K Singh has revised tax
devolution and brought it down to 41%
from 42%.
 So the current tax devolution to states
stands at 41% till 2026.
 The 90:10 rule is still applicable to the
northeastern and hill states, although there
is no special status category.
 All the other states receive Central funding
in a 60:40 ratio, 60% being the Central
government’s contribution and 40% states.
Concerns of the States
Demand for more funds: States argue they should
receive more funds than recommended by the
Finance Commission.
 States argue that they have greater
responsibilities, including education,
healthcare, and policing services.
Disparities Among States: Developed States like
Karnataka and Tamil Nadu feel they receive less
money from the Centre than they contribute in
taxes.
 It is argued that more developed States with
better governance are being penalized by
the Centre to help States with poor
governance.
Divisible Pool Concerns: Cesses and surcharges,
which are not shared with the States, can constitute

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
127
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
up to 28% of the Centre’s tax revenues, leading to
revenue losses for States.
Way Ahead
 The 16th Finance Commission should
review the States’ demand for a higher tax
devolution based on fiscal needs and
expenditure responsibilities.
 Strengthening Disaster Resilience Funding: A
separate central disaster relief fund could
be established for disaster-prone States to
ease their financial burden.
 Capacity Building: Strengthening the
financial management and capacity of states
to better utilize devolved funds for
development.
Private Sector Involvement in India’s Nuclear Sector
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
The Union government is considering allowing
private sector participation to achieve 100 GW of
nuclear power capacity by 2047.
About
 Traditionally, nuclear power plants in India
have been owned and operated only by
state-owned Nuclear Power Corporation of
India Ltd (NPCIL) and its fully-owned
subsidiary Bharatiya Nabhikiya Vidyut
Nigam (BHAVINI).
 To allow private sector participation
government has proposed amendments to
key legislations;
Atomic Energy Act, 1962, a framework for nuclear
energy development and regulation.
Civil Liability for Nuclear Damage Act,
2010, ensuring compensation mechanisms for
nuclear incidents.
 The government will enter into
partnerships with the private sector with
the motive of;
 Setting up Bharat Small Reactors,
 Research & development of Bharat Small
Modular Reactor, and
 Research & development of newer
technologies for nuclear energy.
What is Nuclear Energy?
 Nuclear energy is the energy released
during nuclear reactions, either through
fission (splitting of atomic nuclei) or fusion
(merging of atomic nuclei).
 In nuclear fission, heavy atomic nuclei, such
as those of uranium or plutonium, are split
into lighter nuclei, releasing a large amount
of energy.
 This process is utilized in nuclear power
plants to generate electricity.
Status of Nuclear power capacity in India
 The current installed nuclear power
capacity in the country is 8,180 MW, spread
across 24 nuclear power reactors.
 Capacity Expansion: 10 new reactors
(totaling 8 GW) under construction across
Gujarat, Rajasthan, Tamil Nadu, Haryana,
Karnataka, and Madhya Pradesh.
 Approval for a 6×1208 MW nuclear plant in
Andhra Pradesh in collaboration with the
USA.

Benefits of Private Sector Involvement
 Faster Capacity Expansion: Private
investment will help bridge the financial
gap needed for rapid nuclear power growth.
 Technological Advancement: Collaboration
with private companies drive innovation
and bring in global expertise.
 Cost Efficiency: Competitive bidding and
private participation will help reduce
project costs and delays.
 Energy Security: Increased nuclear power
generation helps India reduce dependence
on fossil fuels and meet clean energy goals.
Concerns to Private Sector Entry
 Regulatory Hurdles: Amendments to
existing laws are required to enable private
sector participation.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
128
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 High Capital Requirement: Nuclear power
projects involve long gestation periods and
large upfront investments, which deters
private players.
 Liability Concerns: The Civil Liability for
Nuclear Damage Act imposes high liability
on operators, making private investment
risky.
 Safety and Security: Nuclear energy requires
strict safety protocols, and allowing private
firms to operate reactors necessitates
robust regulatory oversight.
 Public Perception: Concerns over nuclear
safety, waste management, and radiation
risks will face public resistance.
Government steps
 India had announced a Rs 20,000 crore R&D
mission for development of small modular
reactors (SMRs).
 India is also targeting the deployment of at
least five of these indigenously developed
reactors by 2033.
 NPCIL and National Thermal Power
Corporation (NTPC) have signed a
supplementary Joint Venture agreement to
develop nuclear power facilities in the
country.
Way Ahead
 Clear Regulatory Framework: Establish a
robust regulatory environment to ensure
safety, compliance, and transparency,
addressing concerns about accountability
and national security.
 Public-Private Partnerships (PPPs): Promote
partnerships where the government
maintains oversight, while private players
handle operations, innovation, and
investment, ensuring a balance of interests.
 Gradual Implementation: Start with pilot
projects and small-scale initiatives to test
private sector involvement, ensuring risk
management before large-scale
implementation.

India’s Gold Investments Surge 60% to Rs 1.5 lakh
Crore in 2024
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
 Gold investments in India surged by 60% in
2024, reaching $18 billion (approx Rs 1.5
lakh crore), compared to 2023, according to
the World Gold Council (WGC) report.
Key highlights of the report
 India’s gold investment demand stood
at 239 tonnes in 2024, the highest level
since 2013.
 This represents a 29% rise from the 185
tonnes recorded in 2023.
 Global gold demand also witnessed an
increase of 25%, compared to 945.5 tonnes
in 2023.
 The demand is expected to expand further
into gold exchange-traded funds (ETFs) and
mutual funds.
Key facts related to Gold
 Gold accounts for over 5% of India’s total
imports.
 Reserves in India: Bihar (44%) followed by
Rajasthan (25%), Karnataka (21%), West
Bengal (3%), Andhra Pradesh (3% ), and
Jharkhand (2%).
 Reserves in the world: United States of
America, Germany, Italy, and France.
Reasons Behind the Surge
 Steady Rise in Gold Prices: The primary
factor driving this surge is the consistent
increase in gold prices throughout the year.
 Investors turned to gold as a hedge against
inflation and economic volatility.
 Cultural Demand: Traditional preferences
for gold during auspicious occasions like
weddings led to higher retail demand and
significantly boosted gold purchases.
 Urban Buying Trends: Metropolitan cities
experienced increased buying activity.
 E-commerce platforms offering rapid
delivery of small gold investment bars and
coins facilitated ease of investment.
 Weaker Performance of Other Asset
Classes: The domestic stock markets
recorded average returns, prompting
investors to shift towards gold.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
129
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Implications for the Indian Economy
 Current Account Deficit (CAD): Higher gold
imports can widen India’s CAD, affecting
foreign exchange reserves.
 Higher Inflationary Pressures: A surge in
gold demand drives up its price, leading to
inflationary pressures in the economy.
 Financial Market Disruptions: A shift of
investment towards gold can lead to
reduced liquidity in equity markets,
affecting stock market performance.
Way Ahead
 Gold Monetization Schemes: Encouraging
gold deposits in banks to reduce import
dependence.
 Strengthening Gold ETFs and Mutual
Funds: Providing tax incentives for digital
gold investments.
 E-Gold Infrastructure: Expanding the
accessibility of digital gold investments
through fintech platforms.
World Gold Council (WGC)
 WGC is an international trade association for
the go ld industry formed in 1987 by some
of the world’s most forward-thinking
mining companies.
 Governance: The World Gold Council is
governed by the Board of Directors,
composed of member company
representatives (Chairperson or Chief
Executive Officer) and the World Gold
Council’s Chief Executive Officer.
 Members: The World Gold Council’s 32
Members.
It is headquartered in London and has
offices in India, China, Singapore, the UAE
and the United States.
Budgetary Allocation for Urban Development
Syllabus: GS 3/Economy
In News
 In 2025, the government allocated ₹96,777
crore for urban development, an increase
from the previous year, but after adjusting
for inflation, this marks a reduction.
Key Highlights of the Budget
 Key schemes like the Pradhan Mantri Awas
Yojana (PMAY) saw significant cuts,
reflecting a gap between policy ambitions
and actual spending.
 Transfers to Urban Local Bodies
(ULBs) were reduced, and revenue loss due
to GST has compounded the issue.
 Central Sector Schemes, especially for metro
projects, received higher funding, but urban
programs like Swachh Bharat Mission, and
Smart Cities Mission faced cuts.
 The introduction of a ₹10,000 crore Urban
Challenge Fund highlights a focus on capital-
intensive infrastructure projects, with
limited attention on sustainable
development, employment generation, and
social equity.
Urbanization Growth
 India’s urbanisation is driven by economic
distress, unlike the Global North where it
followed industrialisation and colonial
wealth transfer.
 India’s urbanisation is categorized as
“poverty-driven urbanisation” with both
rural-to-urban and urban-to-urban
migration.
 The COVID-19 pandemic highlighted the
inadequacies of urban planning, with
reverse migration showing gaps in
infrastructure.
Key Urban Challenges in India
 Lack of precise data on urban population
(2021 Census missing); around 40% of
India’s population is urban.
 Planning Issues: Spatial plans are outdated,
causing overcrowding and slums.
 Plans focus on capital growth rather than
addressing people’s needs.
 Climate Change Impact: Pollution, urban
flooding, and heat island effects severely
affect cities, especially in Delhi’s NCR
region.
 Governance Challenges: Despite the 74th
Constitutional Amendment, urban planning
in Indian cities is controlled by
undemocratic bodies.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
130
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Cities receive a minimal 0.5% of GDP in
intergovernmental transfers.
Initiatives
 Swachh Bharat Mission-Urban (SBM-U)
2.0 was launched on October 1st, 2021 for a
period of five years with a vision of
achieving safe sanitation and scientific
processing of municipal solid waste in all
cities.
 AMRUT 2.0 was launched on 1st October
2021 to make cities ‘self-reliant’ and ‘water
secure’.
 The Smart Cities Mission was launched to
enhance the quality of life in 100 selected
cities by providing efficient services, robust
infrastructure, and a sustainable
environment.
 The Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana-Urban
(PMAY-U) 2.0 aims to construct 1 crore
houses for urban poor and middle-class
families over the next five years, with an
investment of ₹10 lakh crore and a
government subsidy of ₹2.30 lakh crore.
 Street Vending Plans: Development of 100
weekly ‘haats’ or street food hubs in select
cities.
 States encouraged to create street-vending
plans for more hubs as per local needs
Suggestions and Way Forward
 The progress has been made towards
Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) but
still urban areas struggle with poverty,
inequality, and environmental degradation.
 The challenges faced by Indian cities call for
comprehensive national interventions to
improve urban planning, governance, and
infrastructure.
 Urban development requires sustained
investments, with cities being recognized as
growth hubs.
 There is a need to focus on sustainable, low-
rise, radial development over high-rise
buildings to prevent urban sprawl and
reduce carbon emissions.
India’s Pharmaceutical Exports Set for 10x Growth
Syllabus: GS 3/Economy
In News
 India’s Pharmaceutical exports are projected
to reach $350 billion by 2047, a 10-15 times
increase from current levels.
About India’s Pharmaceutical industry
 It has gained international recognition as
the “Pharmacy of the World,” particularly
for its imperative role in supplying vaccines,
essential medicines, and medical supplies
during the COVID-19 pandemic and
beyond.
 The sector has showcased its innovative
capabilities and established itself as a
crucial global pharmaceutical value chain
member.
Current Status in the Global Market:
 India is the largest supplier of generic
drugs globally, accounting for 20% of global
sales.
 India ranks third globally in
drug and pharmaceutical production by
volume.
 India exports to approximately 200
countries and territories.
 The top five destinations for these exports
are the USA, Belgium, South Africa, the UK,
and Brazil.
 India ranks 11th in pharmaceutical export
value, despite being a major global supplier
of generics.
 The total annual turnover of
pharmaceuticals in FY24 was ₹4.17 lakh
crore, growing at an average rate of 10.1
per cent in the last five years.
Export Projections
 India’s pharmaceutical exports are expected
to grow from $27 billion in 2023 to $65
billion by 2030.
 The shift from volume-based to value-
driven growth is key to India’s
pharmaceutical sector.
 Focus areas for growth
include ActivePharmaceutical Ingredients
(APIs), biosimilars, and specialty generics.
API Market Growth:
 India’s API exports are projected to grow
from $5 billion to $80-90 billion by 2047.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
131
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Global supply chain diversification,
particularly due to the U.S. Biosecure Act,
presents an opportunity for India to
strengthen API production.
Biosimilars Market Growth:
 Indian biosimilar exports, currently valued
at $0.8 billion, are expected to grow fivefold
to $4.2 billion by 2030 and $30-35 billion by
2047. Increased R&D, regulatory
simplifications, and capacity expansion will
support this growth.
 Biosimilars are medications that
closely resemble biologic drugs, produced
through living systems such as yeast,
bacteria, or animal cells, and exhibit
comparable structure and function.
Generic Formulations Growth:
 Generic formulations make up 70% of
India’s pharmaceutical exports, valued at
$19 billion.
 These are projected to grow to $180-190
billion by 2047, with a shift towards higher-
margin specialty generics.
Policy and Strategic Measures
 The Government of India has implemented
several initiatives to promote the
pharmaceutical sector and boost
investment.
 In September 2020, the government
introduced the Production Linked Incentive
(PLI) scheme for the pharmaceutical sector
under the Self-Reliant India initiative, with a
financial outlay of worth Rs.15,000 Crore,
and the scheme duration is from 2020-2021
to 2028-29.
 Now ,there is a need for targeted policy
measures, strengthening the API industry,
addressing export barriers, and establishing
country-specific export strategies.
 India supplies 55-60% of UNICEF’s vaccines
but needs to focus more on high-value
markets via clinical trials and
manufacturing investments.
 Regulatory harmonization, expansion of
production-linked incentives (PLI), and
R&D incentives will be key enablers.
India’s FDI Policy Framework for Investments
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
 The Government has put in place a policy
framework for Foreign Direct Investment
(FDI) that is transparent, predictable, and
easily comprehensible.
What is Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) ?
 It refers to investments made by foreign
entities (individuals or companies) in the
business interests of another country,
typically in the form of ownership or control
of enterprises.
 At present, FDI is prohibited in lottery,
gambling and betting, chit funds, Nidhi
company, real estate business, and
manufacturing of cigars, cheroots, cigarillos
and cigarettes using tobacco.
Routes for FDI in India
 Automatic Route: No prior approval is
required.
 Investors need to inform the Reserve Bank
of India (RBI) after making the investment.
 Most sectors, such as manufacturing and
software, fall under this route.
 Government Approval Route: Requires prior
approval from the concerned Ministry or
Department.
 Sectors such as telecom, media,
pharmaceuticals, and insurance fall under
this route.
Key Features of FDI Policy Framework
 Automatic Route for FDI: More than 90% of
FDI inflows occur through the automatic
route, minimizing regulatory bottlenecks.
 Sectoral Liberalization: Recent policy
relaxations in Defence, Insurance,
Petroleum & Natural Gas, Telecom, and
Space have improved investment
opportunities.
 Insurance Sector Reforms: The Union
Budget 2025 announced an increase in the
sectoral cap for the insurance sector
from 74% to 100%, provided the entire
premium is invested in India.
 Competitive Federalism: The government
promotes healthy competition through

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
132
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
different initiatives to showcase positive
business ecosystems and logistics
performance across states and UTs.
 Business Reforms Action Plan (BRAP)
rankings,
 Logistics Ease Across Different States
(LEADS) report, and
 Investment Friendliness Index of States
(announced in Union Budget 2025).
Importance of FDI
 Balance of Payments (BoP): FDI helps bridge
the current account deficit by bringing in
foreign capital.
 Currency Stability: Healthy inflows support
the value of the rupee in global markets.
 Technology Transfer: FDI facilitates the
transfer of advanced technologies and
managerial skills, boosting productivity and
competitiveness.
 Multiplier Effects: FDI has indirect positive
impacts on related sectors, leading to
increased production, exports, and
employment generation.
Steps taken by Government
 Liberalized FDI Policy: Increased FDI limits
in defense (74%), insurance (74%), and
single-brand retail (100%).
 Production-Linked Incentive (PLI)
Schemes: Launched in sectors like
electronics, pharma, textiles, and
automobiles to attract foreign investment.
 Infrastructure Development: Programs like
Gati Shakti, Bharatmala, and Sagarmala
focus on improving connectivity.
 Digital Ecosystem: Promotion of digital
payments, e-governance, and technology-
driven reforms.
Way Ahead
 Prioritize Infrastructure Capex: Ensure
timely project execution and attract public-
private partnerships (PPPs).
 Workforce Skilling: Collaborate with the
private sector to upskill the workforce to
meet industry demands.
 Strengthen R&D and Innovation: Promote
research and development to enhance
productivity and innovation in key sectors.

Challenges
 India is dealing with several challenges,
including tackling intellectual property
rights, lack of research and development etc.
 Understanding the political, economic,
sociocultural, technological, environmental,
and legal factors is vital for assessing the
opportunities and challenges in the
pharmaceutical market in India.
Conclusion and Way Ahead:
 India is already a global leader in generic
drug supply and aims to move up the value
chain with specialty generics, biosimilars,
and innovative products.
 This shift could help India secure a position
among the top five nations in export value
by 2047.
 India has set its goal to be the “healthcare
custodian of the world,” with a focus on
innovation, R&D, and regulatory processes.
 And collaboration between academia,
industry, and government is key to building
a globally competitive pharmaceutical
sector.
The Income-tax Bill, 2025
Syllabus: GS3/Economy

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
133
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Context
 The government has proposed a new bill to
repeal and replace the 60-year-old Income-
tax Act, 1961, with a simpler and more
efficient tax framework.
About
 Income Tax Bill 2025 aims to simplify
Income Tax Act 1961.
 The new bill reduces chapters and words
for enhanced clarity.
 It aims to reduce litigation and enhance
compliance.
 Once passed, the proposed legislation will
be called the Income Tax Act, 2025, and is
expected to take effect in April 2026.

Key Features
Qualitative Improvements
 Simplified language, making the law more
accessible.
 Consolidation of amendments, reducing
fragmentation.
 Removal of obsolete and redundant
provisions for greater clarity.
 Structural rationalization through tables
and formulae for improved readability.
 Preservation of existing taxation principles,
ensuring continuity while enhancing
usability.
 Crypto as Property: Virtual digital assets
such as cryptocurrencies have been
included in the definition of property to be
counted as a capital asset.
 Dispute Resolution: It provides the points of
determination, decision, and the reasons
behind it, marking a shift from the earlier
section, which lacked clarity on the manner
of issuing DRP directions.
 Capital Gain Exemptions: Section 54E of the
Act, which details exemptions for capital
gains on transfer of capital assets prior to
April 1992 has been removed.
 Tax Year: The Bill introduces the concept of
“tax year”, which has been defined as the
12-month period beginning April 1.
Conclusion
 Once the Bill is passed in the Parliament, it
will be sent to a Parliamentary Standing
Committee on Finance for reviewing.
 After a call is taken on including any
proposed amendments, the government will
decide the date for rolling out the new
income tax law.
Parliamentary Panel Recommends Minimum Price
for Paddy Residue to Curb Stubble Burning
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
In News
 A parliamentary panel has recommended
establishing a minimum price mechanism
for paddy residue, similar to the Minimum
Support Price (MSP) for crops, to discourage
stubble burning.
Stubble Burning
 Stubble burning is the practice of setting fire
to crop residue (paddy stubble) left after
harvesting to quickly clear fields for the
next crop.
 It is primarily practiced in Punjab, Haryana,
and western Uttar Pradesh during October-
November to prepare fields for rabi wheat
sowing.
 Stubble burning leads to severe air
pollution in Delhi-NCR, causing smog and
high PM2.5 levels, worsening respiratory
diseases.
 It harms soil fertility by destroying
beneficial microbes, leading to increased
dependence on chemical fertilizers.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
134
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 The practice also releases greenhouse
gases (CO₂, CH₄, N₂O), contributing to
climate change and global warming.
Why Do Farmers Burn Stubble?
 Farmers burn stubble due to time
constraints between paddy harvesting and
wheat sowing.
 High costs of alternative methods, despite
subsidies, discourage mechanized residue
management.
 Lack of a fixed market price makes selling
paddy straw unprofitable.
 Limited awareness and inadequate
incentives further push farmers toward
burning as a quick solution.
Key Recommendations made
 Minimum Price for Paddy Residue: A
mechanism should be set up in consultation
with the Commission for Air Quality
Management (CAQM) to benchmark and
notify minimum prices annually before the
Kharif harvest season.
 This price should cover farmers’ collection
costs, including labour and machinery
expenses.
 Subsidies: The government should subsidize
machinery like happy seeders, rotavators,
and mulchers for in-situ paddy straw
management.
 Promotion of Short-Duration Paddy
Varieties: The committee urged state
governments to discourage long-duration
paddy varieties like PUSA 44 and promote
short-duration alternatives.
 Developing a National Bioenergy Policy: A
unified national policy to integrate
agricultural residue into bioenergy
roduction.
 Others: Address ex-situ crop residue
management costs, provide financial
incentives, improve supply chain
infrastructure, and raise awareness among
farmers to ensure economic viability and
environmental sustainability.
Changing Employment Sector in India
Syllabus: GS3/Economy
Context
 The trend of organised employment has
been shifting from the public to private
sector — especially post the economic
reforms of 1991.
About
 India’s middle class after Independence was
largely created by the public sector.
 Employment in the public sector stood at
194.7 lakh and that in the organised private
sector only at 80.6 lakh in 1995.
 The employees in the central and state
governments plus quasi-governments
(public sector undertakings) and local
bodies — fell to 176.1 lakh and the latter
rose to 119.7 lakh by 2012.
Major Trends
 Regular employees with the Indian
Railways: Between 1990-91 and 2022-23,
these plunged from 16.5 lakh to 11.9 lakh.
 Employees in the IT Sector: Tata
Consultancy Services (TCS) and Infosys
already had 45,714 and 36,750 employees
respectively at the end of 2004-05, which
rose to 4,48,464 and 2,42,371 fifteen years
later.
 Banking sector transformation: In 1991-92,
of the total employee strength of the
scheduled commercial banks in India the
Public sector banks had a share of 87%.
 At the end of 2023-24, the private employee
strength was 8.74 lakh, as against the less
than 7.5 lakh of public sector banks.

Reasons for the Transformation of Working Middle
Class in India:
 Economic Liberalization: Post-1991 reforms
opened up the economy, leading to the
growth of the private sector and more job
opportunities.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
135
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Higher Salaries and Benefits: The private
sector often offers better pay, career
growth, and benefits compared to public
sector jobs, attracting the middle class.
 Improved Work Culture: It provides a more
dynamic and performance-driven
environment, which appeals to the
ambitious working middle class.
 Limited Public Sector Jobs: The growth of
public sector jobs has stagnated, and
competition for these positions is high,
making private sector jobs more attractive.
 Entrepreneurial Opportunities: The rise in
entrepreneurial ventures and startups has
encouraged the middle class to shift
towards private businesses and self-
employment.
Challenges faced by India
 Employment in the Agriculture Sector: India
has not experienced structural
transformation of surplus labour from
agriculture to other sectors.
 As per the Periodic Labour Force Surveys
(PLFS) farm sector’s share in India’s
workforce decreased from 64% in 1993-94
to 42.5% in 2018-19, but is subsequently
going up to 46.2% in 2023-24.
Most services sector jobs are informal and low-
paying:
 India with almost 85% informal labour is
generating more than half of the country’s
GDP.
 A high proportion of socially and
economically underprivileged sections of
society are concentrated in informal
economic activities.
Reasons for Increase in the Share of Informal Sector
in India’s Employment:
 Unskilled Labour: The education system
emphasises theoretical knowledge over
practical proficiency. This approach renders
new graduates ill-prepared to meet
industry demands.
 Rural-Urban Divide: Inaccessible areas are
hardly getting quality programmes for their
training and industry exposure.
 Technological Changes: The rise of gig
economy platforms and casual labor
opportunities has expanded the informal
sector.
 Flexibility: Many workers prefer the
flexibility of informal work, even though it
lacks benefits like healthcare and pensions.
Challenges Related to Informal Sector in India
 Low Wages and Exploitation: Informal
employment, by definition, lacks a written
contract, paid leave, and hence does not pay
minimum wages or pay attention to
working conditions.
 Lack of Social Security: Workers in the
informal sector often lack access to social
security benefits such as healthcare,
pensions, and unemployment insurance.
 Limited Access to Finance: Informal sector
workers and businesses often struggle to
access formal financial services such as
bank loans and credit.
 Poor Quality of Life: Unorganized sector
workers were far more likely to be poor
than their organised sector counterparts.
Way Forward
 Bridging the Gap in Education: Aligning
Education with Industry Demand Changes
will prepare students for real-world
challenges.
 Government Initiatives: The programmes
can focus on areas like installation of solar
energy, waste management, and precision
agriculture.
 Public-private partnerships in the green
sector can ensure that such training is
relevant and impactful.
 Strengthening Rural Skilling
Initiatives: Leveraging technology to scale
online platforms can ensure equitable
access to quality education.
 Incentivising for Retention of
Employees: Offering tailored upskilling
programmes, encouraging inclusive work
cultures, and having mental health support
can enhance employee satisfaction and
retention.
Sovereign Green Bonds
Syllabus: GS3/Economy
Context

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
136
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Like several emerging markets, India also
turned to sovereign green bonds to help
fund its transition to a low-carbon economy,
but investor demand remains weak.
About
 Since 2022-23, India has issued SGrBs eight
times, and raised almost Rs 53,000 crore.
 India’s SGrB issues have struggled to gain
traction due to muted investor demand,
making it difficult for the government to
secure a greenium.
 Globally, greeniums have reached 7-8 basis
points, in India it is often at just 2–3 basis
points.
Green Bonds
 Green bonds are debt instruments issued by
governments, corporations, and multilateral
banks to raise funds for projects that reduce
emissions or enhance climate resilience.
 Issuers typically offer green bonds at lower
yields than conventional bonds, assuring
investors that the proceeds will be used
exclusively for green investments.
 Greenium: The difference in yield — known
as the green premium, or greenium —
determines the cost advantage of green
bonds.
 A higher greenium allows issuers to raise
funds at lower costs, making green
investments more attractive.
 Sovereign green bonds (SGrBs) are those
that are issued by sovereign entities, like
the Government of India, which formulated
a framework for issuing such bonds in 2022.
 The framework defines “green projects” as
those that encourage energy efficiency in
resource utilisation, reduce carbon
emissions, promote climate resilience, and
improve natural ecosystems.
Source: IE
Andhra Pradesh Promoting Work From Home for
Women
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
 Andhra Pradesh Chief Minister has
announced plans to expand work-from-
home (WFH) opportunities, particularly
targeting women professionals in the state.
About
 The Andhra Pradesh IT & Global Capability
Centres (GCC) Policy 4.0 is designed to
attract top IT companies and facilitate
employment growth.
 A key feature of the policy is encouraging
corporations to provide WFH options more
liberally. This move aims to:
 Foster work-life balance for women
professionals.
 Ensure equal access to growth
opportunities in science and technology
fields.
 Make employment more accessible for
women with familial responsibilities.
Policy on Work-from-Home in India
 Unlike some countries with formal remote
work regulations, India does not have
explicit laws governing WFH policies.
 Companies determine work hours and
expectations through internal employment
contracts.
 The government, however, has encouraged
WFH in specific cases, such as maternity
leave or roles that permit remote work.
 Despite the initial surge in WFH adoption
during the COVID-19 pandemic, many
Indian IT firms have since mandated return-
to-office policies.
Arguments in Favour of Work-from-Home
 Cost Savings: WFH has significantly reduced
commuting costs and allowed employees to
live in more affordable areas, leading to
financial benefits for both individuals and
organizations.
 Improved Work-Life Balance: WFH can offer
greater flexibility to manage work and
personal responsibilities, such as childcare
or eldercare, which often
disproportionately fall on women.
 Increased Flexibility: Employees can
manage their time more efficiently,
improving work-life balance, especially for
women who juggle professional and
personal responsibilities.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
137
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Higher Energy Levels: Reduced travel time
has enhanced employee productivity and
well-being.
 Employer Benefits: Organizations benefit
from reduced office rental costs and lower
expenses related to client meetings.
Arguments against WFH
 Hindered Collaboration: The absence of
physical interactions affects teamwork,
trust-building, and problem-solving
capabilities.
 Organizational Culture Challenges: WFH
weakens social, emotional, and human
capital formation, impacting long-term
workplace cohesion.
 Lack of Recognition: WFH can make it
harder for women to be visible and
recognized for their contributions,
potentially leading to missed opportunities
for promotions and raises.
Way Ahead
 Implement Hybrid Models: A mix of remote
and in-office work can provide flexibility
while maintaining collaboration.
 Invest in Digital Infrastructure: Enhanced
communication tools can bridge the gap in
teamwork and productivity.
 Develop Inclusive Policies: Organizations
should ensure that remote workers,
especially women, receive equal
opportunities for growth and leadership
roles.
Concluding remarks
 Andhra Pradesh’s WFH initiative for women
has the potential to set a precedent for
gender-inclusive employment policies in
India.
 However, achieving long-term success will
require strategic implementation and
continuous evaluation of its impact on
productivity and workforce engagement.
Mutual Credit Guarantee Scheme For MSMEs
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
 The Union government launched the
‘Mutual Credit Guarantee Scheme for
MSMEs’, announced in the Union Budget
2025-26 to boost the micro, small, and
medium enterprises.
About
 The scheme facilitates collateral-free loans
to MSMEs by providing loans up to Rs 100
crore for the purchase of plant, machinery,
or equipment.
 Under this scheme, the National Credit
Guarantee Trustee Company Ltd
(NCGTC) will provide 60% guarantee
coverage to member lending institutions
(MLIs) for loans sanctioned to eligible
MSMEs.
 The borrower must be an MSME with a
valid Udyam Registration Number.
 The guaranteed loan amount will not
exceed Rs 100 crore, although the total
project cost can be higher.
 Additionally, at least 75% of the project cost
must be for purchasing equipment or
machinery.
Source: AIR
Kerala’s Plan to Grant Industry Status to Tourism
Syllabus :GS 3/ Economy
In News
 The Kerala government is planning to grant
‘industry status’ to tourism, a long-standing
demand of the tourism and hospitality
sector.
Granting industry status
 It provides benefits like reduced power
tariffs, water tariffs, and property taxes,
promoting investment and job creation.
 The Ministry of Tourism has launched a
handbook which aims to serve as a guide to
States/UTs to support efforts of States/UTs
in granting and implementing ‘industry
status’ for the tourism and hospitality
sector.
Objectives and Need
 The tourism sector, which employs 5 lakh
people directly and 20 lakh indirectly, has
struggled due to natural disasters, the
COVID-19 pandemic, and a major landslide
in 2024.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
138
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 The recent move aims to boost investment
and development in the sector, which
contributes around 10% to the State’s GDP.

Source :TH
Bharat Tex 2025 For Textile Industry
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
 Bharat Tex 2025, India’s largest global
textile event, took place in New Delhi,
highlighting the country’s textile
innovations and international trade
opportunities.
About
 Bharat Tex 2025 served as a platform to
accelerate the government’s “Farm to Fibre,
Fabric, Fashion, and Foreign Markets”
vision.
 The event featured over 5,000
exhibitors and more than 1,20,000 trade
visitors, from 120+ countries including
global CEOs, policymakers, and industry
leaders, attended the event.
India’s Textile Industry
 India is the sixth-largest exporter of textiles
globally, contributing 8.21% to the
country’s total exports in 2023-24.
 The sector holds a 4.5% share in global
trade, with the United States and European
Union accounting for 47% of India’s textile
and apparel exports.
 The industry provides direct employment to
over 45 million people.

Supportive Policy Framework
 Prime Minister Mega Integrated Textile
Region and Apparel (PM MITRA) Parks
Scheme: 7 mega textile parks with an
expected investment of USD 10 Bn are being
set up with world class infrastructure, plug
and play facilities and an integrated
ecosystem.
 Production Linked Incentive (PLI)
Scheme with approved incentives of INR
10,683 crore to promote production of Man-
made fibers (MMF) Apparel, MMF Fabrics
and Products of Technical Textiles.
 Samarth: The scheme is a demand-driven
and placement-oriented program to build
Capacity, address skill gaps in the textile
value chain.
 National Handloom Development
Programme (NHDP): Financial and market
support for handloom weavers.
 Raw Material Support: Promotion of cotton,
jute, silk, and wool to improve quality and
yield.
Challenges Facing India’s Textile Industry
 High Raw Material Costs: Fluctuating cotton,
jute, and synthetic fiber prices.
 Outdated Technology: Low adoption of
automation and modern machinery.
 Global Competition: Strong competition
from China, Vietnam and Bangladesh.
 Environmental Regulations: Compliance
with sustainability norms and pollution
control.
 Skilled Labor Shortage: Workforce needs
upskilling to meet industry demands.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
139
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Supply Chain Issues: Logistics inefficiencies
and export-import bottlenecks.
 Limited Market Access: Trade barriers, high
tariffs, and FTA limitations.
Way Ahead
 Technology Upgradation: Invest in
automation and modern machinery.
 Sustainable Practices: Promote eco-friendly
production and waste management.
 Skill Development: Strengthen workforce
training through Samarth and other
initiatives.
 Global Market Expansion: Leverage FTAs
and improve export competitiveness.
 Raw Material Security: Enhance cotton, jute,
silk, and wool production.
NAKSHA Program
Syllabus :GS 3/Economy
In News
 The Union Minister of Rural Development
and Agriculture inaugurated the NAKSHA
program in Raisen, Madhya Pradesh.
Digitization of land records
 The digitization of land records is
modernizing land ownership management
in rural India, addressing challenges like
complex paperwork and ownership
disputes.
 Status: Nearly 95% of rural land records
have been digitized since 2016, improving
transparency and accessibility.
Benefits of Digitization
 It enhances transparency and reduces
illegal encroachments.
 It simplifies dispute resolution and reduces
court burdens.
 It empowers marginalized communities by
improving access to land rights.
 Geospatial mapping integration aids in
accurate surveys and land management.
Challenges
 Land reforms face significant challenges due
to outdated and missing land records across
the country, especially in northeastern
states with community-owned land and
limited land records.
 Many cadastral maps are outdated and
some are missing, causing discrepancies in
land ownership.
Initiatives
 Digital India Land Records Modernization
Programme (DILRMP): DILRMP, launched in
April 2016, aims to create a modern,
transparent land records system with real-
time land information.
 Fully funded by the central government, it
aims to reduce land disputes, prevent fraud,
and optimize land use.
 NAKSHA program : It is expected to cost
₹194 crore, fully funded by the Government
of India.
 The program covers 152 Urban Local
Bodies (ULBs) across 26 states and 3 Union
Territories.
 Survey of India is Technical partner,
responsible for aerial surveys and
orthorectified imagery.
 Madhya Pradesh State Electronic
Development Corporation
(MPSEDC) develops the end-to-end web-GIS
platform.
 National Informatics Centre Services Inc.
(NICSI) provides storage facilities.
 Objective: Aims to create and update urban
land records for accurate and reliable
documentation of land ownership.
 SVAMITVA Scheme: The Ministry of
Panchayati Raj (MoPR) is implementing the
Central Sector Scheme SVAMITVA with the
aim to provide the ‘Record of Rights’ to
village household owners possessing
houses in inhabited areas in villages.
Conclusion and Way Forward
 The government’s initiative is
revolutionizing land governance by
increasing transparency and accessibility,
especially for marginalized communities.
 This shift towards organized, efficient land
record management contributes to a more
inclusive and equitable society, fostering
economic growth and stability.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
140
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
RBI to Raise Deposit Insurance Cover
Syllabus: GS3/Economy
Context
 The government is considering increasing
the insurance cover for bank deposits from
the current limit of Rs 5 lakh.
About
 Deposit insurance was introduced in India
in 1962, and coverage has thus far been
enhanced six times – from Rs 1,500 per
depositor to Rs 5 lakh now.
 The deposit insurance scheme was started
with 287 banks in 1962; the number of
insured banks was 1,997 as of March 31,
2024.
What is Deposit Insurance Cover?
 The Deposit Insurance and Credit
Guarantee Corporation (DICGC) is
a subsidiary of the Reserve Bank of India
(RBI).
 It insures deposits held in Indian banks,
providing protection in the event of a bank
failure.
 Cover: DICGC currently offers insurance
coverage of up to ₹5 lakh per depositor, per
bank.
 This includes the total of both principal and
interest amounts in all types of accounts,
such as savings, fixed, current, and
recurring deposits.
 DICGC covers deposits in various types of
banks, including: Commercial Banks (public,
private, and foreign banks), Cooperative
Banks (central, state, and urban co-
operatives) and Regional Rural Banks
(RRBs).
How does it work:
 Registration: Banks must register with
DICGC to offer deposit insurance.
 Premium Payment: Banks pay a fixed
premium to DICGC, which is not passed on
to depositors.
 Claim Process: If a bank fails, DICGC
reimburses depositors up to ₹5 lakh after
verifying claims submitted by the
liquidator.
Limitations:
 Coverage Limit: The ₹5 lakh limit may not
be sufficient for individuals or businesses
with large deposit amounts.
 Exclusions: Government and interbank
deposits are not covered under DICGC.
 Claims Processing Time: Though deposits
are insured, the payout may take time as
claims are handled through the bank’s
liquidator.
Significance of DICGC for Depositors:
 Protection Against Bank Failures: Deposits
are protected, up to ₹5 lakh, even if the
bank goes bankrupt.
 Encouraging Savings: With insurance
protection, depositors are more confident in
saving their money in banks.
 Broad Coverage: DICGC covers most types of
banks, providing widespread protection.
Way Ahead
 In light of recent bank crises, such as the
issues faced by New India Co-operative
Bank, there is an ongoing proposal to
increase the insurance limit.
 If approved, the increase in the insurance
limit would offer greater protection for
depositors, especially those with higher
deposits in banks.
 This would provide additional security and
enhance trust in the banking system.
Committee to Review India’s Insurance Sector
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
 The Economic Survey 2025 projecting the
Insurance sector as the fastest-growing
among G20 nations. However, certain
challenges necessitate a comprehensive
review of the sector.
 In response, the government has set up
a Committee chaired by Dinesh Khara to
Review the Insurance Sector, aiming
to modernize regulations, enhance consumer
protection, and boost investment.
Background: The Evolution of India’s Insurance
Sector

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
141
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 The insurance sector in India has evolved
through various policy reforms and
regulatory developments.
Key milestones:
 1938: The Insurance Act, 1938, was passed
during British India to regulate the
insurance sector. It provides the legal
framework for the functioning of the
insurance industry through IRDAI.
 The act defines types of insurance policies
in India: life, general, and health insurance.
 1956: Life Insurance Corporation of India
(LIC) was nationalized.
 1972: General insurance was nationalized.
 1999: The Insurance Regulatory and
Development Authority of India (IRDAI) was
established, opening up the sector to
private players.
 2015: FDI limit increased to 49% (later
raised to 74% in 2021).
 2025 Economic Survey: Highlights the need
for further reforms due to increased
digitalization, rising risks, and global market
trends.
Why Are Insurance Reforms Needed?
Low Insurance Penetration & Density:
 Insurance penetration declined from 4% in
FY23 to 3.7% in FY24, below the global
average.
 Life insurance penetration dropped from 3%
to 2.8%, while non-life insurance remained
at 1%.
Regulatory Gaps & Need for Simplification:
 Fragmented regulations across life, non-life,
and health insurance.
 Need for faster claim settlements,
improved consumer grievance redressal,
and enhanced digital security.
Emerging Risks & Cybersecurity Challenges:
 Climate change, geopolitical uncertainties,
and cyber threats are reshaping risk
management.
 Digital fraud and misselling have emerged as
major consumer concerns.
Boosting Innovation & Investment:
 Technological advancements (AI,
blockchain, and insurtech) require
a regulatory framework that fosters
innovation.
 Foreign investments in the sector need
further ease of regulations.
Expanding Rural & MSME Coverage:
 Government schemes like PMFBY and
Ayushman Bharat have expanded coverage,
but private sector participation remains
limited.
 Microinsurance for MSMEs, gig workers, and
rural communities needs customized
policies.
Way Ahead
Regulatory Modernization:
 Streamline IRDAI guidelines for uniformity
across sectors.
 Improve consumer protection laws for
faster claim settlements.
Enhancing Insurance Penetration:
 Encourage new insurance products tailored
for rural areas, MSMEs, and gig workers.
 Strengthen financial literacy programs to
increase awareness.
Strengthening Cybersecurity & Digital Oversight:
 Establish robust cybersecurity norms for
digital insurance.
 Improve fraud detection using AI-driven
solutions.
Encouraging Insurtech & Innovation:
 Simplify compliance for tech-driven
insurance startups.
 Promote usage-based and AI-driven
insurance models.
Attracting Investments & Improving Market
Competitiveness:
 Further liberalization of FDI policies to
attract global players.
 Ensure a level playing field between public
and private insurers.
Conclusion

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
142
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 The Committee to Review the Insurance
Sector marks a critical step in reforming
India’s insurance landscape.
 By focusing on regulatory simplification,
financial inclusion, digital security, and
innovation, India can unlock the full
potential of its insurance market and
ensure sustainable growth in the coming
years.
Inland Waterways Terminal (IWT)
Syllabus: GS 3/Economy
In News
 Union Minister of Ports, Shipping and
Waterways inaugurated an Inland
Waterways Terminal (IWT) on
Brahmaputra in Assam’s Jogighopa.
About
 The IWT is an important port of call for
trade with Bangladesh given the MoU
signed between India & Bangladesh for
developing the economic corridor
under Bharatmala Programme.
 A port of call is a stop made by a ship to load
or unload cargo, embark or disembark
passengers, or allow crew changes on an
offshore vessel.
 Also, it will enhance logistics and
connectivity in Eastern India, boosting
trilateral trade with India, Bhutan, and
Bangladesh.
Growth of Inland Waterways Sector
 The IWT sector has seen a 767% increase in
operational national waterways, a 727%
increase in cargo handled, and a 62% rise in
multi-modal terminals.
 Cargo traffic has grown from 18 million
tonnes a decade ago to 133 million tonnes
in FY 2023-24.

RBI Restrictions on New India Co-operative Bank
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy
Context
 The RBI’s restrictions on New India Co-
operative Bank highlight ongoing
vulnerabilities within the urban cooperative
banking sector.
What are Cooperative Banks?
 Cooperative Banks refer to those financial
institutions under the Banking System in
India that operate on the principles of
cooperation and mutual benefit for their
members.
 They belong to their members who are both
the owners and customers of the bank.
 They operate on the principle of “one
person, one vote” in decision-making. Along
with lending, these banks also accept
deposits.
Regulation of Cooperative Banks in India
 These banks in India, broadly, come under
the dual control of:
 Reserve Bank of India: Under the Banking
Regulation Act, 1949, and the Banking Laws
(Application to Co-operative Societies) Act,
1965, the RBI is responsible for regulating
banking aspects of these banks, such as
capital adequacy, risk control, and lending
norms.
 Registrar of Co-operative Societies (RCS) of
respective State or Central
Government: They are responsible for
regulation of management-related aspects
of these banks, such as incorporation,
registration, management, audit,
supersession of board of directors, and
liquidation.
Structure of Cooperative Banks in India
 These banks, under the Banking System in
India, are primarily categorized into – Rural
Cooperative Banks (RCBS), and Urban
Cooperative Banks (UCBS).
 They are further sub-categorised as shown
below:

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
143
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in

Urban Cooperative Banks (UCBs)
 They operate in urban and semi-urban
areas and mainly lend to small borrowers
and businesses.
 Based on their regulation regime, they are
categorized into two types – Scheduled
Banks and Non-Scheduled Banks.
Issues in Urban Cooperative Banks (UCBs)
 Cooperative Banks are facing financial
vulnerabilities such as low capitalization,
high levels of NPAs, and low
Capital Adequacy Ratio (CAR).
 A large number of big Cooperative banks
have failed due to financial scams. Ex-
Punjab and Maharashtra Cooperative (PMC)
bank, Guru Raghavendra Cooperative Bank
and Maharashtra State Cooperative (MSC)
Bank have failed due to financial frauds.
Reasons for Recurring Issues in the UCBs
 Regulatory Arbitrage: Cooperative banks
escape stringent RBI scrutiny compared to
commercial banks.
 Political Interference: Many cooperative
banks are influenced by local politicians,
leading to poor governance.
 Limited Technological Adoption: Many UCBs
lack robust digital infrastructure, making
them susceptible to operational
inefficiencies and fraud.
 Weak Risk Management
Practices: Inadequate internal controls
result in unchecked lending, increasing bad
loans.
Measures to Strengthen the Cooperative Banking
Sector
 Capital Adequacy Norms: Cooperative banks
should maintain higher capital buffers to
withstand financial shocks.
 Technology Upgradation: Adoption of digital
banking, fraud detection mechanisms, and
improved cyber security measures.
 Consolidation of Weak Banks: Merging
smaller, financially weak cooperative banks
with larger, stable ones will enhance their
resilience.
 Governance Framework: Stricter norms for
board composition, qualifications of
directors, and independent audits must be
enforced.
India’s Rising LNG Imports
Syllabus: GS 3/Economy
In News
 India’s LNG imports from the US reached a
record 7.14 billion cubic meters (BCM) in
the first 11 months of 2024, marking a 71%
year-over-year increase.
About LNG
 Liquefied Natural Gas (LNG) is natural gas
cooled to -162°C (-260°F), transforming it
into a liquid state for easier storage and
transport.
 Composed primarily of methane (90%),
LNG is odorless, colorless, non-toxic, and
non-corrosive.
India’s LNG Landscape
 As the world’s third-largest energy
consumer, India is experiencing the fastest-
growing energy demand globally.
 Economic growth is fueling higher energy
consumption, making LNG a strategic fuel
source.
 India’s LNG infrastructure includes import
terminals, pipelines, and distribution
networks serving power plants, industries,
and city gas systems.
 However, existing infrastructure faces
congestion and supply chain inefficiencies,
limiting its full potential.
US Overtakes UAE:

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
144
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 In 2023, the US became India’s second-
largest LNG supplier, overtaking the UAE,
while Qatar remains the top supplier.
 53.5% Growth in 2024: India’s LNG imports
from the US increased by 53.5% in 2024
compared to the entire 2023 calendar year.
Key Growth Drivers:
 US expansion in liquefaction capacity
 Competitive pricing
 Strategic proximity via the Cape of Good
Hope
Why Does India Need LNG?
 Energy Diversification: As India shifts away
from coal, LNG plays a key role in the clean
energy transition.
 Energy Transition & Net-Zero Goals: India is
shifting from coal-based power to LNG to
reduce carbon emissions and meet its net-
zero target by 2070.
 Industrial Demand: The industrial sector
requires cleaner energy, and LNG is a
suitable alternative due to its low emissions
and efficient combustion.
Urbanization & City Gas Networks:
 Growing urban areas are driving the
expansion of city gas distribution (CGD)
networks.
 Piped Natural Gas (PNG) is a cleaner and
safer alternative to traditional cooking fuels,
improving urban living standards.
Challenges in India’s LNG Sector
 Infrastructure Deficiencies: India aims to
increase natural gas share to 15% of its
energy mix by 2030, but LNG infrastructure
remains inadequate.
 Congested LNG terminals cause delays and
inefficiencies.
 Limited Pipeline Network: Underdeveloped
pipelines restrict LNG distribution to remote
areas.
 Storage Constraints: India’s limited LNG
storage capacity makes it vulnerable
to global price fluctuations and supply
disruptions.
Government Initiatives to Boost LNG
 Energy Transition Policy: Shift
towards cleaner fuels with a goal to increase
gas share to 15% by 2030.
 National Gas Grid Expansion: Strengthening
the LNG pipeline network to enhance supply
efficiency.
 Expansion of City Gas Distribution (CGD):
Accelerating urban access to Piped Natural
Gas (PNG) and Compressed Natural Gas
(CNG).
 Development of New LNG Terminals:
Expanding import and storage facilities.
 Priority Gas Allocation: Allocating domestic
natural gas to key sectors like CNG for
transport and PNG for households.
Liberalization of Gas Pricing:
 Marketing and pricing freedom for gas
from high-pressure, deepwater, and coal
seam sources, with a ceiling price
mechanism.
Sustainable Alternative Towards Affordable
Transportation (SATAT) Initiative:
 Promotes Bio-CNG as a clean alternative for
transportation.
Conclusion & Way Forward
 Investment Incentives: The government
must introduce policy measures to
encourage private and foreign investment in
LNG infrastructure.
 Regulatory Simplification: Streamlining
approval processes to accelerate LNG
terminal and pipeline expansion.
 Small-Scale LNG Development:
Supporting research and deployment of
small-scale LNG plants for decentralized
energy supply.
 Public-Private Partnerships (PPPs):
Collaborative efforts among government,
private sector, and financial institutions are
essential for building a resilient LNG
ecosystem.
INFRASTRUCTURE
Government to Lease Out 10 Airports via PPP Model
Syllabus: GS3/ Infrastructure
Context

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
145
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 The Union government is consulting on
leasing out more than 10 airports across the
country under the public-private
partnership (PPP) model.
 The government is leasing out the airports
to improve their management by utilising
private sector efficiency and investment.
Public-Private Partnership (PPP) Model
 The Public-Private Partnership (PPP) model
is a collaboration between the government
and private sector entities to deliver public
infrastructure and services efficiently.
 In India, PPPs have been widely used in
infrastructure, healthcare, education, and
urban development.
 Benefits: It leverages private sector
efficiency, investment, and expertise while
ensuring public sector oversight and social
welfare objectives.
Types of PPP Models
 Build-Operate-Transfer (BOT): The private
entity builds the infrastructure, operates it
for a specified period, and transfers it back
to the government.
 Build-Own-Operate (BOO): The private
player builds, owns, and operates the
project indefinitely.
 Design-Build-Finance-Operate (DBFO): The
private sector designs, builds, finances, and
operates the project for a concession period
before transferring it.
 Hybrid Annuity Model (HAM): The
government provides a portion of the
investment, reducing private risk while
ensuring efficiency.
 Swiss Challenge Method: A private player
proposes a project, and the government
invites competing bids before final
selection.
Significance of the PPP Model
 Technology Transfer: It facilitates the
adoption of modern technology and global
best practices.
 Reduces Fiscal Burden: The model lessens
the financial pressure on governments by
involving private capital.
 Improves Service Efficiency: Private sector
expertise brings efficiency, innovation, and
quality control.
Concerns with PPP Model
 Regulatory Uncertainty: Frequent policy
changes and bureaucratic hurdles deter
private investment.
 Financial Viability Issues: Long gestation
periods and cost overruns pose financial
risks.
 Risk Allocation Disputes: Poorly structured
contracts lead to conflicts between private
players and the government.
 Delays in Project Execution: Land
acquisition issues, environmental
clearances, and slow decision-making delay
projects.
Government Initiatives for Strengthening PPPs in
India
 National Infrastructure Pipeline (NIP): Aims
to boost PPP investments across sectors.
 Viability Gap Funding (VGF): Provides
financial support for infrastructure projects
to enhance their viability.
 India Infrastructure Project Development
Fund Scheme (IIPDF): The scheme provides
financial support for project development
expenses of PPP projects.
 National Monetisation Pipeline (NMP): The
initiative was announced in 2021 to create
infrastructure by tapping private sector
investment.
Concluding remarks
 The PPP model remains a vital tool for
infrastructure and service development in
India.
 While challenges persist, effective policy
measures and innovative financing
solutions can maximize the benefits of PPPs,
fostering sustainable economic growth.
SCIENCE AND TECH
Samudrayaan Mission
Syllabus: GS3/Science and Technology
Context

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
146
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Samudrayaan Mission has been allocated Rs 600
crore in Union Budget 2025-26.
About
 Launched in 2021, it is India’s first manned
ocean mission to explore the deep ocean.
 It is a project of the Ministry of Earth
Sciences (MoES) under the Deep Ocean
Mission.
 The technology is being developed by
the National Institute of Ocean Technology
(NIOT).
 NIOT is an autonomous institute under
MoES, has developed a 6000m depth-
rated Remotely Operated Vehicle (ROV)
‘Matsya 6000’.
 The mission aims to send three people to a
depth of 6,000 meters in a submersible
called the MATSYA 6000.
 The submersible will have an operational
endurance of 12 hours, which is extendable
up to 96 hours in the event of an
emergency.
Objectives of the Mission:
 To study deep-sea marine life.
 To explore the distribution of polymetallic
nodules, which are rich in minerals such as
copper, nickel, and cobalt.
 To study the impact of climate change on
the ocean.
 To develop India’s capabilities in deep-sea
exploration and research as well as develop
underwater vehicles and underwater
robotics.
 To develop offshore-based desalination
techniques, renewable energy generation
techniques, and provide clean drinking
water and explore the avenues of
desalination of water.
 So far, countries such as the U.S., Russia,
China, France and Japan have carried out
successful deep-ocean crewed missions.

India’s Nuclear Energy Roadmap: Union Budget
2025-26
Syllabus: GS3/ S&T
In News
 The government has set an ambitious target
of achieving 100 GW nuclear power capacity
by 2047, aligning with the objectives
of Viksit Bharat to ensure energy security,
sustainability, and reduced dependency on
fossil fuels.
Key Highlights of the Nuclear Energy Mission

Capacity Target: 100 GW by 2047 (Current capacity:
8 GW).
 Small Modular Reactors (SMRs): ₹20,000
crore allocation for R&D and indigenous
SMR development.
 Goal: Five operational SMRs by 2033.
 Private Sector Participation: Proposed
amendments to key legislations:
 Atomic Energy Act, 1962 – Framework for
nuclear energy development and regulation.
 Civil Liability for Nuclear Damage Act,
2010 – Ensuring compensation mechanisms
for nuclear incidents.
 Capacity Expansion: 10 new
reactors (totaling 8 GW) under construction
across Gujarat, Rajasthan, Tamil Nadu,
Haryana, Karnataka, and Madhya Pradesh.
 Approval for a 6×1208 MW nuclear plant in
Andhra Pradesh in collaboration with the
USA.
 Nuclear Partnerships: Collaboration with
the private sector to develop Bharat Small

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
147
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Reactors (BSRs) and Bharat Small Modular
Reactors (BSMRs).
Bharat Small Reactors (BSRs) & Bharat Small
Modular Reactors (BSMRs)
 The government is advancing nuclear
energy expansion through BSRs and BSMRs,
ensuring a scalable and efficient power
supply for industries and remote areas.
Bharat Small Reactors (BSRs)
 220 MW Pressurized Heavy Water Reactors
(PHWRs) with a strong safety and
operational track record.
 Designed for reduced land requirements,
making them suitable for industrial hubs
(e.g., steel, aluminum, and metals) to aid
in decarbonization efforts.
Public-Private Collaboration:
 The private sector provides land, cooling
water, and capital.
 Nuclear Power Corporation of India Limited
(NPCIL) manages design, quality assurance,
and operations.
Bharat Small Modular Reactors (BSMRs)
 Definition: Advanced nuclear reactors with
a power capacity of up to 300 MW(e) per
unit.
 Modular Construction: Factory-fabricated
components for faster deployment.
Applications:
 Coal plant repurposing
 Off-grid power generation
 Grid stability with renewables
 Hydrogen co-generation (high-temperature
gas-cooled reactors)
Government Initiatives for Nuclear Expansion
India’s nuclear roadmap includes multiple
initiatives to scale up nuclear capacity, enhance
R&D, and integrate advanced reactor technologies.
 Planned Expansion: Increase nuclear
capacity from 8,180 MW to 22,480 MW by
2031-32.
 New Projects: 10 additional reactors in pre-
project stages, aiming for completion
by 2031-32.
Fast Breeder Reactor (FBR) Development:
 Prototype Fast Breeder Reactor (PFBR) –
500 MW achieved critical milestones in
2024, paving the way for India’s closed
nuclear fuel cycle strategy.
 New Uranium Discovery: Extended the life
of Jaduguda Mines by 50+ years.
 Public-Private Collaboration: NPCIL &
NTPC formed the ASHVINI JV to develop
nuclear power plants under existing
regulatory frameworks.
Safety, Sustainability & Global Commitments
 Safety Standards: Indian nuclear power
plants adhere to stringent safety measures,
with radiation levels well below global
benchmarks.
 International Commitments: India aligns
with COP26 targets to achieve 500 GW non-
fossil fuel-based energy by 2030 and fulfill
its Paris Agreement obligations.
 Thorium Utilization: R&D on Molten Salt
Reactors to leverage India’s
abundant thorium reserves for long-term
energy security.
Conclusion
 The Union Budget 2025-26 underscores
India’s commitment to a nuclear-powered
future, reducing carbon emissions and
securing energy reliability.
 The Nuclear Energy Mission for Viksit
Bharat positions India as a global leader in
advanced nuclear technology, with a
strategic push toward indigenous
innovation, public-private partnerships, and
regulatory reforms.
 With robust policy support and
technological advancements, India’s nuclear
sector is poised for unprecedented growth,
solidifying its role in a clean energy-driven
future.
Jevons Paradox
Syllabus: GS3/ Economy, S&T
In News

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
148
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Satya Nadella, CEO of Microsoft, highlighted
the Jevons Paradox in the context of AI, noting that
increased efficiency and accessibility of AI could
lead to surging demand.
What is Jevons Paradox?
 Jevons Paradox states that when a
resource becomes more efficient and
cheaper to use, its overall consumption
tends to increase rather than decrease.
 First observed by William Stanley Jevons in
his 1865 book The Coal Question.
 He noted that improvements in
the efficiency of steam engines, which used
coal, led to increased coal consumption, not
a decrease as one might expect.
How It Works: Key Factors
 Cost Reduction: When efficiency increases,
operational costs decrease, making the
resource more attractive.
 Higher Accessibility: Efficient technology
allows more users and industries to adopt
it.
 Economic Expansion: Enhanced
productivity can drive industrial and
economic growth, leading to greater
demand.
 Elastic Demand: When a resource is highly
responsive to price changes, increased
efficiency results in higher usage instead of
conservation.
Examples of Jevons Paradox
 Energy Efficiency: More fuel-efficient cars
reduce per-mile fuel costs, encouraging
people to drive more, leading to higher total
fuel consumption.
 Artificial Intelligence (AI): As AI models
become more efficient and affordable, their
adoption skyrockets, increasing overall
energy consumption in data centers.
 Water Conservation Technologies: Improved
irrigation techniques can lead to expanded
agriculture, increasing water use instead of
reducing it.
India’s Diagnostics Sector
Syllabus: GS3/ S&T
Context
 India’s diagnostics sector plays a crucial role
in the healthcare industry, facilitating early
disease detection and treatment planning.
 The tragic case of Shankar Dhange, whose
sister lost her life due to incorrect
diagnostic test results, underscores
the serious risks posed by inadequate
regulation and oversight.
India’s Diagnostics Sector: Growth and Importance
 The diagnostics sector contributes 9% of
the total healthcare industry and plays a
crucial role in disease management and
medical decision-making.
 The Indian diagnostics industry is
expanding at a rapid pace, with an estimated
value of ₹1,275 billion by 2028.
 There are approximately 300,000 labs
across India, serving a growing population.
 The early disease detection with the rise
of digital health platforms and AI-driven
diagnostics is shaping the future of medical
testing in India.
Challenges Facing the Diagnostics Sector
 Weak Regulatory Oversight: Only 12 states
and Union Territories have adopted
the Clinical Establishments Act, leading
to inconsistent regulations across the
country.
No mandatory accreditation for labs, allowing many
to operate without standardized quality control.
 Shortage of Skilled Personnel: Lack of
trained pathologists, microbiologists, and lab
technicians affects diagnostic accuracy.
 Urban-Rural Divide: Only 24% of diagnostics
revenue comes from rural areas,
despite 70% of India’s population residing
there.
Government-run labs lack proper infrastructure,
funding, and trained staff.
High Cost of Private Diagnostics:
 No standardized pricing for tests, leading
to disparities in cost.
 Private labs often charge exorbitant fees,
making diagnostic services inaccessible to
low-income groups.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
149
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Initiatives like Telangana’s ‘T-Diagnostics’
and Kerala’s ‘Aardram Mission’ aim to
provide affordable diagnostics but face
logistical challenges.
Fraudulent Practices:
 Fake pathologists and unauthorized
technicians are common, compromising
patient safety.
 Some labs use “bought signatures” of
pathologists to issue reports without proper
review.
Regulations of the Sector
 Clinical Establishments (Registration and
Regulation) Act, 2010: Aims to regulate
diagnostic centers and set minimum
standards for services.
 Adopted by only 12 states and Union
Territories, with poor implementation.
NABL Accreditation:
 The National Accreditation Board for Testing
and Calibration Laboratories
(NABL) provides voluntary accreditation.
 Large diagnostic chains follow NABL
guidelines, but many small labs operate
without accreditation.
State-Specific Regulations:
 Karnataka and Kerala have separate
regulatory frameworks, but enforcement
remains inconsistent.
 Tamil Nadu’s new Clinical Establishments
(Regulations) Rules, 2018,
mandate minimum space requirements for
labs.
Way Ahead: Reforming India’s Diagnostics Sector
 Strengthening Regulations and
Compliance:Make NABL accreditation
mandatory for all diagnostic centers.
 Ensure uniform implementation of the
Clinical Establishments Act across all states.
 Establish a central regulatory body for
consistent oversight.
Expanding Workforce and Training Programs:
 Increase medical education seats and
training programs for microbiologists,
pathologists, and lab technicians.
 Mandate regular upskilling and
certification for lab technicians.
 Set a cap on the number of labs a pathologist
can be associated with to curb ghost
pathologists.
Eliminating Fraudulent Practices:
 Implement digital tracking of lab reports to
prevent misuse of pathologists’ credentials.
 Enforce strict penalties for ghost
pathologists and unqualified technicians.
 Conduct regular audits and surprise
inspections to ensure compliance.
Bridging the Urban-Rural Divide:
 Increase government investment in rural
diagnostic centers.
 Expand public-private partnerships (PPPs)
to improve access to diagnostics in remote
areas.
 Extend successful state-funded diagnostic
initiatives like ‘T-Diagnostics’ and ‘Aardram
Mission’ to other regions.
Standardizing Pricing and Quality Control:
 Introduce price caps for essential diagnostic
tests.
 Mandate Standard Operating Procedures
(SOPs) for sample collection, testing, and
reporting.
 Enforce external and internal quality control
measures.
Chandrayaan-4 Set to Launch in 2027
Syllabus: GS3/ Science and Technology
Context
 India will launch the Chandrayaan-4 mission
to bring back samples of moon rocks to the
Earth in 2027.
About
Chandrayaan-1:
 It was launched in 2008 and was India’s
first lunar mission. It made India the fifth
country to reach the Moon.
 The mission’s most significant discovery
was the presence of water molecules on the
lunar surface, a finding confirmed by NASA.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
150
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Chandrayaan-2:
 It was launched in 2019 with an orbiter,
a lander (Vikram), and a rover (Pragyan).
 The mission aimed to achieve a soft landing
on the lunar surface, but ISRO lost contact
with the lander just before touchdown,
resulting in a crash landing.
 Despite this setback, the orbiter continued
functioning and provided crucial data on
the Moon’s surface and atmosphere.
Chandrayaan-3,
a follow-on mission to Chandrayaan-2, successfully
achieved a soft landing on the Moon’s south pole in
2023.
Lander payloads:
 Chandra’s Surface Thermophysical
Experiment (ChaSTE) to measure the
thermal conductivity and temperature;
Instrument for Lunar Seismic
Activity (ILSA) for measuring the seismicity
around the landing site etc.
Rover payloads:
 Alpha Particle X-ray
Spectrometer (APXS) and Laser Induced
Breakdown Spectroscope (LIBS) for
deriving the elemental composition in the
vicinity of landing site.
Facial Recognition System (FRS)
Syllabus: GS3/ Science and Technology
Context
The Maharashtra government has introduced Facial
Recognition System technology for entry into
Mantralaya, to improve security and efficiency in
government operations.
What is Facial Recognition System?A facial
recognition system is a technology potentially
capable of matching a human face from a digital
image or a video frame against a database of faces.
Core Technologies of FRS are as;
 Artificial Intelligence (AI): Machine learning
and deep learning enable systems to
improve accuracy over time.
 Computer Vision: It extracts, analyzes, and
interprets visual data from images and
videos.
 Biometric Analysis: It identifies unique facial
features for authentication.
 Neural Networks (CNNs): It is essential for
image recognition and feature extraction.

Examples of facial recognition systems
 Amazon Rekognition: A cloud-based service
that uses facial recognition to analyze
images and videos.
 Microsoft Azure Face API: A facial
recognition API that’s part of Microsoft’s
cloud computing services.
 DeepFace: A facial recognition program
developed by Facebook.
Applications of Facial Recognition System
 Security & Surveillance: It is used in law
enforcement, border control, and public
space monitoring to enhance security.
 Access Control & Authentication: It unlocks
devices, secures workplaces, and replaces
passwords for digital logins.
 Financial Services: It enables secure
banking, fraud detection, and contactless
payments.
 Healthcare: It is used to identify patients,
assist in diagnosis, and monitor mental
health.
 Retail & Marketing: It enhances customer
experience, enables targeted ads, and
prevents shoplifting.
Concerns of FRS
 Privacy Violations: Unauthorized
surveillance and data collection infringe on
individuals’ privacy without consent.
 Data Security Risks: Facial recognition
databases are vulnerable to hacking, leading
to identity theft and data misuse.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
151
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Bias and Inaccuracy: Studies have shown
that facial recognition systems have higher
error rates for people of color, women, and
non-binary individuals, leading to wrongful
arrests and misidentifications.
 Misuse for Profiling: Governments and
corporations exploit the technology for
racial profiling and intrusive advertising.
 Deepfake: AI-generated deepfakes can
manipulate identities, undermining
biometric security.
Way Ahead
 Governments should establish clear laws to
prevent mass surveillance and misuse of
facial recognition technology.
 Strict cybersecurity measures must be
enforced to protect facial recognition
databases from breaches and identity theft.
SRY Gene for Gender Identification
Syllabus: GS3/ Science and Technology
Context
 Recent studies have uncovered exceptional
cases where individuals with the SRY gene
have developed as females, highlighting the
complexities of genetic influence on gender
determination.
The SRY Gene (Sex-determining Region Y)
 The SRY gene on the Y
chromosome determines if a baby will be
male or female.
 If the SRY gene is present, the baby will
develop male characteristics and if the SRY
gene is absent or mutated, the baby will
develop female characteristics.
 The SRY gene produces a protein that
attaches to DNA and controls the activity of
other genes.
 The SRY protein starts processes that cause
the fetus to develop male gonads (testes)
and prevents the development of female
reproductive structures.

Mechanism of Sex Determination
 Chromosomes: Each human cell has 46
chromosomes, or 23 pairs. One pair of these
chromosomes is the sex chromosomes,
which determine the sex of the individual.
 Female sex: Females have two X
chromosomes, or XX.
 Male sex: Males have one X chromosome
and one Y chromosome, or XY.
 Fertilization: When an egg is fertilized by
sperm with an X chromosome, the resulting
zygote will be female (XX). When an egg is
fertilized by sperm with a Y chromosome,
the resulting zygote will be male (XY).
Unusual Sex Development
 In rare cases, an SRY gene may be
translocated from the Y chromosome to the
X chromosome.
 If a baby inherits two X chromosomes, and
one of them has the SRY gene, they
usually develop male characteristics but are
unable to have children.
 However, there are rare cases where
individuals with two X chromosomes and
the SRY gene develop as females.
 X Chromosome Inactivation: If a woman has
the “male” gene (SRY) on one of her X
chromosomes, that specific X chromosome
(the one with SRY) is the one that gets
turned off.
 This is because the SRY-carrying X is often
missing other important genes, and turning
it off prevents developmental issues.
Concluding remarks
 The SRY gene remains central to male sex
determination, but rare genetic anomalies
can lead to unexpected outcomes.
 The study emphasizes the need to examine
translocation chromosomes for associated

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
152
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
deletions that might influence gender
outcomes.
 Understanding such genetic variations can
help in medical counseling and diagnosing
disorders of sex development (DSDs).
Budget Allocation for Research, Development and
Innovation
Syllabus: GS3/Science and Technology
Context
 The Union Budget has allocated ₹20,000
crore to the Ministry of Science and
Technology (MoST) for research,
development and innovation.
Background
 Last year, in the interim Budget ₹1 lakh
crore was announced for a fifty-year
interest-free loan.
 It will provide long-term financing or
refinancing with long tenures and low or nil
interest rates.
 This will encourage the private sector to
scale up research and
innovation significantly in sunrise domains.
Significance
 This will be a major step towards creating
strategic autonomy in some key technology
sectors.
 The budget introduces several initiatives
that align closely with DBT’s mission to
advance India’s biotechnology sector.
 The budget’s focus on public-private
partnerships, industry collaboration, and
technology-driven entrepreneurship will
accelerate innovation in manufacturing,
healthcare, sustainability, and strategic
sectors.
India’s Spending on R&D:
 India currently spends less than 1% of its
GDP on research and development, which is
low compared to technologically advanced
countries.
 A major reason for this is the limited
participation by the private sector — now
hovering around 30% — in core research
and development.
Need for Funding in R&D
 Economic Growth: Drives new industries,
improves productivity, and enhances global
competitiveness.
 Technological Advancement: Facilitates
breakthroughs in fields like AI,
biotechnology, and renewable energy.
 Social Challenges: Helps address poverty,
healthcare, education, and environmental
sustainability issues.
 Job Creation: Innovation generates
employment opportunities and stimulates
entrepreneurship.
 Global Positioning: Positions India as a
global leader in science, technology, and
knowledge.
 Attracts Investment: Promotes foreign and
domestic investments in research-driven
sectors.
Challenges
 Funding Issues: Limited investment in
research and development, especially in
public institutions.
 Infrastructure Gaps: Inadequate research
facilities and resources in many institutions.
 Brain Drain: Loss of talent to other
countries due to better opportunities
abroad.
 Lack of Industry Collaboration: Limited
partnerships between academia and
industry for practical innovation.
 Skill Gaps: Insufficient training and
development of skilled researchers and
innovators.
 Regulatory Challenges: Complex regulations
and intellectual property issues hinder
innovation.
Government Initiatives
 The National Geospatial Mission has been
announced with an allocation of Rs 100
crore for FY 2025-2026 to develop
foundational geospatial infrastructure and
data.
 The mission will help implement the
National Geospatial Policy 2022, with the
goal of making India a world leader in the
geospatial sector.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
153
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 The National Mission on High Yielding
Seeds will focus on strengthening the
research ecosystem and developing high-
yielding, pest-resistant, and climate-
resilient seeds, aligning with DBT’s efforts
in agricultural biotechnology.
 National Manufacturing Mission
(NMM): Aligned with the
government’s ‘BioE3 Policy’ for fostering
high-performance biomanufacturing, the
NMM announced in the Budget aims to
accelerate technology development and
commercialisation.
 The Seaweed Mission and Learn & Earn
Program empower women entrepreneurs,
supporting economic inclusion.
Way Forward
 With the recent initiative Startups and other
private sector ventures will obtain seed
money for their projects and are expected
to get benefitted.
 However to raise R&D spending there is a
need to have increased partnership with the
private sector.
 Efforts are being made to create better
synergies between industry, research labs,
and educational institutions in order to
broad-base both research activity and the
funds to support it.
 The Union Finance Minister has also
announced several initiatives including the
Nuclear Energy Mission, initiatives in clean
tech, Atal Tinkering Labs, and the Centre of
Excellence on AI in Education.
Paris AI Action Summit
Syllabus: GS3/ Science and Technology, Economy
Context
 PM Modi co-chaired the third edition of the
AI Action Summit in Paris.
Paris AI Action Summit
 The summit emphasized sustainable AI
growth and energy efficiency, aligning with
global climate imperatives.
 Its objectives include:
 Providing access to independent, safe, and
reliable AI for a wide range of users.
 Developing environmentally friendly AI
with lower energy demands.
 Ensuring effective and inclusive global AI
governance.
 The event focused on five key themes: Public
service AI, Future of work, Innovation and
culture, Trust in AI ,and Global AI
governance.
India’s Perspective and Initiatives
 AI for Global Good: India emphasized AI’s
transformative potential across sectors like
healthcare, education, and agriculture,
highlighting its role in achieving the UN
Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs).
 Five Pillars for Responsible AI
Development: PM Modi proposed a five-
point agenda for ethical and transparent AI
growth:
 Pooling global resources and talent
for AI innovation.
 Developing open-source AI
systems.
 Creating high-quality, unbiased
datasets.
 Democratizing AI for people-centric
applications.
 Addressing cybersecurity concerns,
disinformation, and deepfakes.
 Addressing Job Loss Concerns: India
acknowledged concerns about AI-induced
job displacement but emphasized the
historical trend of technological
advancements transforming work rather
than eliminating it.
 India stressed the importance of skilling
and reskilling initiatives.
Significance for India
 Global AI Landscape: The summit takes
place amidst intense competition in the AI
field, particularly between the West and
China.
 It provides an opportunity for India and
France to demonstrate their soft power in
this crucial area.
 Strategic Partnerships: The summit
strengthens the strategic partnership

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
154
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
between India and France in a critical
technology domain.
Way Ahead
 India is developing its own Large Language
Model (LLM) tailored to its linguistic and
cultural diversity.
 The public-private partnership model
ensures affordable computing power for
startups and researchers.
 The IndiaAI Mission supports AI research
and development through initiatives such
as;
 Subsidized access to Graphics Processing
Unit (GPU) clusters for AI training.
 Funding for AI-driven projects in critical
sectors.
Concluding remarks
 The Paris AI Action Summit reinforces
India’s commitment to ethical, sustainable,
and inclusive AI development.
 As AI reshapes industries, India’s proactive
investments in AI education, governance,
and innovation will determine its future
role in the global AI landscape.
India-France Joint Statement
 Indo-Pacific Cooperation: They reaffirmed
commitment to a free, open, inclusive, and
secure Indo-Pacific region.
 Space Cooperation: They agreed to hold the
third India-France Strategic Space Dialogue
in 2025 and commended CNES-ISRO
collaborations and stressed stronger space
industry ties.
 Counterterrorism & Security: Urged the
designation of terrorists under UNSC 1267
Sanctions Committee and alignment
with Financial Action Task Force
(FATF) standards.
 Strengthened counterterrorism cooperation
between India’s NSG and France’s GIGN.
 Acknowledged the 2024 counter-terrorism
dialogue and preparations for Milipol
2025 in New Delhi.
 Civil Nuclear Cooperation: Recognized
nuclear energy as a key pillar of energy
security and low-carbon transition.
Reaffirmed cooperation on Jaitapur Nuclear
Power Plant.
 Signed a letter of intent on Small Modular
Reactors (SMRs) & Advanced Modular
Reactors (AMRs).
 Strengthened nuclear training through
agreements between GCNEP (India) &
INSTN (France).
 Health Cooperation: Signed agreements
between PariSante Campus (France) & C-
CAMP (India) to establish the Indo-French
Life Sciences Sister Innovation Hub.
Project Waterworth
Syllabus: GS3/ S&T
In News
 Meta has announced an ambitious undersea
cable initiative called Project
Waterworth to enhance global digital
connectivity.

About Project Waterworth
 It is an AI-powered subsea cable system,
spanning 50,000 km across five continents
and is the longest and highest-
capacity subsea cable system, linking
the U.S., India, Brazil, South Africa, and other
key regions.
 The cables will be laid at depths of up to
7,000 meters in deep waters and advanced
burial techniques in high-risk shallow
waters will protect the cables from ship
anchors and environmental hazards.
 The initiative will introduce three new
oceanic corridors, improving the scale and
reliability of internet networks.
 Greater connectivity will enhance
international cooperation, digital inclusion,
and technological advancements.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
155
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
RuTAGe Smart Village Center (RSVC)
Syllabus :GS 3/ Science and Tech /Economy
In News
 The RuTAGe Smart Village Center
(RSVC) was launched in Mandaura village,
Sonipat, marking a transformative moment
for rural technological advancement.
RuTAGe Smart Village Center (RSVC) model
 It was conceptualized by the Office of the
Principal Scientific Advisor (PSA).
 It is designed to serve as a permanent
presence at the Panchayat level, providing
deep handholding to cater to the
technological needs of 15-20 villages over
several years.
 It was honoured with the first prize at the
NSE’s Social Stock Exchange event in
Varanasi in 2024.
Technological Solutions Offered
 RSVC offers a comprehensive range of 12
technology tracks to address diverse rural
challenges:
 Agriculture & Waste Management: Services
for agriculture, waste management,
homestays, and village tourism, supported
by pre-sowing to post-harvest technologies,
in collaboration with KVKs.
 RuTAG Technologies: Innovations from 7
IITs, developed under the Office of the
Principal Scientific Adviser to the
Government of India.
 Livelihood & Entrepreneurship: Promoting
local entrepreneurship through schemes
like NRLM in Uttar Pradesh.
 Renewable Energy: Solar hybrid and wind
technology solutions, with technical
assistance from SELCO Foundation.
 WASH: Waste management, water, and
sanitation solutions, including IIT Madras
Aquamaps and weVois technologies.
 FinTech: Financial inclusion apps and
AR/VR technologies developed by IISC and
XR Group.
 Capacity Building: Research and capacity-
building initiatives with Tier 2 & 3 colleges
where NIFTEM is a facility for piloting
biscuit manufacturing from locally sourced
materials like sugar, ghee. NAARM
undertaking capacity building of SVC centre
heads.
 Govt. Scheme Apps: Dissemination of
government schemes through citizen-
centric apps for science, tech, and welfare
programs.
 Assistive Technologies: Solutions for
differently abled individuals through the
Assistive Technology Foundation.
Purpose of RSVC
 RSVC aims to bridge the gap between rural
needs and technological advancements,
ensuring innovation reaches grassroots
communities.
 Focuses on addressing challenges like
animal intrusion, organic farming, and
livelihood-enhancing technologies.
Role of Technology in Rural Growth
 Farming: Precision tools (GPS, sensors) and
mechanization (tractors) increase crop
yields and efficiency.
 Education: Online learning and digital
literacy bridge the gap for rural students.
Initiatives like PM e-VIDYA and
SWAYAM provide digital learning
opportunities.
 Financial Inclusion: The DBT program and
PM Jan Dhan Yojana facilitate cashless
transfers, improving transparency and
reducing fraud.
 Water Management: The National Program
on Aquifer Mapping and Management
utilizes technology for efficient
groundwater management in agriculture.
Future Outlook
 RSVC initiative marks a significant step
towards empowering rural India through
sustainable, scalable, and impactful
technological solutions.
 Continuous updates and feedback will be
used to refine and scale the impact of
RSVCs.
China’s EAST Reactor
Syllabus: GS3/Science and Technology

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
156
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Context
 Chinese scientists reported that they were
able to maintain a plasma at a temperature
of 100 million degrees C for about 1,066
seconds in a nuclear fusion reactor called
the Experimental Advanced
Superconducting Tokamak (EAST).
About
 EAST is a testbed reactor for (International
Thermonuclear Experimental Reactor)
ITER, an international megaproject.
 Members of the Project: Six countries
around the world, including India, and the
European Union.
 They are working together to build a
tokamak that will sustain nuclear fusion that
releases more energy than that required to
sustain the plasma.
 A tokamak is a machine that uses magnetic
fields to confine plasma for nuclear fusion
research.
Background
 1939: Lise Meitner and Otto Frisch
explained fission as a process of energy
release.
 1942: The first sustainable nuclear fission
reactor was built by Enrico Fermi and team.
 Nuclear fission produces harmful
radioactive waste whereas nuclear fusion
doesn’t.
 Nuclear fusion reactors have become an
important technological goal for a world
keenly interested in new sources of clean
energy.
 Current Progress: Projects like ITER are
working on creating viable fusion reactors,
but net-positive energy from fusion is still a
work in progress.
What is Nuclear Fusion?
 Nuclear fusion is the process by which two
light atomic nuclei combine to form a single
heavier one while releasing massive
amounts of energy.
 Fusion reactions take place in a state of
matter called plasma — a hot, charged gas
made of positive ions and free-moving
electrons with unique properties distinct
from solids, liquids or gases.
 The sun, along with all other stars, is
powered by this reaction.
 Process: The Deuterium (H-2) and Tritium
(H-3) atoms are combined to form Helium
(He-4). A free and fast neutron is also
released as a result.
 The neutron is powered by the kinetic
energy converted from the ‘extra’ mass left
over after the combination of lighter nuclei
of deuterium and tritium occurs.
 Challenges: Achieving controlled fusion
requires extremely high temperatures and
pressures, similar to those in stars.

Significance of Fusion energy?
 Clean Energy: Nuclear fusion does not emit
carbon dioxide or other greenhouse gases
into the atmosphere, so it could be a long-
term source of low-carbon electricity from
the second half of this century onwards.
 More Efficient: Fusion could generate four
times more energy per kilogram of fuel than
fission (used in nuclear power plants) and
nearly four million times more energy than
burning oil or coal.
Fusion fuel is plentiful and easily accessible:
 Deuterium can be extracted inexpensively
from seawater, and tritium can potentially
be produced from the reaction of fusion-
generated neutrons with naturally
abundant lithium.
 These fuel supplies would last for millions
of years.
Safer to Use:

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
157
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Future fusion reactors are also intrinsically
safe and are not expected to produce high
activity or long-lived nuclear waste.
 Furthermore, as the fusion process is
difficult to start and maintain, there is no
risk of a runaway reaction and meltdown.
Way Ahead:
 EAST’s successes are crucial for ITER’s
future, which faces criticism for delays and
cost overruns.
 ITER’s cost exceeds EUR 18 billion, making
it the most expensive science experiment in
history.
 High costs have deterred some
governments from pursuing such projects.
Alternative Fusion Methods:
 Stellarator: A device with a twisting design
that eliminates the need for a poloidal
magnetic field, using complex external
magnets to achieve magnetic confinement.
 Laser Fusion: Uses powerful laser beams to
compress deuterium-tritium pellets,
causing fusion and releasing energy.
 The heat from laser fusion can be used to
generate steam, which drives turbines to
produce electricity.
‘Majorana 1’: A Quantum Chip
Syllabus: GS3/Science & Technology
Context
 Recently, Microsoft has unveiled its
groundbreaking quantum computing
chip, Majorana 1, marking a significant leap
in the field of quantum technology.
Understanding Quantum Computing
 Quantum Computing represents a paradigm
shift in the field of computing, promising
exponential speed-ups for certain types of
problems that classical computers struggle
with.
 It is based on quantum mechanics—the
branch of physics that deals with subatomic
particles.
Working of Quantum Computers
 Quantum computers leverage quantum bits
or qubits, which exploit the principles of
superposition, entanglement, and quantum
interference to perform calculations at
unprecedented speeds, process vast
amounts of data and make them ideal for
solving complex problems.
 Superposition: A qubit can exist in multiple
states simultaneously, and can be both 0 and
1 at the same time, exponentially increasing
computing power.
 Traditional computers use binary bits (0s
and 1s).
 Entanglement: The state of one qubit
is instantly correlated with
another, regardless of distance, when qubits
become entangled. It enables ultra-fast
information transfer.
 Quantum Interference: By manipulating
quantum states, computations can be
optimized to produce highly efficient
results.

Potential Applications of Quantum Computing
 Cryptography: Quantum computers can
break traditional encryption algorithms,
necessitating the development of quantum-
safe cryptographic methods.
 Healthcare and Drug Discovery: Quantum
computing can simulate molecular
interactions at an atomic level, accelerating
the discovery of new drugs and treatments.
 Artificial Intelligence (AI) and Machine
Learning: Quantum algorithms can enhance

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
158
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
AI models by solving optimization problems
much faster than classical computers.
 Financial Modeling: Quantum computers
can analyze vast datasets to predict market
trends with greater accuracy.
 Climate Modeling: Quantum simulations can
improve climate predictions by analyzing
complex atmospheric interactions.
Key Milestones
IBM’s Qiskit:
 It is an open-source quantum computing
framework, allows researchers and
developers to experiment with quantum
algorithms.
 IBM Eagle Processor (world’s first 127-qubit
processor) and Condor (in 2023).
Microsoft’s Quantum Computing Approach:
 Quantum Development Kit (QDK): A
platform that allows developers to build
quantum applications using the Q#
programming language.
 Topological Qubits (highly stable qubits
with lower error rates).
Majorana 1
 It uses a new class of materials
called topoconductors, which enable
the creation of topological qubits (Topological
Core Architecture).
 These qubits are more stable and less prone
to errors compared to traditional qubits.
 Innovative Material Stack: The chip is built
using a combination of Indium Arsenide (a
semiconductor) and Aluminum (a
superconductor), creating a pristine
environment for Majorana particles.
Challenges and Concerns
 Hardware Limitations: Maintaining
quantum coherence in qubits is extremely
difficult due to environmental interference.
 Error Correction: Quantum computers are
highly susceptible to errors, requiring
sophisticated error-correction techniques.
 Scalability: Building large-scale quantum
systems that outperform classical
computers remains a challenge due to the
need for advanced cryogenic technology,
making their development and maintenance
highly expensive.
 Security Risks: Quantum computers could
break existing encryption algorithms,
necessitating new cryptographic standards.
Quantum Computing Research in India
 National Quantum Mission (NQM): With
budget outlay of Rs.6003.65 crore
from 2023-24 to 2030-31.
 It aims to work towards strengthening
India’s research and development in the
quantum arena alongside indigenously
building quantum-based (physical qubit)
computers.
 National Mission on Quantum Technologies
& Applications (NM-QTA): It was announced
in the Union Budget (2020) with an
allocation of ₹8,000 crores.
 Research institutions such as the Indian
Institute of Science (IISc) and IITs are
advancing quantum computing research.
 Department of Science and Technology
(DST): It has launched various projects
focused on quantum communication,
quantum cryptography, and quantum
materials.
 Quantum-enabled Science & Technology
(QuEST) is for fostering quantum research
and capacity building.
 Centre for Development of Advanced
Computing (C-DAC) and the DRDO are
exploring quantum computing applications
for national security and defense.
Using Quantum Property of the Nanocrystals
Syllabus: GS3/Science and Technology
Context
 Scientists have devised a new way to check
whether gravity is quantum-
mechanical using nanocrystals.
About
 General relativity explains gravity,
while quantum mechanics describes the
electromagnetic, strong nuclear, and weak
nuclear forces.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
159
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Scientists are exploring how gravity fits into
quantum mechanics, with experiments
proposed to test gravity’s quantum nature.
 Quantum mechanics studies particle
behavior at the quantum level, where
classical physics no longer applies.
 Quantum technology utilizes quantum
properties like superposition and
entanglement to perform tasks previously
thought impossible.
 Nanocrystals are tiny crystalline structures,
typically 1 to 100 nm in size, exhibiting
quantum mechanical behaviors (e.g.,
changes in conductivity, magnetism, light
absorption).
Use of Nanocrystals:
 Scientists have proposed using a quantum
property of the nanocrystals called spin.
 The spin affects the nanocrystals’ motion
and can be manipulated by an external
magnetic field.
 The spin of each nanocrystal exists in a
superposition of two states until it is
measured.
 Test outcomes: Experts believe it may reveal
that gravity is not a classical force, or it may
suggest gravity is something entirely
different from both classical and quantum
forces.
India’s First indigenous Semiconductor Chip to be
Ready by 2025
Syllabus: GS3/ S&T
In Context
 Union Minister for Electronics and IT
announced at the Global Investors Summit
2025 in Bhopal that India’s first
indigenously developed semiconductor chip
will be ready for production by 2025.
About
 Semiconductors: Semiconductors are
materials that have conductivity between a
conductor and an insulator. They are the
foundation of modern electronics, used in:
 Computers and smartphones
 Automobiles and electric vehicles (EVs)
 Defense and aerospace technology
 Medical devices
 Telecommunication and AI applications
Importance:
 India is one of the largest consumers of
semiconductors but imports 100% of its
requirements.
 The launch of an indigenous semiconductor
chip in 2025 will:
 Reduce import dependence (India imports
$24 billion worth of semiconductors
annually).
 Strengthen national security (used in
defense and critical infrastructure).
 Boost Make in India and Atmanirbhar
Bharat initiatives.
 Create high-skilled jobs in semiconductor
design and manufacturing.
Initiatives to Develop the Semiconductor Industry
India Semiconductor Mission (ISM) (2021): A
₹76,000 crore incentive scheme aimed at:
 Setting up semiconductor fabrication units
(fabs) in India.
 Encouraging global semiconductor firms to
invest in India.
 Developing design-linked incentive (DLI)
schemes to support local start-ups.
Production-Linked Incentive (PLI) Scheme for
Electronics Manufacturing
Semiconductor Manufacturing Ecosystem: Five
semiconductor units under construction in India.
Strategic Partnerships:
 Collaboration under India-U.S. Initiative on
Critical and Emerging Technology (iCET).
 Talks on setting up chip manufacturing
units in India.
 Role in the QUAD Group: QUAD (India, US,
Japan, Australia) is focusing on
semiconductor supply chain resilience.
Challenges in India’s Semiconductor Sector
 Lack of Existing Semiconductor Fabs: No
existing commercial fab in India yet (first
expected in 2025).

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
160
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Dependence on Global Supply
Chains: Taiwan, South Korea, and the U.S.
dominate semiconductor manufacturing.
 High Capital and Technological
Requirements: Semiconductor
manufacturing requires precision,
specialized labor, and high investment.
 Geopolitical Risks: US-China trade war &
Taiwan tensions impact semiconductor
availability.
Future Prospects and Way Forward
 Achieving Self-Sufficiency: The government
must ensure faster implementation of
semiconductor plants.
 Strengthening Infrastructure: Improve
power supply, water availability, and
logistics for fabs.
 Enhancing Skill Development: Establish
semiconductor training institutes in
partnership with global leaders.
 Reducing Import Dependence: Promote local
semiconductor startups under the Design-
Linked Incentive (DLI) scheme.
SECURITY
Government’s Commitment to Eradicating Left-Wing
Extremism (LWE) by 2026
Syllabus: GS3/ Security
In News
 Union Home Minister Amit Shah reaffirmed
the government’s goal to eliminate Left-
Wing Extremism (LWE) by March 31, 2026
after security forces neutralized 31 Maoists
in Bijapur, Chhattisgarh.
Left-Wing Extremism (LWE)
 Definition: LWE refers to individuals or
groups who promote radical leftist
ideologies and seek to overthrow the state
through violence. It has its roots in the 1967
Naxalbari uprising in West Bengal.
Terminology:
 Maoists (global term).
 Naxalites (India-specific term, derived from
the 1967 Naxalbari uprising in West
Bengal).
Regions Affected (Red Corridor):
 Highly affected: Chhattisgarh, Jharkhand,
Odisha, Bihar, West Bengal.
 Moderately affected: Andhra Pradesh,
Telangana, Maharashtra, Madhya Pradesh,
Kerala.
Decline in Naxalim:
 53% decrease in LWE-related incidents
(16,463 cases from 2004-2014 to 7,700
cases from 2014-2024).
 70% decline in civilian and security
personnel deaths.
Reasons for the Decline in Naxalism
Strategic & Security Measures:
SAMADHAN Doctrine (2017):
The acronym SAMADHAN represents eight key
pillars: Smart Leadership (S) for strong political
and bureaucratic execution, Aggressive Strategy (A)
focusing on proactive security operations,
Motivation & Training (M) to enhance the
capabilities of security forces, Actionable
Intelligence (A) to improve surveillance and
tracking of Maoist activities, Dashboard-based Key
Performance Indicators (D) for real-time
monitoring of LWE incidents, Harnessing
Technology (H) through AI, drones, and digital
security systems, Action Plan for Each State (A) to
tailor counter-insurgency efforts, and No Access to
Financing (N) to disrupt Maoist funding channels
and illicit networks.
Military Operations:
 Operation Octopus, Operation Double Bull,
Operation Chakrabandha: Large-scale
operations against Maoist hideouts.
 Formation of special task forces: CoBRA
(Commando Battalion for Resolute Action),
Greyhounds, Special Intelligence Branch
(SIB).
 Better intelligence & drone
surveillance: Improved tracking of Maoist
movements.
Improved Centre-State Coordination:
 Security Related Expenditure (SRE)
Scheme: Funds provided to states for
counter-insurgency.
 Special Infrastructure Scheme
(SIS): Capacity-building of police forces in
Maoist-affected areas.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
161
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Socio-Economic & Developmental Initiatives:
 Rehabilitation of Surrendered
Cadres: Vocational training and financial
assistance for reintegration into society.
 Skill Development Centres and Industrial
Training Institutes (ITIs) set up in LWE-
affected districts.
 Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana
(PMAY): 15,000 homes sanctioned for
surrendered Maoists.
 National Dairy Development Board (NDDB)
initiative: Providing livestock to
surrendered Maoists for financial stability.
Violation and Misuse of the FEMA
Syllabus: GS2/Government Policy & Interventions;
Statutory Body; GS3/Security Issues
Context
 Recently, the Enforcement Directorate
(ED) has issued an adjudication order
imposing a penalty of over ₹3.44 crore
on BBC World Service India (BBC WS
India) for alleged violations of the Foreign
Exchange Management Act (FEMA) of 1999.
 BBC WS India, classified as a 100% Foreign
Direct Investment (FDI) company, was
found to be in violation of Indian
regulations that mandate a cap of 26% FDI
for digital media entities under the
government approval route.
About the Foreign Exchange Management Act
(FEMA), 1999
 It was enacted to replace the Foreign
Exchange Regulation Act (FERA),
1973, which was considered too restrictive.
 It was enacted in response to India’s
economic liberalization in the 1990s and
aimed to ensure compliance with global
financial norms, and to facilitate external
trade and payments while ensuring the
orderly development and maintenance of
the foreign exchange market in India.
 The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) and
the Enforcement Directorate (ED) are the
primary regulators enforcing FEMA.
Key Provisions of FEMA
 Current and Capital Account
Transactions: While current account
transactions (trade, remittances, etc.) are
generally allowed, capital account
transactions (investment in foreign assets,
debt instruments, etc.) require RBI approval.
 Regulation of Foreign Exchange
Holdings: FEMA permits Indian residents to
hold foreign exchange within specified
limits but prohibits unauthorized dealings.
 Restrictions on Foreign Direct Investment
(FDI): FEMA governs the inflow and outflow
of FDI in India through RBI and government
policies.
 Penalties for Non-Compliance: Violators face
monetary fines, asset seizures, and, in
severe cases, criminal action under
the Prevention of Money Laundering Act
(PMLA).
Penalties for Violations
 FEMA is a civil law, meaning violations
result in monetary penalties, not criminal
charges.
 The ED can impose penalties up to three
times the amount involved in the violation.
 Compounding of Offenses: FEMA violations
can be settled through a compounding
process under RBI’s supervision, avoiding
prolonged litigation.
About Enforcement Directorate (ED)
 It is a specialized financial investigative
agency under the Department of Revenue,
Union Ministry of Finance.
 It investigates financial crimes, foreign
exchange violations, and money laundering
activities, playing a crucial role in ensuring
economic security.
 It was established in 1956 and primarily
enforces two key laws:

1. Prevention of Money Laundering Act (PMLA), 2002;
2. Foreign Exchange Management Act (FEMA), 1999;

Powers and Functions of ED Under FEMA
 Investigate suspected violations of foreign
exchange regulations.
 Conduct searches, seizures, and summons for
cases involving illegal forex transactions.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
162
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Impose penalties for FEMA violations.
 Coordinate with other financial regulatory
agencies like the RBI, Securities and Exchange
Board of India (SEBI), and Financial
Intelligence Unit (FIU-IND).
Common Violations and Misuse of FEMA
 Hawala Transactions: Hawala is an illegal
remittance system used to transfer money
outside the formal banking network,
violating FEMA provisions.
 Round-Tripping: It involves sending funds
abroad and bringing them back as FDI to
take advantage of tax benefits and hide the
source of income.
 It is particularly common in tax havens like
Mauritius, the Cayman Islands, and
Singapore.
 Unauthorized Foreign Remittances: Many
businesses and individuals violate FEMA by
remitting funds abroad without RBI
permission.
 For instance, some companies invest in
offshore entities without reporting to the
authorities, leading to foreign exchange loss
for India.
 Money Laundering Through Shell
Companies: Shell companies are used to
disguise illegal foreign investments.
 FEMA violations often involve creating
bogus companies abroad, routing illicit
funds, and repatriating them under the
guise of legitimate transactions.
 Crypto-Related Violations: With the rise of
cryptocurrency, many individuals and
entities use digital assets to transfer
funds outside India without RBI
approval, violating FEMA norms.
 Violation of Liberalized Remittance Scheme
(LRS): An Indian resident can remit up to
$250,000 per financial year for permissible
foreign transactions under LRS.
 However, many individuals misuse LRS by
exceeding limits or using funds for
speculative trading in foreign stock markets
without proper declarations.
Challenges in Enforcing FEMA
 Difficulty in Tracking Offshore
Transactions: Many violations involve
complex money flows through multiple
offshore accounts, making it difficult for
Indian regulators to track illicit activities.
 Limited Coordination Between
Agencies: While FEMA is regulated by RBI
and ED, coordination with tax authorities,
SEBI, and other regulatory bodies remains a
challenge.
 Multiple agencies like RBI, SEBI, and CBI
also regulate forex violations, leading to
bureaucratic hurdles.
 Use of New-Age Financial Instruments: The
rise of digital banking, cryptocurrencies,
and fintech startups has created new
avenues for FEMA violations that traditional
enforcement mechanisms struggle to
address.
 Globalization and Tax Havens: India’s high
net-worth individuals (HNIs) and
corporates often use tax havens to evade
FEMA regulations, requiring stronger global
cooperation to tackle violations.
Recommended Reforms
 Stricter Penalties: Higher financial penalties
and stringent criminal actions against
offenders can deter future violations.
 Better Surveillance Mechanisms: AI and big
data analytics can be used to track
suspicious foreign transactions.
 Stronger International Cooperation: India
should enhance collaboration with global
financial regulators to track money
laundering.
 Regulation of Cryptocurrencies: Clear
guidelines and regulations are needed to
prevent crypto-related FEMA violations.

SPACE
India’s Space Economy to Increase Five-fold
Syllabus: GS3/Space
Context

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
163
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 As per the union minister of state for
Science & Technology India’s space
economy is set to grow fivefold to $44
billion in the next decade, with private
investments already crossing ₹1,000 crore.
India’s share in Space Industry
 India’s space economy stands at $8
billion contributing 2-3% of the global space
economy and this is expected to rise to 8%
by 2030 and further to 15% by the year
2047.
 With over 400 private space companies,
India ranks fifth globally in no. of space
companies.
Private players in Space Industry
 The number of space startups in India
increased to nearly 200 in 2024 from just
one in 2022, in just about two years.
 The funding received by these start-ups
reached a total of $124.7 Mn in 2023 from
$67.2 Mn in 2021.
 The Skyroot, have launched India’s first
privately built rocket, Vikram-S, into space,
with plans to revolutionize satellite
launches.
Regulation of the Private sector in the Space
industry in India
 National Space Promotion and Authorisation
Centre (IN-SPACe): It is an autonomous and
single window nodal agency in the
Department of Space for the promotion,
encouragement and regulation of space
activities of both government and private
entities.
 NewSpace India Ltd (NSIL): It is mandated
to transfer the matured technologies
developed by the ISRO to Indian industries.
 All of them are under the purview of the
Ministry of Defence.
Significance of privatization of space sector
 Cost Reduction: Profit motive drives private
companies to reduce costs in space missions
and satellite launches.
 Competition & Innovation: Privatization
introduces competition, enhancing
efficiency and fostering innovation.
 Commercialization: Private players enable
space applications in sectors like
agriculture, disaster management, urban
planning, navigation, and communication.
 Autonomy: Greater decision-making
autonomy allows private companies to take
on new projects more swiftly.
 Employment & Self-reliance: Privatization
generates jobs, supports modern
technology adoption, and helps make the
space sector self-reliant.
Challenges
 High Investment Costs: Space technology
requires heavy investment, potentially
leading to monopolization by wealthy
corporations.
 Specialized Expertise: Building and
operating space tech demands specialized
technical skills and resources.
 Protecting intellectual property rights
(IPR): Safeguarding intellectual property
rights is essential to encourage innovation
and investment.
 International Competition: Indian private
space companies face strong competition
from established players like SpaceX and
Blue Origin globally.
Steps Taken by Government
 Space Sector Reforms (2020): Government
allowed private sector participation,
defining roles of IN-SPACe, ISRO, and NSIL.
 Space Vision 2047: Aims for Bharatiya
Antariksh Station (BAS) by 2035 and an
Indian Moon landing by 2040.
 Gaganyaan follow-on missions & BAS first
module by 2028.
 Next Generation Satellite Launch Vehicle
(NGLV) by 2032.
 Chandrayaan-4 by 2027, to collect moon
samples and demonstrate return
technology.
 Venus Orbiter Mission (VOM) by 2028, to
study Venus.
 Indian Space Policy, 2023: Ensures level
playing field for Non-Government Entities
(NGEs) in space activities.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
164
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Venture Capital Fund: Rs. 1000 crore fund
for space startups under IN-SPACe over the
next 5 years.
 SpaceTech Innovation Network (SpIN): SpIN
is a one-of-its-kind public-private
collaboration for start-ups and SMEs in the
space industry.
 Under the amended FDI policy, 100% FDI is
allowed in the space sector.
Way Ahead
 Private entities are now actively involved in
crucial aspects of research, manufacturing,
and fabrication of rockets and satellites,
fostering a vibrant ecosystem of
innovation. It is expected to integrate
Indian companies into global value chains.
 With this, companies will be able to set up
their manufacturing facilities within the
country duly encouraging ‘Make In India
(MII)’ and ‘Atmanirbhar Bharat’ initiatives
of the Government.
GS IV
ETHICS
Karnataka Allows Dignified Death for the Terminally
ill
Syllabus: GS2/ Governance, GS4/ Ethics
In News
 In a historic move, the Karnataka Health
Department issued an order to implement
the Supreme Court’s ruling allowing
terminally ill patients to die with dignity.
 Karnataka is the second State after Kerala to
implement the directive.
 Euthanasia is the intentional act of ending a
person’s life to relieve suffering caused by a
painful, incurable disease or disorder.
Supreme Court’s Directives on Passive Euthanasia
Legal Recognition (2018 & 2023 Rulings):
 The Supreme Court legalized passive
euthanasia in 2018, recognizing the right to
die with dignity under Article 21 of the
Constitution.
 In 2023, the court simplified procedures for
withdrawing life support, ensuring a
structured and ethical approach.
Conditions for Passive Euthanasia:
 Applicable to terminally ill patients with no
hope of recovery.
 Allowed when the patient is in a persistent
vegetative state or prolonged suffering from
an incurable condition.
Advance Medical Directive (AMD) or ‘Living Will’:
 Any competent adult can create an AMD
specifying their medical treatment
preferences in case they lose decision-
making capacity.
 The AMD can nominate two representatives
to make decisions on the patient’s behalf.
Approval Process for Life Support Withdrawal:
 Hospitals must set up Primary and
Secondary Medical Boards (each with three
senior doctors).
 The District Health Officer must be involved
in the decision.
 Final decision requires Judicial Magistrate
of the First Class (JMFC) approval and
reporting to the High Court Registrar.
What is Passive Euthanasia?
 It is withholding or withdrawing life-
sustaining treatment (LST), allowing a
terminally ill patient to die naturally.
 Legal in India (as per Supreme Court rulings
in 2018 & 2023) under strict medical and
legal procedures.
 The Ministry of Health and Family Welfare
(MoHFW) has released draft guidelines
titled “Guidelines for Withdrawal of Life
Support in Terminally Ill Patients.”
Ethical Considerations of Euthanasia
Autonomy and the Right to Die:
 Pro-Euthanasia: Argue that individuals have
the right to choose how they live and die. A
competent person should be allowed to
make decisions regarding their life,
including opting for euthanasia.
 Anti-Euthanasia: Opponents believe that
allowing euthanasia undermines the
intrinsic value of life and could set a
dangerous precedent for determining when
life is worth living.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
165
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
Beneficence and Compassion:
 Pro: Physicians take an oath to reduce
suffering. For terminally ill patients in
unbearable pain, euthanasia can be a
compassionate act that provides relief.
 Anti: Opponents argue that palliative care
and pain management should be prioritized
rather than ending a patient’s life.
Slippery Slope Argument:
 Pro: Some believe euthanasia can be
regulated with strict guidelines to prevent
misuse.
 Anti: Others argue that legalizing euthanasia
could lead to involuntary euthanasia or
pressure on vulnerable individuals (elderly,
disabled) to end their lives to reduce the
burden on families or society.
Sanctity of Life vs. Quality of Life:
 Sanctity of Life: Many religious and moral
perspectives argue that life is sacred and
should not be taken, regardless of suffering.
 Quality of Life: Others contend that when a
person’s quality of life is irreversibly
diminished, euthanasia is a humane option.
Legal and Social Implications:
 Legalization Issues: Countries like the
Netherlands, Belgium, and Canada allow
euthanasia under strict conditions, but
legalizing it worldwide remains
contentious.
 Potential Abuse: There are concerns that
euthanasia laws could be abused, leading to
non-consensual deaths or prioritizing
euthanasia over improving healthcare.
Corruption Perceptions Index (CPI) 2024
Syllabus: GS2/Governance/GS4/Ethics
Context
 India ranked 96 out of 180 countries in
the Corruption Perceptions Index (CPI) for
2024.
About
 The Corruption Perceptions Index (CPI)
2024 highlights how corruption is
hindering global efforts to combat climate
change.
 The index ranks 180 countries and
territories by their perceived levels of public
sector corruption.
 It uses a scale of zero to 100, where “zero” is
highly corrupt and “100” is very clean.
 The report has been compiled
by Transparency International.
 Corruption is an evolving global threat that
does far more than undermine development
– it is a key cause of declining democracy,
instability and human rights violations.
Key CPI 2024 Findings
 85% of the world’s population lives in
countries with CPI scores below 50.
 India scored 38 out of 100, dropping one
point from 2023, and ranked 96th.
 Least Corrupt Countries: Denmark, Finland,
Singapore.
 Most Corrupt Countries: South Sudan,
Somalia, Venezuela.
How Corruption is Affecting Climate Action?
 Weakens Climate Policies: Corruption
prioritizes the interests of a few powerful
groups over the public good, leading to
weaker environmental policies.
 Erodes Governance & Law
Enforcement: Poor governance and lack of
transparency reduce accountability in
climate decision-making.
 Misuse of Climate Funds: Many climate-
vulnerable nations score below 50 on CPI,
increasing risks of fund misallocation.
 Worsens Inequality: Marginalized
communities bear the brunt of climate
change due to ineffective policies.
 Undermines Multilateralism: Corruption
influences climate negotiations,
empowering fossil fuel lobbyists and
reducing transparency.
Recommendations
 Strengthen Anti-Corruption
Measures: Integrate safeguards in climate
finance and policies.
 Increase Transparency in Climate
Policy: Implement lobbying regulations and
open climate finance records.

PM IAS ACADEMY February CA Compilation 2025
166
PLOVER MINDS INSTITUTE LLP | 7373799495| www.pmias.in
 Enhance Investigations &
Protections: Protect whistleblowers and
environmental activists.
 Promote Public Engagement: Ensure
communities affected by climate change are
included in decision-making.

PMIAS Academy UPSC Current Affairs February 2025.pdf

About This Presentation

Slide Content

Tags

Categories

Download

Quick Actions

Statistics

Related Slideshows

PMIAS Academy UPSC Current Affairs February 2025.pdf

About This Presentation

Slide Content

Slide 1

Slide 2

Slide 3

Slide 4

Slide 5

Slide 6

Slide 7

Slide 8

Slide 9

Slide 10

Slide 11

Slide 12

Slide 13

Slide 14

Slide 15

Slide 16

Slide 17

Slide 18

Slide 19

Slide 20

Slide 21

Slide 22

Slide 23

Slide 24

Slide 25

Slide 26

Slide 27

Slide 28

Slide 29

Slide 30

Slide 31

Slide 32

Slide 33

Slide 34

Slide 35

Slide 36

Slide 37

Slide 38

Slide 39

Slide 40

Slide 41

Slide 42

Slide 43

Slide 44

Slide 45

Slide 46

Slide 47

Slide 48

Slide 49

Slide 50

Slide 51

Slide 52

Slide 53

Slide 54

Slide 55

Slide 56

Slide 57

Slide 58

Slide 59

Slide 60

Slide 61

Slide 62

Slide 63

Slide 64

Slide 65

Slide 66

Slide 67

Slide 68

Slide 69

Slide 70

Slide 71

Slide 72

Slide 73

Slide 74

Slide 75

Slide 76

Slide 77